WCC II · 2015-07-14 · The Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) is a microprocessor based device which...

Operator’s GuideOperator’s Guide

www.wattmaster.comwww.wattmaster.com

WCC II

Form: WM-WCCII-OGD-01A Copyright 2006 WattMaster Controls, Inc. WattMaster Controls, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors, or omissions.This document is subject to change without notice.

WattMaster Controls, Inc.8500 NW River Park Drive · Parkville, MO 64152Toll Free PH: (866) 918-1100PH: (816) 505-1100 · FAX: (816) 505-1101 · E-mail: [email protected] our web site at www.wattmaster.com

WCC II Operator’s Guide

Operator Interfaces TOC-1

Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION: SYSTEM OVERVIEW ......... I-1

Diagram of WCCII System ................................... I-1

Operator Control Console Components .............. I-2

Satellite Controller .............................................. I-2

SAT II .............................................................................I-3

SAT II-A ..........................................................................I-3

TUC Input/Output Features .........................................I-3

SAT II-B ..........................................................................I-3

System Features .................................................. I-4

Standard Software ........................................................I-4

Optional Enhanced Color Graphics ............................I-4

Optional Tenant Override ............................................I-4

System Size ..................................................................I-4

Modular Construction ..................................................I-4

SECTION 1: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ...... 1-1

“Where To Find” Features ................................... 1-1

ECC/WCC II Routine Maintenance ...................... 1-1

ECC/WCC II Software Version List ..................... 1-2

Recommended Data Entry Procedure ................ 1-3

Analog Inputs ...................................................... 1-3

Binary Inputs....................................................... 1-4

Analog Outputs ................................................... 1-5

Binary Outputs .................................................... 1-6

Point Addresses .................................................. 1-7

Data Registers .................................................... 1-8

Time Clock ...................................................................1-8

EA Driver ......................................................................1-9

Dual Limit .....................................................................1-9

Alarm Print-Out and Call-Out ............................ 1-10

Run Time Alarm .........................................................1-12

Satellite Fail Alarm ....................................................1-13

Operator Sign On/Off ........................................ 1-13

Manual Overrides .............................................. 1-13

System Re-Boot ................................................ 1-13

Hardware Requirements ................................... 1-13

SECTION 2: INITIATING THE SYSTEM......... 2-1

Dual Disk Drive Systems ..................................... 2-1

Hard Disk Drive Systems .................................... 2-2

Copying Disks ..................................................... 2-2

Formatting Disks................................................. 2-2

Copying Data - Dual Floppy Systems .................. 2-4

Copying Data - Hard Disk Drive Systems ........... 2-4

Returning to the ECC/WCC II Program ............... 2-6

Dual Disk Drive Systems ............................................2-6

Hard Disk Drive Systems ............................................2-6

Assign Operator Access Codes .......................... 2-6

Password Entry ................................................... 2-7

SECTION 3: SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS ......... 3-1

HELP SCREEN ..................................................... 3-1

MAIN MENU SCREEN .......................................... 3-5

ANALOG INPUT SUMMARY SCREEN .................. 3-7

ANALOG INPUT SCREEN .................................... 3-9

CONTROL OUTPUT SCREENS .......................... 3-12

CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN ...............3-13

EA DRIVER SCREEN .................................................3-15

DUAL LIMIT SCREEN ................................................3-17

TIMECLOCK SCREEN ...............................................3-20

ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................... 3-22

ANALOG OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN ..................3-22

ANALOG OUTPUT SCREEN .....................................3-24

TREND LOGGING .............................................. 3-25

TREND LOGGING SUMMARY SCREEN ...................3-26

ANALOG PEAK TREND LOG SCREEN ....................3-27

ANALOG TREND TREND LOG SCREEN .................3-28

CHANGE OF STATE TREND LOG SCREEN ............3-31

RUN TIME TREND LOG SCREEN .............................3-32

LOGIC SWITCH .................................................. 3-34

LOGIC SWITCH SUMMARY SCREEN ......................3-34

LOGIC SWITCH SCREEN ..........................................3-35

ALARM SUMMARY SCREEN .............................. 3-36

SATELLITE SUMMARY SCREEN ....................... 3-38

OVERRIDE SCREEN ........................................... 3-40


Operator InterfacesTOC-2

Table of Contents

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE SCREEN .......................... 3-41

SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN ...................... 3-43

OPERATOR CODES SCREEN ..................................3-45

ON/OFF UNITS OF MEASURE

MESSAGE SCREEN ............................................ 3-46

ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN ............................... 3-47

SATELLITE SAVE/RESTORE .............................. 3-48

SATELLITE COPY SCREEN ............................... 3-51

SECURE SCREEN .............................................. 3-52

ENERGY CONSUMPTION SCREEN .................... 3-53

WEEK SCHEDULES ........................................... 3-55

WEEK SCHEDULE SUMMARY SCREEN .................3-55

WEEK SCHEDULE SCREEN .....................................3-56

OPTIMAL START SCREEN ................................. 3-57

ANALOG GLOBALS ............................................ 3-60

ANALOG GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN .................3-61

ANALOG GLOBAL SCREEN .....................................3-62

ANALOG GLOBAL - AVERAGED LIST ...................3-64

ANALOG GLOBAL - SORTED LIST ........................3-65

ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE .................3-66

SLIDING WINDOW .....................................................3-66

SLIDING WINDOW MODE SCREEN .........................3-67

AVERAGE MODE .......................................................3-69

AVERAGE MODE SCREEN .......................................3-70

ACCUMULATION MODE ...........................................3-71

ACCUMULATION MODE SCREEN ...........................3-73

MATH FUNCTION SCREEN .......................................3-75

LOOK UP TABLE MODE ...........................................3-77

LOOK UP TABLE SCREEN .......................................3-78

BINARY GLOBALS ............................................. 3-80

Binary Global Summary Screen...............................3-80

COMBINATORIAL MODE ..........................................3-82

COMPARE MODE ......................................................3-84

ALARM MODE ............................................................3-86

EXTERNAL MODE .....................................................3-87

ALARM-BY-CLASS MODE ........................................3-88

SHED/RESTORE SCREEN .................................. 3-89

DUTY CYCLE SCREEN....................................... 3-91

PROPORTIONAL RESET SCREEN ..................... 3-93

SPECIAL KEYS PROGRAM ................................ 3-96

UTILITY SCREEN .............................................. 3-98

SYSTEM PARAMETER II SCREEN ...........................3-99

REBUILD SATELLITE TABLE SCREEN .................3-101

SEARCH AND OVERRIDE SCREEN .......................3-102

POINT DESCRIPTION SEARCH SCREEN ..............3-104

LOGICAL ADDRESS SEARCH SCREEN ................3-106

ENHANCED GRAPHICS SCREEN ..........................3-108

CUSTOM SCREEN ...................................................3-111

SET MONITOR COLOR SCREEN ...........................3-114

TENANT OVERRIDE SCREEN ................................3-115

TENANT OVERRIDE REPORT ................................3-115

Binary Global Screen - Combinatorial Mode ........3-118

Tenant Override Report ..........................................3-118

MESSAGE SCREEN ................................................3-120

WCC/SCC FILE MANAGEMENT SCREEN .............3-121

EXIT WCC II SYSTEM ..............................................3-124

TUC.................................................................. 3-125

GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................3-125

TUC - ANALOG INPUT SCREEN ............................3-127

TUC - CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN .3-128

TUC - EA DRIVER SCREEN ..................................3-129

TUC SUMMARY SCREEN ........................................3-131

TUC SETUP SCREEN ..............................................3-134

PNEUMATIC OUTPUT SCREEN .............................3-140

STEPPER MOTOR ACTUATOR SCREEN ..............3-142

TUC-VR ........................................................... 3-144

GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................3-144

ANALOG INPUT SCREEN .......................................3-146

CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN .............3-148

EA DRIVER SCREEN ...............................................3-149

TUC-VR EA DRIVER SCREEN ................................3-150

TUC-VR SETUP SCREEN ........................................3-152


Operator Interfaces TOC-3

Table of Contents

SECTION 4: REMOTECOMMUNICATIONS ..................................... 4-1

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS .................................. 4-1

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ................................... 4-2

INITIALIZING THE DISK ..................................... 4-2

OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS .............................. 4-4

FCC/SCC II MAIN MENU ...................................... 4-5

SEARCH ROUTINES ............................................ 4-6

SATELLITE SAVE/RESTORE PROGRAM .............. 4-7

AUTOMATIC CALL OUT ON ALARM .................... 4-8

MODEM SWITCH SETTINGS ................................ 4-9

Hayes Smartmodem 1200 ...........................................4-9

ADC Modem Switch Settings ...................................4-10

Capetronics Modem Switch Settings ......................4-10

Okidata Modem Switch Settings ..............................4-12

SOFTWARE KEY ................................................ 4-13

SECTION 5: INSTALLATION GUIDE ............. 5-1

OPERATOR CONTROL CONSOLE ........................ 5-1

Uninterruptable Power Supply ...................................5-1

MODEM SWITCH SETTINGS ................................ 5-2

Hayes Smartmodem 1200 ...........................................5-2

ADC Modem .................................................................5-3

Capetronics Modem ....................................................5-3

Okidata Okitel 1200 .....................................................5-5

SOFTWARE KEY .................................................. 5-6

SATELLITE CONTROLLER .................................. 5-7

Mounting in an Enclosure ..........................................5-7

System Wiring ...........................................................5-10

Addressing (Numbering) SAT II Controllers ...........5-13

SAT II Chip Switches .................................................5-15

SAT II V-Out (DAC) Modules .....................................5-16

Binary Input Board ....................................................5-17

V-Out Binary Interface Board ...................................5-18

Proportional-Integral (PI) Output Board ..................5-21

Temperature Sensors ................................................5-24

SAT II-A/TUC ...................................................... 5-26

The SAT II-A ...............................................................5-27

Addressing the SAT II-A ............................................5-28

Addressing (Numbering) TUC’s ...............................5-29

SAT II-A Wiring Diagram ...........................................5-30

SAT II-B ............................................................. 5-31

System Architecture .................................................5-31

SAT II-B - General Information .................................5-32

Addressing (Numbering) the SAT II-B .....................5-33

SAT II-B Wiring Diagram ...........................................5-34

CPU to SAT II-B Wiring .............................................5-35

TUC-VR .............................................................. 5-36

TUC-VR Communication Wires ................................5-40

SAT II-B to TUC-VR Wiring .......................................5-41

INDEX .......................................................... Index-1


Operator InterfacesTOC-4

Table of Contents


Operator Interfaces I-1

System Overview

INTRODUCTION: SYSTEM OVERVIEW____________________________________________________

The ECC/WCC II is a microprocessor based energy management and temperature control system designed to minimize the energy usage of a building and maximize the occupant comfort.The ECC/WCC II system provides the building owner with a means of monitoring and controlling building mechanical systems from one central location. The ECC/WCC II system provides computerized control of building mechanical systems, but requires no computer experience to operate or program the system.

Diagram of WCCII System

The “front end” of the ECC/WCC II system consists of a personal computer with custom communication boards. See Diagram that follows. The computer is referred to as the Central Processing Unit (CPU), and the computer, keyboard, monitor (screen), printer (optional), and modem (optional) together are referred to as the Operator Control Console. The CPU communicates with the remote satellite controllers using a two-wire communication loop.


Operator InterfacesI-2

System Overview

Operator Control Console ComponentsThe building operator monitors and controls the building mechanical systems from one central location called the Operator Control Console. The Operator Control Console consists of the following components:

1. Central Processing Unit (CPU)2. Keyboard3. Monitor (CRT)4. Printer (optional)5. Modem (optional)

Central Processing UnitA personal computer with custom communication boards acts as the Central Processing Unit (CPU) which communicates with the remote mounted satellite controllers via a two wire communication loop.

The personal computer is dedicated to the ECC/WCC II system and cannot be used for other functions. The use of hardware accessories with the ECC/WCC II CPU that is not specifi cally approved in writing by WattMaster Controls Group will void the warranty on the ECC/WCC II system. The use of software other than that furnished with the ECC/WCC II system may result in system malfunction. WattMaster Controls Group is not responsible for a system failure so generated.

MonitorThe monitor resembles a television and displays computer data in text on its cathode ray tube (CRT), or screen.

KeyboardThe keyboard is arranged like a typewriter to allow manual entry of data and programs. We suggest that you fi rst become familiar with the keyboard before attempting to operate the system. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with your computer for additional keyboard information.

Note: We highly recommend that you only use the number keys along the top of the keyboard while entering numeric values and use the keypad ONLY for cursor control on the ECC/WCC II system.

PrinterThe on-site printer allows the operator to print status or schedule summaries, a permanent record of entered programs, and trend logging reports. The printer will automatically print alarms as they occur, print operator ID as the user signs on and off the system, and print any overrides that are entered.

Satellite ControllerThe satellite controllers are fi eld mounted, microprocessor based units which provide direct digital control of building mechanical systems. The satellite controllers receive operating instructions from the CPU, but once they are programmed, they have the “brains” to monitor and control building mechanical systems independently of the CPU. If communication from the CPU to the satellite controllers is broken, the satellite controllers will continue to control at programmable setpoints. In the event of a primary power failure, the satellites will retain both their operating instructions and accumulated data in battery backed memory.

The three versions of the satellite controller that will communicate with the ECC/WCC II system are the SAT II, SAT II-A, and SAT II-B.


Operator Interfaces I-3

System Overview

SAT IISensors and relays etc. are wired to the SAT II controller to allow it to monitor and control loads directly. Each SAT II controller can handle the following number of inputs and outputs:

8 analog or binary inputs16 additional binary inputs - 1 binary input board receives 8 binary inputs - 2 binary input boards may be used with one SAT II8 analog outputs (0-15 VDC maximum range) - 1 DAC module enables 4 analog outputs - 2 DAC modules may be installed in SAT II - Any or all of the 8 analog outputs may be converted to binary outputs using 1 V-Out to Binary board - 1 chip switch is required for each binary output16 binary outputs - 1 chip switch is required for each binary output

SAT II-AThe SAT II-A is a version of the satellite controller that allows the ECC/WCC II front end computer to communicate with remote mounted Terminal Unit Controllers.

The Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) is a microprocessor based device which can be used to control terminal units such as pressure dependent variable air volume (VAV) boxes, pressure dependent fan power boxes, fan coil units, heat pumps etc. The TUC can be used as a stand-alone controller, or the TUC can be used with the ECC/WCC II system.

The TUC accepts an input from a room temperature sensor to allow it to monitor the space temperature and when used with the SA (Stepper Actuator) actuator, provides pressure dependent control of the primary air damper on terminal units such as variable air volume boxes, constant fan power induction units, and intermittent fan power induction units. The SA Actuator is not an integral part of the TUC and must be ordered and purchased separately. The TUC can also have three relay outputs to provide control of the fan and fi rst and second stages of heat on fan terminal units, or to control the fan, compressor, and reversing valve on a heat pump. The TUC can also provide an output to control two 24 VDC solenoid air valves to obtain “feed” and “bleed” type control of pneumatic controlled devices. The TUC is generally mounted at the terminal unit (i.e. VAV box, heat pump, etc.).

••

•

•

When the TUC’s are to be used with the ECC/WCC II system, a type SAT II-A satellite controller is required as the interface between the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the Terminal Unit Controller (TUC). The SAT II-A is a special version of the satellite controller, and its only purpose is to interface with the TUC’s. Up to 32 TUC’s can be connected to one SAT II-A using a 3-wire, shielded cable. The TUC’s are wired to the SAT II-A in a “daisy chain” arrangement. That is to say, the 3-wire cable does not have to be run from each TUC back to the SAT II-A. The 3-wire cable is run from the SAT II-1 to the nearest TUC and the 3-wire cable is extended from that TUC to the next.

TUC Input/Output Features

The fi ve versions of the pressure dependent TUC are shown in the table that follows:

Model TUC Description

TUC-R 3 Relays with 2 amp, 24 Volt SPDT ContactsTUC-A Stepper Motor Actuator Output

TUC-AR Stepper Motor Actuator Output & 3-24 Volt SPDT Relays

TUC-P Pneumatic OutputTUC-PR Pneumatic Output & 3-24 Volt SPDT Relays

Note: The SA actuator and solenoid air valves must be ordered and purchased separately.

SAT II-BThe SAT II-B is similar to the SAT II-A, only the SAT II-B communicates with up to 32 TUC-VR’s.

The TUC-VR is a velocity resetting (pressure independent) controller for use with variable air volume (VAV) terminal units. The TUC-VR mounts on the VAV box and communicates with the front end ECC/WCC II through a SAT II-B. The TUC-VR provides precise direct digital control of the following types of VAV terminal units:

1-Cooling Only2-Cooling/Staged Electric Reheat3-Cooling/Time Proportioning Electric Reheat4-Cooling Proportional Reheat Valve5-Parallel Fan Powered/No Reheat6-Parallel Fan Powered/Staged Electric Reheat


Operator InterfacesI-4

System Overview

7-Parallel Fan Powered/Time Proportioning Electric Reheat8-Parallel Fan Powered/Proportional Reheat Valve9-Series Fan Powered/No reheat10-Series Fan Powered/Staged Electric Reheat11-Series Fan Powered/Time Proportioning Electric Reheat12-Series Fan Powered/Proportional Reheat Valve

System Features

Standard SoftwareThe following features are part of the standard ECC/WCC II software package:

User Designed ScreensSchedule Override by Room Number (or name)Point Involvement SummaryData Copy RoutineMessage ScreenMath Operators/Enthalpy LogicUser Confi gurable Look Up TablesSliding Window Averaging of ValuesAccumulation of ValuesTrend Logging features which include: Analog Trend (with graph) Analog Peak Change of State Run TimeProportional Reset (with graph)Auto-Scan and Print RoutinesMultiple Energy Consumption TablesRemote monitoringLocal or remote override capabilityRemote read and resetAutomatic print-out and call-out on alarm16 operator codes with 4 levels of access365 day timeclock with automatic daylight savings time changeover32 week schedules and 18 holiday schedules8 alarm levelsTemperature control with automatic temperature setbackAdaptive optimized start and optimized stopDuty cyclingTimed overridesDemand limitingDead band spreadingLighting control

••••••••••

•••••••••

•••

••••••

Optional Enhanced Color GraphicsThe Enhanced Color Graphics option allows the ECC/WCC II system to display up to 60 color graphic pictures in the same front end computer that acts as the ECC/WCC II CPU. The color graphic pictures can be drawn using nearly any color graphics package, and once the picture is displayed on the screen, a “snap-shot” of the picture is captured and used as the background picture on the Enhanced Color Graphics Screen. Dynamic analog and binary values are then placed on the screen to allow the user to see actual temperatures, status, etc. in the proper place on the picture.

When ordering the Enhanced Color Graphics option, a WCC II with a 20MB hard disk, an EGA card, and color monitor is required as the front end computer along with the additional Enhanced Color Graphics software and a graphics package such as PC Paintbrush.

Optional Tenant OverrideThe Tenant Override Feature allows the occupants in the building to call the ECC/WCC II system on the telephone and cause the lights and/or heating and/or cooling equipment to control according to their occupied (daytime) control scheme. The system has the capability of overriding the control for 500 zones.

The ECC/WCC II system will “talk” to the tenant using an artifi cial voice, and the user instructs the ECC/WCC II system by pressing the numbers on the telephone.

A summary report of which tenants used the telephone override system is available for billing purposes. A separate telephone line is required for the Tenant Override Feature.

System SizeThe central processing unit is capable of communicating with up to 240 SAT II controllers. The front end ECC/WCC II considers each SAT II-A or SAT II-B as 4 SAT II controllers. The equivalent number of satellite controllers must be under 240.

A system with 240 satellite controllers is capable of handling up to 11520 points, a point being a hard wired input or output.

Modular ConstructionEquipment cost is reduced because the system, including the satellite controllers, is modular. Only the number of satellite controllers required for the job are purchased, and only the required number of outputs are purchased for the satellites. Installation cost is reduced because “global” information gathered at one satellite can be shared with other satellites, eliminating costly intermediate controls.

Section 1: General Instructions


Operator Interfaces 1-1

SECTION 1: GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS____________________________________________________

“Where To Find” FeaturesThe following is a list of commonly used ECC/WCC II features and the screens you should access to use them.

FEATURES SCREENAlarms

Utility-Sys Par IISystem ParametersSystem Parameters

“Call-Out-On-Alarm”Call “Both” or “Either” Phone NumberInput Telephone NumbersSelect Remote Printer

Clear (Acknowledge) Alarms Alarm SummaryDisable Local Printer Utility-Sys Par IISet Alarm Limits

Analog InputsRun TimeGlobal Analog ValuesGlobal Binary Values

Analog Input ScreenTrend LogsGlobal AnalogGlobal Binary

View AlarmsAll Alarms (Except Globals)Global Alarms

Alarm SummaryGlobal Summary

Daylight Savings Time Adjustment System ParametersDemand Limiting Shed/RestoreDelete Back-Up Files Utility-File MgmntMonitor Analog Inputs(Temperature/Pressure etc.)

Find Highest or Lowest Building TempFind Average Building TempPresent ValueTrend Logs

Global Analog-SortGlobal Analog-AvgAnalog Input SummaryAnalog Trend

Monitor Binary Inputs (air fl ow switch etc.)Present ValueTrend Log.

Logic SwitchesChange of State

Password EntryAssign Operator Access Codes“Sign-On”“Sign-Off”.

Sys Par/Oper CodesSystem ParametersSecure Screen

Print Screens Automatically Special KeysRebuild Satellite Tables Utility-Rbld SatSchedules

Change Schedules Permanently.Holiday Schedules

Week SchedulesHoliday & Week Sch

FEATURES SCREENSetpoints

Change Setpoints - SatelliteChange Setpoints - TUC

Control OutputsEA Driver & TUC

Sequence Satellites After a Power Outage Satellite SummaryTime and Date Modifi cations System Parameters

ECC/WCC II Routine MaintenanceThe following maintenance items should be performed on a regular basis:

Service Item As

Req’d

Every

Wk

Every

Mo

Every

3 Mo

Every

6 Mo

Every

12 MoBlow out keyboard

X X

Blow out CPU assy

X X

Check all external cable connections

X X

Test/Verify U.P.S. operation

X

Clean display screen

X X

Dim display screen

*X

Clean fl oppy drives

X X

Test fl oppy drives

X

Test CPU memory

X

Test display monitor

X

Test printer X

Test modem (system’s ability to answer incoming calls)

X

Test modem (system’s ability to call-out-on-alarm)

X



Operator Interfaces1-2

Service Item As

Req’d

Every

Wk

Every

Mo

Every

3 Mo

Every

6 Mo

Every

12 MoDelete“back-up” (*.bak) fi les

X X

Make “back-up” copies of disks

X X

Check disks for available space to prevent overfi lling the disk

X X

Check loop connection on rear of CPU

X

Save satellite data to disk

X X

Rebuild all satellite and global tables

X

Test satellites’ local-set capability

X

Test satellites’ battery (or capacitor)

X

Check/Clear satellitecommunica-tion errors on Satellite Summary Screen

X X

Run loop test XCheck/Reset trend logs

X X

View/Clear all alarms

X X

Cycle power to CPU to verify correct system re-start after a power outage

X

* Set the screen’s intensity to the lowest setting when the system is not being used.

ECC/WCC II Software Version ListThe ECC/WCC II software is updated periodically to include more features. The two fi les that change as the ECC/WCC II system is upgraded are the WCC2 fi le and the BACKTASK fi le. When a WCC II fi le is installed in a system, the BACKTASK fi le may need to be changed also. The following list shows the WCC2 version numbers and the BACKTASK fi le that must be used with it.

Note: You can see the present WCC2 and BACKTASK version used by the system by looking at the lower left hand corner of the Main Menu Screen.

WCC2 Version Minimum BACKTASK Version1.47* 1.1B1.48* 1.1B1.49* 1.1B1.52 1.221.54 1.241.6A 1.241.6B 1.241.63 1.241.64 X.2B**1.65 X.2BB**1.67 1.2E1.68 1.2E1.69 1.4A1.70 1.4A1.71 1.4B1.72 1.4B1.74 1.4D

* These versions of software require the front end computer to have 448K of RAM memory; later versions require 640K.

**X = 1 to 3 1 = IBM PC or XT 2 = IBM XT 286 3 = 3 satellite system

Recommended Data Entry ProcedureWhen setting up an ECC/WCC II system, the screens can be programmed in any order. However, you may fi nd it easier to follow this sequence:

Make back-up copies of the disks

System Parameter Screen

Utility Screen - Rebuild Satellite Tables

Satellite Summary Screen

On/Off Units Messages Screen / Alarm Message Screen —Enter the On/Off messages, units of measure messages, and alarm messages, and then print the messages using <Print Screen>. Keep a copy of these messages handy while entering data on the remaining screens

Week Schedule Screens

Holiday Screen

Analog Input Screens

Logic Switch Screens

Control Output Screens

TUC Screens

Analog Output Screens

Analog Global Screens

Binary Global Screens

Optimal Start Screens

Shed/Restore Screens

Duty Cycle Screens

Proportional Reset Screens

Energy Consumption Screens

Trend Log Screens

Custom Screens/Enhanced Graphic Screens

Special Keys Programs

Save Satellite Data to Disk

Make Back-Up Copies of the Disks

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

Analog InputsAn analog input is a numerical value (signal) sent to the SAT II controller to allow monitoring of space temperatures, duct pressures etc. The SAT II controller can accept 8 analog inputs which are named, A1-A8. (Note: A1-8 may be either analog or binary inputs.) On certain screens (such as Global Analog Screens), you must indicate the satellite controller number along with the channel on the satellite controller. For example, 12A2 means analog input number 2 on satellite controller #12.

The analog inputs are usually wired to the “+V” and “ATI” (Actual Temperature In) terminals on the SAT II controller (three wire sensors are wired to the “GND” terminal also.) The “+V” terminal on channels 1-7 are a 12 VDC power source. The “+V” terminal on channel 8 provides either 12 VDC or 18 VDC depending on the position of the jumper under the cover near channel 8. To get 12 VDC from the “+V” terminal on channel 8, the jumper must connect the A and B terminals. To get 18 VDC, the jumper must connect the B and C terminals.

A 20 mA sensor can be used on up to 5 channels on the SAT II controller. The total current for all 8 analog inputs must be kept under 115 mA.




Binary InputsA binary input is an On/Off (dry contact closure) signal sent to the SAT II controller to allow monitoring of air fl ow switches, switch settings, etc. The SAT II controller comes standard with 16 small toggle switches on its front panel labeled, L1-L16 which are in effect manually controlled binary inputs. The ECC/WCC II monitors the On/Off status of these switches and can control and/or alarm based on the position of these switches. The binary input board(s) allow the manual toggle switches to be replaced with a terminal strip which accepts wiring from remote mounted binary input devices.

The SAT II controller has two sets of 8 small toggle switches on its front cover labeled L1-L16. Switches L1-L8 are housed together in one module, and switches L9-L16 are housed together in another module. One module of switches is removed for each binary input board and replaced with a ribbon cable which connects the binary input board to the SAT II controller. The binary devices to be monitored are then wired to the terminal strip of the binary input board. The binary input board requires a 24 VAC power supply.




Analog OutputsAn analog output is a variable DC voltage signal sent from the satellite controller used for proportional control of devices with modulating actuators. The analog outputs are wired to the “V-Out” and “Gnd” terminals on the SAT II controller and are named P1-P8. The P stands for Proportional Output.

The SAT II controller has the capability of providing 8 analog output signals which have a maximum range of 0-15 VDC. If the analog outputs are to be used, V-Out modules must be purchased and are fi eld installed. One V-Out module is required for 4 analog outputs, and two V-Out modules can be installed in one satellite controller to allow one satellite controller to provide up to eight analog outputs.

Each analog output has a limit of 15 mA. The total current output of all 8 analog outputs must be kept under 115 mA.

Note: Later versions of the satellite controllers require two modules for each set of four analog outputs. On these models, sockets U-9 and U-10 activate outputs 1-4, and sockets U-11 and U-14 activate outputs 5-8.




Binary OutputsA binary output on the SAT II controller is the electronic equivalent of a relay contact which is used to complete a 24 VAC circuit to activate on/off devices such as relays, 2-position valves, etc. The binary output contacts cannot be used to complete a DC voltage circuit; they will work with AC circuits only. The binary output terminals are labeled H, COM, and C.

The SAT II controller is capable of providing 16 binary (on/off) outputs. Each binary output requires 1 chip switch which is purchased separately and is fi eld installed.

The terminals for the binary outputs are found at the lower left hand corner of the SAT II controller. The “COM” to “H” contacts are referred to as K1h-K8h. The “COM” to “C” contacts are referred to as K1c-K8c.




Point AddressesA Point Address uniquely identifi es a point within the ECC/WCC II system. All point addresses have an associated “analog” or “binary” value. The term “analog” simply means a value which is represented by a number (such as room temperature, duct static pressure, etc.). The term “binary” means the value is represented by one of two conditions, ON or OFF. An input is a signal sent to the ECC/WCC II system, and an output is sent from the ECC/WCC II system. Therefore, room temperature is an analog input, fan status is a binary input, and controlling a fan relay is a binary output.

In addition to the inputs and outputs that are wired to the SAT II controllers, there are several software point addresses within the system. For example, the ECC/WCC II system has 32 week schedules. This means that a separate day/night schedule can be assigned to 32 different areas of the building.

For example, assume that you have three different areas in a building that have different schedules as shown in the following table.

Area Occupied TimeWeek Schedule #1 1st Floor West 8:00 am - 5:00 pm, M-FWeek Schedule #2 1st Floor East 7:00 am - 7:00 pm, M-FWeek Schedule #3 2nd Floor 9:00 am - 4:00 pm, M-Th

Week Schedule #1 is named W1, and the value of W1 will be On between 8:00 am and 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday, etc.

The Name column in the table that follows is the name that you should use when specifying a point address to the system. The “n” is where a “point number” for the point address is to be entered.

Table of Point AddressesName Description Value

Cn Comparator (See analog input screen binary setpoint)

On/Off

An Analog Inputs AnalogPn Analog Inputs Analog

KnH Control Outputs(H Contacts)

On/Off

KnC Control Outputs(C Contacts)

On/Off

RnA Data Registers (a) AnalogRnB Data Registers (b) AnalogTnR Trend Logging Run Time Analog

Name Description ValueTnC Trend Logging Change of State NoneTnA Trend Logging Analog Trend NoneTnP Trend Logging Analog Peak NoneLn Logical Input On/OffWn Week Schedules On/OffSn Optimal Starts On/Off

GBn Binary Globals On/OffGAn Analog Globals Analog

Constant Point AddressesThe following list shows several point addresses within the system that are always available for use on many of the data input screens.

Name Description Associated Data Type0 Logical Zero Always Off1 Logical One Always On

//// Logical Null Ignored. . . . Logical Off Always Off/Not Used

Note: When a point option is not required, replace the default value (/ / / /) with either a zero (0) or dot (. . . .) to force the system to realize that the option is always OFF. If the slashes are not replaced, the system will ignore that input and the system can, in rare cases, see the slashes as being ON.

Name DescriptionAnalog 0 Initiates a 0 (zero) value

TIME Current Time (in HH:MM format)TIMEB Current Time (in minutes-since-midnight format)

NEWSEC New SecondNEWMIN New MinuteNEWHR New Hour

NEWDAY New DayNEWMON New Month




Time & TimeB

These logical addresses are the actual time on HH:MM (TIME) and minutes-since-midnight (TIMEB) formats. They are considered analog values and have value ranges of 0000 to 2359 (TIME), and 0000 to 1439 (TIMEB).

Typical application of these logical addresses includes use in the Dual Limit mode, allowing such modes of control as “On-Between-Times” and “Off-Between-Times.”

NEWSET, NEWMIN, NEWHR, NEWDAY, & NEWMON

These logical addresses are considered binary values and are based on real-time. They have a pulse-type nature in that each of these addresses has a value of one (or ON) for one second after the occurrence of the specifi ed event. After the one second ON period has elapsed, the value returns to zero (or OFF).

These addresses have several uses throughout the system. One example would be the generation of a variable duty cycle output. When used in conjunction with the separate “Minimum ON/OFF” timers, these addresses can achieve cycles of from one second to several days with a wide range of cycles.

Examples of “point addresses” within the system:

Name DescriptionGA12 Global Analog #12135A5 Satellite #135, Analog Input #5

A5 Analog Input #5, Current SatelliteW12 Week Schedule #12S27 Optimal Start #27C1 Setpoint Comparator on Analog Input #1

K1h When K1h is ON, the chip switch within the satellite controller which connects the electrical path between the “H” and “COM” terminals on

channel 1 of the satellite controller is closed. When K1h is OFF, the circuit is open.

14P3 Satellite #14, Analog Output #3.

Data RegistersThe ECC/WCC II system has some capabilities built into the software that are very helpful, and you should be aware of them. There is a Data Register associated with each of the Control Output Screens. A Control Output Screen allows the user to tell the satellite controller when to open and close the binary output contacts. A Control Output Screen can be a Time Clock, EA Driver, or Dual Limit Mode Screen.

Time ClockWhen the binary output contact on the satellite controller is controlled by a Time Clock Screen, the contact opens and closes based on time only. For example, a Time Clock Screen can be used to run a water circulating pump from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday. Each Time Clock Screen has a Data Register associated with it.

The Data Register is an analog value which is the time in seconds since the satellite controller binary output contact closed. Assume the water circulating pump is controlled by satellite controller contact K1h. That is to say, the “COM” to “H” contact on channel 1 of the satellite controller closes to complete a 24 VAC signal to run the pump.

The Data Register for a Time Clock Screen is named RnA or RnB. R stands for data register, n refers to channel 1-8 of the satellite controller, A means the “COM” to “H” contact, and B means the “COM” to “C” contact. Therefore, the Data Register for contact K1h is R1A. As contact K1h closes, the Data Register for contact Klh (R1A) starts recording time in seconds. That is to say, the value of R1A is the time in seconds since contact K1h closed.

RnA = Time in seconds since COM to H contact closedRnB = Time in seconds since COM to C contact closed

The Data Register for a Time Clock Screen might be used to start one piece of equipment after another has been started. For example, assume we want to start an air handler two minutes after the water circulating pump starts. The pump would be controlled by a Time Clock Screen as mentioned above. The air handler would be controlled using a Dual Limit Screen. The analog input value for the Dual Limit Screen would be R1A, which is time in seconds since the pump started. The Dual Limit Screen is set up to close the contact for the air handler when the value of R1A is between 120 seconds and infi nity.




EA DriverThe EA Driver Mode is “3-point fl oating” control. For example, assume that the control outputs on channel 2 of the satellite controller are used to control a Tempmaster VAV box using the EA Driver Mode. When the space needs heat, the “COM” to “H” contacts on the satellite controller will close to drive the damper in the VAV box to the closed position. When the space needs cooling, the “COM” to “C” contact on the satellite controller will close to open the damper in the VAV box.

There are two Data Registers associated with an EA Driver Screen. The value of the fi rst Data Register is equal to the setpoint entered on the EA Driver Screen and is referred to as “RnA.” The value of the second Data Register is equal to the difference between the setpoint and the actual temperature and is referred to as “RnB.” “R” stands for data register, and “n” refers to channel 1-8 of the satellite controller.

RnA = SetpointRnB = Difference between Setpoint and Measured Value (error)

For example, assume that the setpoint for the room in question is 72 °F, and the actual temperature is 70 °F. The value of Data Register R2A (setpoint) is 72 °F, and the value of Data Register R2B (error) is -2 °F, since the actual space temperature is 2 °F below the setpoint.

The Data Register could be used to turn on a second stage of heat whenever the space temperature falls 2 °F below setpoint. Assume that the second stage of heat is a heating coil which is energized when satellite controller contact K3h is closed. A Dual Limit Screen is used to control contact K3h. Data Register R2B is entered as the analog input value for the Dual Limit Screen. When the value of R2B is -2 or less (the space temperature is at least 2 °F below setpoint), contact K3h closes to turn on the second stage of heat.

Dual LimitWhen the binary output contact on the satellite controller is controlled by a Dual Limit Screen, the contact opens and closes based on how the analog input value compares to a pair of setpoints. There is one Data Register for each contact on the satellite controller which is controlled by a Dual Limit Screen. The value of the Data Register is the difference between the setpoint and the actual temperature.

The Data Register for a Dual Limit Screen is named “RnA” or RnB.” “R” stands for data register, “n” refers to channel 1-8 of the satellite controller, “A” means the “COM” to “H” contact, and “C” means the “COM” to “C” contact. Therefore, the Data Register for contact Klh is R1A.

RnA = Difference between Setpoint and Measured Value (COM to H)

RnB = Difference between Setpoint and Measured Value (COM to C)

The Dual Limit Screen has two setpoints, the high limit and the low limit. Since the Data Register is the difference between the setpoint and the actual temperature, you have to “tell” the system what you are considering the setpoint to be. Therefore, the Data Register is measured from either the “Midpoint” or “Nearest Limit” of the setpoints, depending on how the Dual Limit Screen is set up.

For example, assume that a Dual Limit Screen is used to control a heat pump compressor to have the compressor off if the space is between 70 and 74 °F. If the space temperature is below 70 °F, the compressor will be on for heating, and if the space temperature is above 74 °F, the compressor will be on for cooling. Assume the actual space temperature is 76 °F.

The Data Register can be measured from either the “Midpoint” or the “Nearest Limit.” If the Data Register is measured from the “Midpoint,” the value of the Data is 4 °F.

Low Limit High Limit 70 72 74 76 4 Deg Midpoint Actual Temperature

Data Register

Difference between actual temperature and the “Midpoint” of the setpoints = 4 °F, and therefore, the value of the Data Register is 4 °F.

If the Data Register is measured from the nearest limit, the value of the Data Register is 2 °F.

Low Limit High Limit 70 74 76 2 Deg Nearest Actual Limit Temperature Data Register




Alarm Print-Out and Call-OutThe ECC/WCC II will automatically print alarms as they occur on a local printer or will call out over standard telephone lines and report the alarms to a remote printer. There are eight different alarm types or alarm priorities. The fi rst fi ve alarm types can “call-out”; each of these fi ve alarm types can call a primary and alternate number.

The following is a sample of the ECC/WCC II print-outs:

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ECC/WCC II SYSTEM ID: *** TEMPERATURE INDUSTRIES, INC. *** 14:36 10/08

ALARM: ANALOG LIMITSSAT #: 1 [SCIENCE RM] Input: 1 went into alarm at 14:36 on 10/08. High: 80.6 Deg F low: ****** Deg F Class: 4

OPERATOR LOG-ONOperator 33333 logged-on locally at 14:37 on 10/08 [Pswd Level: 3]

ALARM: RUN-TIMESAT #: 1 [GYM FAN] Point: 5 went into alarm at 14:39 on 10/08. [OIL BEARINGS] Value: 501 Hours Class: 3

OPERATOR LOG-OFFOperator 33333 logged-off locally at 14:39 on 10/08 [Pswd Level reset to 0]. (Logon time: 0 hours 2 minutes)

OPERATOR LOG-ONOperator JOHN logged-on locally at 14:40 on 10/08 [Pswd Level: 3]

OVERRIDEOverride for W1 entered at 14:40 on 10/08. Start: 14:40 on 10/08 End: 18:40 on 10/08 Override value: OFF

OPERATOR TIME-OUTOperator JOHN timed-out locally at 14:43 on 10/08 [Pswd Level reset to 01]. (Logon time: 0 hours 3 minutes)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Analog Alarm LimitEach analog input can have a low and high limit assigned to it on the Analog Input Screen. If the value of the analog input falls below the low limit or rises above the high limit, the system automatically generates an alarm. For example, assume that the analog input in question is a room temperature sensor located in an offi ce space. If the space temperature falls below 68 °F or rises above 80 °F during the occupied period, we want an alarm to print on the printer. To set up the alarm limits, fi rst sign on by accessing the System Parameter Screen and entering your password. An access level of 1 or greater is required to enter or change alarm limits. After you are signed on, return to the Main Menu and place the cursor over “ANALOG INPUT” and press <RETURN>. An Analog Input Screen similar to what is shown below should come into view:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Satellite #1 ANALOG INPUT #1

Description: RM 101 Type: AnalogPattern for values associated with this input: xxx.xUnits @ 0% scale: 0.0 Deg F Units of Measure Message #: 1@ full scale: 100.0 Deg F Filter Time Constant: 8 seconds

-------------------ALARMS--------------------

Controlled by: W1 Limits Low HighAlarm Type: 1 On 68.0 80.0 Deg FAlarm Message #’s: Low 2 High 1 Off 50.0 90.0 Deg F

Alternate Limits selected by:.... On (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F Off (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F

Limit overlap timeafter control change: 20 Minutes Local set 55.0 90.0 Deg F

--------------------BINARY SETPOINT----------------------- OFF Above 0.0 Deg F On Message #: 0 OFF Below 0.0 Deg F Off Message #: 0

Home for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The alarm limits along with the alarm type and alarm message numbers are assigned on this screen (see the Analog Input Screen section of this guide on page 3-9 for more information). If the space temperature drifts out of the entered alarm limits, the system will automatically generate an alarm. For example, assume that the space temperature rises above the high limit value of 80 °F. Alarm message #1 (High Temperature) along with the time and date of the alarm and the high peak value of the room temperature will appear on Analog Input Summary Screen and the Alarm Summary Screen. Within one minute from the time the alarm appears on the screen, it will automatically be printed on the local printer. (To acknowledge alarms, use the <Control-A> function described in the Help Screen (page 3-1), Analog Input Summary Screen (page 3-7), and Alarm Summary Screen (page 3-36) sections of this guide.)

Run Time AlarmThe ECC/WCC II system also has the capability of alarming if the total ON time of a binary (on/off) value has exceeded the run time alarm limit. To assign a run time alarm limit, fi rst sign on by accessing the System Parameter Screen and entering your password. An access level of 2 or greater is required to enter or change alarm limits. After you are signed on, return to the Main Menu and place the cursor over “TREND LOGS” and press <RETURN>. The Trend Log Summary Screen should come into view. To access a Run Time Trend Logging Screen, use the arrow keys to place the cursor (>) by the desired run time point, and press <RETURN>. The following screen should come into view:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: RUN TIME

Records total ON time Starting at : *:* on */*for K1c Fan # 1 Reset by: L16 being ON

Alarm Type: 6 Alarm Message #: 7

Current run time: 250 Hours Alarm Limit: 500 Hours

Home for Menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

In this example screen, we are recording the total “ON” time of contact Klc (COM to C contact closure) on satellite controller #1. When contact Klc is closed, or “ON”, Fan #1 runs. Run time recorder #1 records total accumulated run time of the fan. Alarm message #7 (Grease Bearings) will automatically appear on the Alarm Summary Screen when the total accumulated run time of the fan exceeds 500 hours. Within one minute after the alarm appears on the screen, it will automatically print out on the local printer. (See the Alarm Summary Screen section, page 3-36, for information about how to acknowledge a run time alarm, and see the Run Time Trend Logging Screen section, page 3-32, of this manual for information about how to reset the accumulated run time to zero.)

Satellite Fail AlarmIf the Central Processing Unit loses communications with a satellite controller, a Satellite Alarm will print on the printer showing which satellite is out of service and the time and date of the alarm.

Operator Sign On/OffThe ECC/WCC II system will automatically print the operator ID, time, and date when an operator signs on or off the system. The message will also indicate the password level of the operator and if he or she signed on/off locally or remotely. When the operator signs off, the total amount of time the operator has been signed on the system will also be printed.

Manual OverridesWhen the operator uses the Override Screen to force a point to another value, a message will be printed indicating what was overridden along with the time and date of the override.

System Re-BootWhen the system is re-booted or restarted by either shutting the computer off and then turning it back on or using <Ctrl> <Alt> and <Del>, a message is shown on the printer showing the time and date of the re-boot.

Hardware RequirementsThe ECC/WCC II print routine is a standard software feature, and the standard CPU has all of the hardware items required to support a local printer. If local print-out is desired, an Okidata 182A, IBM compatible, parallel printer with a standard IBM compatible cable is recommended. We cannot offer trouble-shooting support if other printers are used.

The local printer must be a parallel printer as opposed to a serial printer. The ECC/WCC II CPU has a parallel and a serial port for data output. The difference between a parallel and serial port is the way in which data is transmitted. The only purpose a parallel port serves is to send data to a printer on-site, and therefore the local printer must be a parallel printer.

To utilize the “call-out” on alarm feature, a 1200 baud Hayes compatible modem is required at the on-site ECC/WCC II computer, and a 1200 baud Hayes compatible modem and an IBM graphics compatible printer, custom confi gured with a high speed serial adapter is required at the remote site.

Section 2: Initiating the System



SECTION 2: INITIATING THE SYSTEM__________________________________________

The programs and data which are necessary to cause the personal computer to act as the ECC/WCC II Central Processing Unit are saved on a diskette(s) similar to the way music is stored on a cassette tape.

Note: The personal computer also has special integrated circuit boards, manufactured at WattMaster, which allow it to act as the CPU.

After the satellite controllers have been installed and powered up, the Central Processing Unit (personal computer) set up, and the 2-wire communication line between the satellite controllers and the CPU hooked up (see the Installation and Trouble Shooting Guide for satellite controller start-up and check-out information), the software needs to be loaded into the system. Loading the software is a term which means that data on the diskettes is transferred into the memory of the personal computer and/or into the memory of the satellite controllers.

The personal computer used with the ECC/WCC II system may have either two fl oppy disk drives or one fl oppy disk drive and one hard disk drive. If the front end computer is an IBM system 2, the fl oppy disks are 3.5 inch; otherwise, they are 5.25 inch disks. The 3.5 inch disks are sometimes referred to as micro fl oppy disks or micros. The disk drive on the left hand side of the computer (Drive A) always accepts a fl oppy disk. The right hand disk drive uses either a fl oppy disk or a hard disk. If it is a fl oppy disk, then it is referred to as drive B; if it is a hard disk then it is referred to as drive C. Hard disks hold much more data than a fl oppy. A hard disk is recommended on systems which have over 20 satellite controllers and is required on systems which utilize Enhanced Color Graphics or the Telephone Override Feature.

You can tell if your system has a hard disk by looking at the disk drives on the personal computer. A disk drive that uses a fl oppy disk has a door with a slot which allows you to insert and remove the disk. The hard disk is permanently in the drive, and therefore there is no door on the front of the drive. If your system has two fl oppy disk drives, then it is referred to as a “ Dual Floppy” or a “ Dual Disk Drive” system. If the disk on the right does not have a disk drive door, then the disk in the right hand drive is a hard disk, and the system is referred to as a “Hard Disk” or “Fixed Disk” system.

You should receive the following disks with an ECC/WCC II system:

Dual Floppy Systems

“DOS Disk - Version 3.3”“Drive A Operating Disk”“Drive B Operating Disk”“Drive A Back Up Disk”“Drive B Back Up Disk”

Hard Disk Drive Systems

“DOS Disk - Version 3.3”“Back Up Disk #1”“Back Up Disk #2”

The DOS (Disk Operating System) Manual is shipped in the box with the ECC/WCC II CPU (personal computer). You should fi nd two disks in the back of the DOS manual; you need the disk labeled “DOS”. The ECC/WCC II system will operate with DOS 2.1 or greater.

CAUTION: DOS 2.1 must be used on dual fl oppy systems which have 5.25 inch disk drives. The DOS 3.3 fi le is too large and will not allow enough room for the other ECC/WCC II fi les.

If you have a dual disk system, “Disk A” will stay in Drive A of the ECC/WCC II CPU (personal computer) and “Disk B” will remain in drive B. If you have a “Hard Disk” system, the “Disk A” and “Disk B” will be copies onto the hard disk (Drive C).

It is very important to make back-up copies of the disks after the system has been “programmed” to control your building.

Dual Disk Drive SystemsIf the ECC/WCC II CPU (personal computer) has two “fl oppy” disk drives, then the following procedure should be followed to load the software into the computer. Before you can load the ECC/WCC II software, you need to have the following items:

1) “Drive A Operating Disk”2) “Drive B Operating Disk”

Insert the ECC/WCC II “Drive A Operating Disk” into drive A (left hand drive), the “Drive B Operating Disk” into drive B (right hand drive) and “boot-up” the system.

If your computer is off: Turn the power on. Then close thedisk drive doors.

If your computer is on: Press and hold <Ctrl> and <Alt>. Then press and hold <Del>.

After a few seconds the computer should read the data from the disks, and it will automatically bring up the ECC/WCC II Main Menu.

Note: As you program a system to control a building, information is written on the disks. It is very important to make back-up copies of the “Working” disks after the system has been programmed to control the building.

Hard Disk Drive SystemsIf the ECC/WCC II CPU (personal computer) is a “Hard-Disk” system, the ECC/WCC II program is stored on the hard disk so “booting-up” the system will cause the ECC/WCC II Main Menu to appear on the screen.

If your computer is off: Open the drive A door and then turnthe power on.

If your computer is on: Press and hold <Ctrl> and <Alt>. Then press and hold <Del>.

After a few seconds the computer should read the date from the hard disk (drive C) and the ECC/WCC II Main Menu system should eventually appear on the screen.

The hard disk can hold a vast amount of data which can accidentally be erased or lost due to system malfunction, operator error, etc. Therefore it is extremely important to make a back-up copy of the data on the hard disk. As you program a system to control a building, information is written on the disks. Therefore, back-up copies of the hard disk should be made after the system has been programmed to control the building.

Copying Disks“ Backing-up” a disk means to make a copy of the disk’s data on another disk. Back-up copies of all of the disks should be made in case the primary disk is destroyed, lost or stolen. The information on a hard disk can be transferred to several fl oppy disks, a cassette tape or another hard disk.

To make a back-up copy of a disk, you must have the following items:

1 - The “Source Disk” (the disk you want to back up)

2 - The “Target Disk” (the disk that will receive the data)

3 - DOS (version 2.1 or higher)

Formatting DisksThe fi rst step in copying disks is to format the disk which will serve as the “Target Disk.” After the disk has been formatted, the system can direct the fi les to be stored in certain places.

The following procedure should be followed to format disks:

WARNING: Make sure that the disk that you format does not contain any programs that you want to save. The formatting process will erase everything presently on the disk.

Before you start the disk formatting procedure, the “A>“ should appear on the screen. If you are using the ECC/WCC II system to format the disks, you should “exit” from the ECC/WCC II system.

To exit from the ECC/WCC II program, you must have level 3 access. Access the Utility Screen and then move the cursor down to “WCC/SCC File Management” and then press the right arrow key. The cursor should move to “Exit WCC II System.” Then press <Enter>. The system should exit to DOS and either an A>, B> or C> will appear on the screen. If the B> or C> appears, the A> will appear if you enter the following command:

B>A: <Enter>

Formatting the Target Disk Using a Dual Floppy System

Insert the DOS version 2.1 or higher diskette into the left disk drive (drive A) and close the door.

1.

Insert the “Target Disk” (new, blank disk) into the right disk drive (drive B) and close the door.


If the disk you are formatting is to be a back-up for drive A, at the DOS prompt (A>), type in the following command to format the blank diskette in drive B with the system fi les:

A>FORMAT B:/S <Enter>

If the disk you are formatting is to be a back-up for drive B, at the DOS prompt (A>), type in the following command to format the blank diskette in drive B without the system fi les:

A>FORMAT B: <Enter>

The computer will instruct you to insert the new diskette in drive B and press <Enter> when ready. Since you have already put the blank diskette in drive B, press <Enter>. Messages similar to that shown below will be displayed on the screen:Formatting... Formatting...format complete

System Transferred

362496 bytes total disk space

40960 bytes used by system

321536 bytes available on disk

If the system states that “Bad Sectors” appear (displayed on the screen): 1. Remove the diskette from the drive. 2. Put the diskette back into the drive. 3. Format the diskette again.

If the “Bad Sectors” message reappears, discard the diskette and acquire another diskette for formatting.

If the “Bad Sectors” message does not reappear, format the diskette once again to verify results. (This is a “best-two-out-of-three formats” technique. Oftentimes the diskette is not “seated” properly in the disk drive when fi rst inserted, and as such, the format process may fail.)

2.

3.

4.

The diskette in drive B has now been formatted. Remove this diskette and lay it to one side in its protective envelope. If you need to format another diskette, insert another new, blank diskette into drive B and close the door. The computer will now ask you if you wish to format another diskette. Press <Y> to format the additional diskette.

Format another (Y/N)? Y <Enter>

If you do not wish to format any additional diskettes, simply press <N> in response to this question. You will then return to the DOS operating system.

Format another (Y/N)? <N>

A>

Formatting the Target Disk Using a Hard Disk Drive System

Insert the DOS version 2.1 or higher diskette into the left disk drive (drive A) and close the door.

Type in the following command:

A>FORMAT A: <Enter>

The computer will instruct you to insert the new diskette in drive A and press <Enter> when ready.


Remove the DOS disk from drive A and insert the “Target Disk” (new, blank disk) into drive A, close the disk drive door, and press <Enter>.

Messages similar to those shown below will appear on the screen:Formatting...

Formatting...Format complete

362496 bytes total disk space

362496 bytes available on disk

If the system states that “Bad Sectors” appear (displayed on the screen):

5.

1.

2.

3.

1. Remote the diskette from the drive. 2. Put the diskette back into the drive. 3. Format the diskette again.


If the “Bad Sectors” message does not reappear, format the diskette once again to verify results. (This is a “best-two-out-of-three formats” technique. Oftentimes the diskette is not “seated” properly in the disk drive when fi rst inserted, and as such, the format process may fail.)

The diskette in drive A has now been formatted. Remove this diskette and lay it to one side in its protective envelope. If you need to format another diskette, insert another new, blank diskette into drive B and close the door. The computer will now ask you if you wish to format another diskette. Press <Y> to format the additional diskette.

Format another (Y/N)? Y <Enter>


Format another (Y/N)? <N>

A>

Copying Data - Dual Floppy SystemsThe information from the “Source Disk” is copied onto the “Target Disk” using the following procedure:

1) Insert the “Source Disk” into drive A (left drive) and close the door. Insert a newly formatted diskette into drive B and close the door. With the A> prompt showing on the screen, type the following command:

A>COPY *.* B:/V <Enter>

The screen will now display the copy process:

A>COPY *.* B:<Enter>

COMMAND.COM

4.

1.

AUTOEXEC.BAT

-

-

-

-

n File(s) copied

The diskette in drive B now contains the same data as the disk in drive A. Remove this diskette and label it using a SOFT FELT TIP PEN.

We recommend using the newly made disk in the system and keeping the original in a safe place to be used as back-up in case of an emergency.

Copying Data - Hard Disk Drive SystemsThe data that is stored on the hard disk can be accidentally erased or the hard disk can malfunction resulting in all the data being destroyed. Since a hard disk can hold such a huge amount of data, it is extremely important to have a back-up copy of the information on the hard disk.

There are several ways to obtain a back-up copy of the hard disk, which include:

Floppy Disk Back-UpCassette Tape Back-UpSelected Program Back-Up

The information from the hard disk can be copied onto fl oppy disks using the disk copy procedure outlined in the DOS manual. The problem with this method is that it is very time consuming and it requires many fl oppy disks. Therefore, we recommend using either a cassette tape or a selected program to back up the data on the hard disk. If you need help in selecting a tape or selected program for your system, feel free to contact WattMaster for assistance.

If your system has a 5.25 inch fl oppy drive, it will take several disks to back up the hard disk, and therefore, a back-up program should be used. If your system has a 3.5 inch fl oppy drive, you can generally copy all of the system fi les and help fi les onto one disk, all of the data fi les onto another disk, and the custom screen fi les onto a third disk. If the color graphics option is used, a back-up program is recommended.

Generally, the ECC/WCC II systems with less than 20 satellite controllers which do not use the optional telephone override feature or the color graphics feature require three 3.5 inch fl oppy drives to back up the hard disk.

Floppy Disk #1 System Files Help Files AUTOEXEC.BAT HELP*.* MCOMM33.COM BACK###.EXE GO2.COM WCC2###.EXE

Floppy Disk #2 Data Files

*.DATFloppy Disk #3 Custom Screen Files

*.TXT

Files can be copied from the hard disk to the fl oppy disk without exiting from the ECC/WCC II program by using the WCC/SCC File Management Screen. Complete the following steps to make a back-up copy of the hard disk:

Label three 3.5 inch formatted, blank disks as follows

Disk #1 - ECC/WCC II Back-up Disk #1 - System and Help fi les

Disk #2 - ECC/WCC II Back-up Disk #2 - Data fi les

Disk #3 - ECC/WCC II Back-up Disk #3 - Custom Screen fi les

Access the Utility Screen, then move the cursor down to “WCC/SCC File Management” and press <Enter>.

Insert Disk #1 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy the AUTOEXEC.BAT fi le from drive C to drive A:

---------------------------------------------

File name: AUTOEXEC.BAT New fi lename: A:AUTOEXEC.BAT Direction: WCC Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

Leave Disk #1 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy MCOMM33.COM and GO2.COM from drive C to drive A:

1.

2.

3.

4.

-------------------------------------------- File name: *.COM

New fi lename: A:*.COM

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

Leave Disk #1 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy WCC###.EXE and BACK###.EXE from drive C to drive A:

---------------------------------------------

File name: *.EXE

New fi lename: A:*.EXE

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

Leave Disk #1 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy the help fi les from drive C to drive A:

---------------------------------------------

File name: HELP*.*

New fi lename: A:HELP*.*

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

Insert Disk #2 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy the data fi les from drive C to drive A:

---------------------------------------------

File name: *.DAT

New fi lename: A:*.DAT

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

5.

6.

7.

Assign Operator Access Codes Access codes can be assigned for up to 16 operators with 4 levels of access. The systems are sent from the factory with an operator number of 33333 and an access number of 3333. To assign other codes, follow the steps in this section.

STEP #1: With the Main Menu showing on the screen, place the cursor above “System Parameters” and press <Enter> to access the System Parameter Screen. The System Parameter Screen should come into view with the computer awaiting the operator ID.

STEP #2: Input the factory set identifi cation number of 33333 and press <Enter>. The numbers at the top of the keyboard must be used. The cursor will automatically move to the right and await the code ID.

STEP #3: Input the factory set code number of 3333 and press <Enter>. The message to the right of the cursor should change from “View Screen Only” to “View All Codes.”

STEP #4: Use the right arrow key to move the cursor to the right of the “View All Codes” message.

STEP #5: Press <Enter>, and the screen will appear which will allow codes for 16 operators with 4 levels of access. The descriptions of the access levels are listed at the bottom of this screen.

STEP #6: Access codes can be assigned for the operators who will be using the system. The operator ID is 5 characters using any letters, numbers, or symbols (it is important to input all 5 characters when inputting an operator code; a space may be entered as a character if desired). The code ID is 4 characters using any letters, numbers, or symbols (it is important to enter all 4 characters for the code ID; a space may be used as a character if desired). The system will distinguish between small and capital letters. To assign an operator ID, type the desired characters and press <Enter>. The cursor will automatically move to the right and await the code ID. Type the desired code ID and press <Enter>. The cursor will now automatically move to the right and await the Level access number. Type in this Level number (1 through 3, 1 being the lowest and 3 being the highest) and press <Enter>.

STEP #7: After the codes have been entered, make sure you know what the codes are before leaving this screen. We recommend leaving the 33333, 3333 access code until the other codes are tested. To leave this screen, press <HOME> twice to return to the System Parameter Screen. Press <HOME> once more to return to the Main Menu.

Insert Disk #3 in drive A and fi ll out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as shown below to copy the custom screen fi les from drive C to drive A:

---------------------------------------------

File name: *.TXT

New fi lename: A:*.TXT

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

After the copy process is completed, store the fl oppy disks in a safe place.

Returning to the ECC/WCC II Program

Dual Disk Drive SystemsIf you are using the ECC/WCC II personal computer to copy the disks, the need to replace the ECC/WCC II disks in the proper drives and “re-boot” the system by fi rst pressing <Ctrl> and <Alt>, and then pressing <Del>. After a couple of minutes, the Main Menu should appear on the screen.

Hard Disk Drive SystemsOpen the door on drive A and “re-boot” the system by pressing <Ctrl> and <Alt> and then pressing <Del>. After a couple of minutes, the Main Menu should appear on the screen.

CAUTION: The CPU will not communicate with the satellite controllers while it is going through the “re-boot” process. If the satellite controllers do not communicate with the CPU for approximately two minutes, they will go into local set. The time it takes for the system to “re-boot” will usually cause the satellite controllers to go into local set.

8.

9.

Note: To access the system, the password codes must be entered exactly as they were entered on this screen, including any spaces which were entered using the space bar.

Password EntryTo be able to make any changes to the inputs in the system, you must have a password which has either a level 1, level 2 or level 3 access assigned to it. You enter your password by following the steps in this section.

STEP #1: With the Main Menu showing on the screen, place the cursor above “System Parameters” and press <Enter> to access the System Parameter Screen. The System Parameter Screen should come into view with the computer awaiting the operator ID.

STEP #2: Input your assigned operator code and press <Enter>. The cursor will automatically move to the right and await the code ID.

STEP #3: Input your assigned code ID and press <Enter>. You are now “signed on” and may enter and/or change data as necessary.

Note: You must enter your exact password. The system distinguishes between upper and lower case letters, and it recognizes spaces which are created using the <space bar>.

Section 3: Screen Descriptions



SECTION 3: SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS ____________________________________________________

HELP SCREEN

<Alt> <H>: HELP SCREEN - SPECIAL PURPOSE KEYSThe special purpose keys are a very powerful and necessary part of the ECC/WCC II system, but they can also be very dangerous if you are not sure how to use them. Therefore, most of the special purpose keys require that the operator have the highest level password (3).

The Help Screen, depicted in the three Help menus that follow, can be accessed from nearly any screen within the ECC/WCC II system by fi rst pressing <Alt> and then <H> and then releasing both keys at the same time.

****** Help Menu (I) ******

Group 1: General Ctrl-Function keys

Ctrl A: Acknowledge Alarms Used at Analog Input Summary Screen, Trend Logging Run Time Screen, Alarm Summary Screen and Global Analog/Binary Summary Screens.

Ctrl G: Display Graphs Used at the Analog Trend Screen, Proportional Reset Screen and the

Ctrl K: Clear communication errors Used at Satellite Summary Screen for trouble- shooting

Ctrl R: Manually Reset (Clear) Data Used at Trend Log Screen, Global Analog Integral Mode to Reset accumulated consumption, Energy Consumption screen to reset consumption, or in the “Disabled by” position on the System Parameters Screen to clear alarm call- out for one type

Ctrl S: Hold Screen Used at Analog Input Summary Screen, press any key to start displaying again

Ctrl Home: Clear Input Data from Present Screen Cursor must be in the “HOME” position on the screen

Ctrl PgUp: Return to the SAT # position in the main menu screen

****** Help Menu (II) ******

Group 2: General Alt-Function keys

Alt C: Copy Data to Present Screen

Alt F: Copy Data from Present Screen

Alt A: Clear All Satellite Alarms Used in the Satellite Summary Screen

Group 3: Keys used for Special Keys Program

Alt A: Enter Append mode; used at SAT # in main menu screen

Alt E: Stop Learning or Append Mode

Alt N: Generate a Form Feed in the Replay Mode

Alt L: Enter learning mode; used at “Sat #” in main menu screen

Alt P: Generate a Print Screen in the Replay Mode

Alt Q: Quit replay mode before fi nished

Alt S: Start replay mode; used at “Sat #” in main menu screen

Alt T: Print a screen on the remote printer in the replay mode

Group 4: Keys used for saving and loading data fi les in Analog Trend Screen

F9: Save current analog trend data to disk

F10: Load stored data fi le from disk

ESC: Stop viewing data from disk, and go back to current data

****** Help Menu #3 ******

Group 5: Help Keys

Alt H: General Help Information

Alt J: Help Menu for each different screen

F1: Window Help Screen for each Input

Group 1 Help Keys <Ctrl><A>: Acknowledge Alarms

When an alarm occurs within the system, the alarm condition appears on its respective summary screen as a fl ashing display generally on the right side of the display. Once the alarm has been acknowledged, one of two possible conditions will be displayed.

The fi rst condition is when an alarm is acknowledged, but the alarm remains outside of the alarm limits. When this happens, the alarm information is still displayed on the screen, but it appears solid instead of blinking. The second condition is when an alarm is acknowledged AND the alarm is inside the alarm limits. In this instance, all alarm information for that point is cleared (or removed) from the screen.

To acknowledge new (blinking) alarms, position the cursor (>) at the point for which you wish to acknowledge alarms. Once positioned, press and hold <Ctrl>, then press <A>, and then release both keys at the same time. At this point you should notice that one of the above stated conditions is occurring.

<Ctrl><G>: Display Graphs

The ECC/WCC II system has graphs for the Analog Trend Screen, the Proportional Reset Screen, and the Look-Up Table Screen that can be displayed on the screen and can be printed on the printer using the manual “Print Screen” command.

The graph for the Analog Trend - Trend Logging Screen is accessed while the cursor is at the “Home” position of an Analog Trend Screen. Press and hold <Ctrl>, then press <G>, and then release both keys at the same time. Press any key to return to the Analog Trend Screen.

Note: If the ECC/WCC II system is “re-painting” the screen at the moment you access the graph, the full graph will not be displayed. To make sure you get a full graph, move the cursor to the “HOME” position on the screen, and press <Ctrl><G> while the cursor is blinking at the HOME position.

The Proportional Reset Screen also has a graph associated with it that can be accessed by pressing <Ctrl><G> while the cursor is anywhere on the Proportional Reset Screen.

The graph for the Look-Up Tables (GA 121-128) is accessed in the same way. While the cursor is at any position on a Global Analog Look-Up Table, simultaneously press <Ctrl><G> to cause the Look-Up Table graph to be displayed on the screen.

<Ctrl><K>: Clear Communication Errors

The ECC/WCC II system keeps track of the transmission and receive errors between the Central Processing Unit (personal computer) and the satellite controllers on the Satellite Summary Screen. The <Ctrl><K> feature clears the existing number of errors and is used for trouble-shooting purposes.

<Ctrl><R>: Reset Trend Logs or Global Analog Accumulation Screens

When you are at a Trend Logging Screen and wish to reset (clear) the existing trend log data on the particular screen, simply press <Ctrl> and <R> at the same time. This should automatically reset (clear) the data on the Trend Log Screen. On new systems, the Trend Log Screens should be reset before they have been programmed to clear out any “bad data” that might be in the satellite controller.

The <Ctrl><R> feature is also used to reset the global analogs using the integral mode and the Energy Consumption Screen.

If the system is trying to call-out an alarm and it cannot report its information to the remote printer for some reason, the system will continue to try and call the telephone number(s) forever unless you press <Ctrl> and <R> simultaneously while the cursor is at the “Disabled by” position for that alarm type on the System Parameters Screen.

<Ctrl><S>: Hold Screen

The Analog Input Summary Screen automatically displays alarm messages as the alarm occurs. There are four different messages that show on the screen (i.e. the time, date, user entered alarm message, etc.). After the fi rst message for a given alarm is displayed for several seconds, the next message will appear. The <Ctrl><S> feature will cause the screen to hold the same message to give you time to read it before the next message appears.

To use the <Ctrl><S> feature, place the cursor on the “HOME” position of the Analog Input Summary Screen. Press and hold <Ctrl> and then press <S>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

<Ctrl><Home>: Clear Input Data from Present Screen

You must have a password level of 3 to use the <Ctrl><Home> feature.

Each screen (or point) has data which is saved in the memory of the CPU or the satellite controller. Before any processing of the data entered on a screen is performed, the system checks the point’s “structure valid” indicator to insure that the data it contains is valid and properly formed. If the point is not valid, then that point is skipped and processing continues with the next point. In addition, all summary data is removed from that point’s summary screen.

To clear a screen (invalidate it), the cursor must be in the “Home” position on the individual screen that is to be cleared. Once there, press <Ctrl><Home> at the same time. The data on the screen should be cleared away. Once you have cleared a point, the data for that point is lost and it cannot be recovered. Therefore, make sure you have the right point before using <Ctrl><Home>.

<Ctrl><PgUp>: Return to the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu

You can automatically go to the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu from nearly anywhere in the system by using the <Ctrl><PgUp> command.

Group 2 Help Keys <Alt><C>: Copy Data to Present Screen

If you want to copy the data from one screen to another screen within the ECC/WCC II system, fi rst go to the screen that you want to copy and simultaneously press <Alt> and <F>. Then go to the screen which is to receive the data and simultaneously press <Alt> and <C> and the data will automatically be entered in the screen. See section titled “Copying Information Within the Same Satellite” in this guide for additional information.

<Alt><F>: Copy Data from Present Screen

If you want to copy the data from one screen to another screen within the ECC/WCC II system, go to the screen that you want to copy and simultaneously press <Alt> and <F>. Then go to the screen which is to receive the data and simultaneously press <Alt> and <C> and the data will automatically be entered in the screen. See section titled “Copying Information Within the Same Satellite in this manual for additional information.

<Alt><A>: Clear All Satellite Alarms, Used in Alarm Summary Screen

If you want to clear all of the satellite alarms in the system at one time, access the Alarm Summary Screen. Once there, press <Alt> and <A> simultaneously and all of the non-active alarms will be cleared.

Group 3 Help KeysThe ECC/WCC II Special Keys program allows you to “teach” the system a set of key strokes that can be repeated at set time intervals at a specifi c time each day when a global binary value goes ON or manually. Among other things, this allows you to automatically print screens on the printer at certain times or when certain events occur without operator interface. There are 10 auto-scan/print routines in the ECC/WCC II system. Each of the 10 routines can have up to 100 key strokes.

To “teach” the system a set of key strokes, follow this procedure: i

1) Start the “learning” process at the “Sat #” position on the main menu by pressing <Alt> and then <L>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

While you are in the “learning” mode, the following keys perform special functions (to use these special keys, press <Alt> fi rst and then press the second key, holding both keys down for an instant then releasing both keys):

<Alt><A>: Enter append mode; Used at “Sat #” position on Main Menu Screen

The append mode is used to add key strokes to an existing autoscan/print routine. The <Alt><A> feature works only when the cursor is at the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen.

<Alt><E>: Stop learning or append mode

After you have entered all of the key strokes that you would like to “teach” the system, use <Alt><E> to exit from the learning mode.

<Alt><N>: Generate a form feed in the replay mode

If you are programming the system to automatically print a screen (or screens) on the printer during the replay mode, the <Alt><N> command causes the printer to generate a form feed to cause the outputs to be printed on separate pages.

<Alt><L>: Enter learning mode; Used at “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen

Using the <Alt><L> command while the cursor is in the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen starts the learning mode.

<Alt>: Generate a “ Print-Screen” in the replay mode

Normally, you can print the characters that are currently on the screen by fi rst pressing <Shift> and then <PrtSc>. However, when you are “teaching” the system a set of key strokes to perform automatically, the <Shift><PrtSc> command will not be recognized by the system in the replay mode. As you are entering the key strokes you want the system to automatically replay, use the <Alt> command instead of the <Shift><PrtSc> command when you are at a screen that you want to print on the printer.

<Alt><Q>: Quit replay mode before it is fi nished

If the system has started to replay the key strokes that you taught it, and you want to cause it to stop, use the <Alt><Q> command.

<Alt><S>: Start replay mode; used at “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen

If you want to manually start the replay mode, use the <Alt><S> command while the cursor is at the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen.

<Alt><T>: Print a screen on the remote printer in the replay mode

As you are entering the key strokes you want the system to automatically replay, use the <Alt><T> command when you reach a screen that is to be printed at the remote printer. The fi rst time <Alt><T> is used for each of the 10 special key buffers, a line will appear at the bottom asking for the associated alarm class for remote call-out. The ECC/WCC II system will print the screen on the remote printer using the telephone number associated with this alarm class. There are 10 special key buffers; each special key buffer will be allowed one alarm type from 1 to 5. The screens will only be printed at one remote site, even if the “dial both telephone numbers” feature is enabled. The fi les will be saved on the disk temporarily; they are erased the next time a screen is printed remotely.

Group 4 Help Keys <F9>: Save current analog trend data to disk

You have the option of saving the data on the analog trend screens on a disk fi le by using <F9>. To use this feature you must be at the Analog Trend Screen you would like to save on disk.

<F10>: Load stored data fi le from disk

If you have previously saved an analog trend screen to disk, you may retrieve it by using <F10>. You must be at the Analog Trend Screen to use this function.

<Esc>:

After you have viewed the Analog Trend Screen that has been retrieved from a disk fi le, press <Esc> to return to the current screen.

<Alt><H>: General Help Information <Alt><J>: Help Menu for each different screen

These help menus are not supported at this time.

<F1>: Window Help Screen for each input

Pressing <F1> will bring up a Window Help Screen while the cursor is at most of the data entry locations.

Notes:

The Main Menu Screen allows you to view the available screens within the ECC/WCC II system. To get to a screen listed on the Main Menu, use the arrow keys to position the cursor over the name of the screen you want to access and press <Return>.

The Main Menu is divided into three categories: Sat #, Overview, and Central Unit.

Sat #____

The information associated with the screens within this category is stored in the satellite controllers and IS NOT stored in the CPU (personal computer). It is a very good idea to save this information on a back-up disk by using the Satellite Save/Restore program located in the overview category.

Overview

This section allows the operator to perform operations and view screens which affect all of the satellite controllers on the system. The information associated with the screens located in this category is stored in the CPU (personal computer). When the

screens in this category are programmed for the fi rst time, or when a change is made to these screens, the system automatically stores the information on the data disk.

Central Unit

The screens located in this category are GLOBAL commands. Global commands “travel” along the two-wire communication loop and are used by any or all of the satellite controllers. All of the satellites are constantly monitoring this information but only certain satellites will react to the information depending on how they have been programmed. The information associated with the screens located in this category is stored in the CPU (personal computer). When the screens in this category are programmed for the fi rst time or when a change is made to these screens, the system automatically stores the information on the data disk.

MAIN MENU SCREEN----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WATTMASTER CONTROL CENTER

ECC/WCC II

+-------Sat #____-----+ +------------Overview---------+ +-------Central Unit-------+ Alarm Summary Analog Inputs Satellite Summary Week Schedules Control Outputs Overrides Optimal Starts Analog Outputs Holidays Analog Globals Trend Logs System Parameters Binary Globals Logic Switches On/Off Units Messages Shed/Restore Program Alarm Messages Duty Cycle Programs+----------------------+ Save/Restore to Disk Proportional Reset Satellite Copy Special Keys Secure the System Utility Screen Message! Energy Consumption +--------------------------+ +------------------------------+ Active alarms in classes: Alt H for Help

WCC2 Version X.XXBacktask Version X.XX

* These versions of software require the front end computer to have 448K of RAM memory; later versions require 640K.

** X = 1 to 3 1 = IBM PC or XT 2 = IBM XT 286 3 = 3 satellite system

Alt H for Help

This message is a reminder that the Help Screen can be accessed by simultaneously pressing <Alt> and <H>. The Help Screen can be accessed from nearly any screen within the system.

Disk-write-error

If the ECC/WCC II cannot write a fi le to disk because there is not enough space left on the disk, a “disk-write-error” message will appear on the Main Menu Screen. To clear the message, go to the Utility-System Parameter II Screen and select “Yes” after the “Clear disk_write_error fl ag” statement.

---------------------------------------------

Utility - System Parameter II

Clear disk_write_error fl at: <Yes> No>

---------------------------------------------

Message!

This will automatically appear on the screen when a message has been entered in the Message Screen. To access the Message Screen, place the cursor over the Utility Screen and press <Enter>. After the Utility Screen appears, place the cursor over Message Screen and press <Enter> again. The screen with the message will appear.

Active alarms in classes:

If an alarm is active within the system, the alarm type number will appear at this location. You will need to go to the Alarm Summary Screen to locate the specifi c alarm.

If the alarm is highlighted, it has not been acknowledged. If the number is not highlighted, all of the alarms in that class have been acknowledged.

WCC2 Version _.__BACKTASK Version _.__

The version number of the software presently being used by the ECC/WCC II system will appear at these locations. Backtask is a portion of the ECC/WCC II software. Each version of the WCC2 software operates with a specifi c version of Backtask. This has been added to insure that the right version of Backtask is operating with the WCC2 software.

WCC2 Version Minimum BACKTASK Version 1.47* 1.1B

1.48* 1.1B 1.49* 1.1B1.52 1.221.54 1.241.6A 1.241.6B 1.241.63 1.241.64 X.2B**1.65 X.2BB**1.67 1.2E1.68 1.2E1.69 1.4A1.70 1.4A1.71 1.4B1.72 1.4B1.74 1.4D

An analog input is a signal sent to the satellite controller that can be represented by a number such as temperature, pressure, etc. The Analog Input Screen is used to “tell” the ECC/WCC II system the characteristics of the sensor and to set alarm limits. The “Binary Setpoint” option at the bottom of the Analog Input Screen can be used to convert the analog input to a binary (On/Off) input.

Analog Inputs

Specifi es the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <Anal, Cont, Anal, Trend, Logi, TUC>

You can access one of the screens which appear in this choice fi eld without returning to the Main Menu by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>.

Satellite______

Specifi es the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the analog input summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

To view or edit a specifi c analog input, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Input Screen for the specifi ed point will now appear.

Time Date

The present time and date will automatically appear at these locations.

Description:_______________

The description message which was entered on the Analog Input Screen is displayed here to help you identify the different analog inputs within the system.

ANALOG INPUT SUMMARY SCREEN

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Analog Inputs Satellite 1 Time Date -------------------Analog Inputs----------------------------- 14:17 7/07Description Current Value Alarm Limits Stat Mode Alarm DetailsA1: RM101 74.7 Deg F 65.0 80.0 ONA2: SA TEMP 54.6 Deg F 45.0 65.0 OFFA3: OA TEMP 89.8 Deg F -10.0 100.0 ONA4: DOCK TEMP 85.0 Deg F 45.0 100.0 ONA5:A6:A7:A8:

C1: OFFC2: OFFC3: CHW OFFC4: OFFC5:C6:C7:C8:

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Current Value

The current value of the analog input is automatically displayed here.

Alarm Limits

The alarm limits which were input on the Analog Input Screens will automatically be displayed here.

Stat

The present “ON” or “OFF” status of the binary input which is controlling the schedule for the alarm limits is shown here. For example, if week schedule #1 (W1) has been input to control the schedule of the alarm limits, the message “ON” will appear here when week schedule #1 is “ON” and “OFF” will appear when week schedule #1 is “OFF”. When W1 is “ON” the “On Schedule” alarm limits will be active, and when W1 if “OFF” the Off Schedule” alarm limits will be active.

Mode

The “alt” message will appear here when the alternate alarm limits are active. When the input value which has been entered on the Analog Input Screen to select the alternate alarm limits is “ON,” the ECC/WCC II system will use the “Alternate Alarm Limits” and the “alt” message will be displayed here.

Alarm Details

This location will automatically display the alarm message, the high or low value of the analog input, and the time and date of the occurrence of the peak value.

IBM PC SYSTEMS WITH A MONOCHROME (GREEN) SCREEN

When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink on the screen. To acknowledge an alarm, position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) at the point for which you wish to acknowledge the alarm. Then press <Ctrl><A>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. At this point, one of two things should happen. If the value of the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the message will disappear. If the value of the analog input is not within the alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will quit blinking.

IBM COLOR SCREENS OR PS2 SYSTEMS

When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will show on the screen using the background and foreground colors chosen for alarms in the Set Monitor Color Screen. To acknowledge an alarm, position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) at the point for which you wish to acknowledge the alarm. Then press <Ctrl><A>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. At this point, one of two things should happen. If the value of the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the message will disappear. If the value of the analog input is not within the alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will show on the screen using the background and foreground colors chosen for the cursor display.

Satellite # _______

Specifi es the number of the satellite which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, type in the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Analog Input # ________

This “fi eld” actually contains two separate fi elds. The fi rst fi eld specifi es the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Additionally, this fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Analog Input Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from A1 to A8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, move the cursor to this fi eld by using the arrow keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

Description:

A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary Screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Type:

This fi eld is automatically fi lled in by the system. On screens 2-8, this will always read “ANALOG.” On screen number 1, it will read either “ANALOG” or “PULSE” depending on the position of the pulse switch on the satellite controller.

Satellite # 1 ANALOG INPUT # 1 Description: RM101 Type: AnalogPattern for values associated with this input: xxx.xUnits @ 0% scale: 0.0 Deg F Units of Measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 100.0 Deg F Filter Time Constant: 8 seconds

-------------------ALARMS----------------------Controlled by: W1 Limits Low HighAlarm Type: 1 On 65.0 80.0 Deg FAlarm Message #’s: Low 2 High 1 Off 50.0 100.0 Deg F

Alternate limits selected by: . . . . . . . . . . On (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F Off (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F

Limit overlap timeafter control change: 20 minutes Local set 55.0 90.0 Deg F

-------------------BINARY SETPOINT-------------------- OFF Above 0.0 Deg F On Message #: 0 OFF Below 0.0 Deg F Off Message #: 0

HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ANALOG INPUT SCREEN

Pattern for Values Associated With This Input:

Specifi es where you would like the decimal point to appear in the value displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: < x,xxx , xxx.x , xx.xx , x.xxx >

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired data pattern has been selected and then pressing <Enter>.

Units @ 0% scale: @ Full scale:

If the screen type is “ANALOG,” this specifi es the scaling information used by the system to proportionally scale the input value to the desired range. The raw input value to the satellite controller ranges from zero to one volt. If the scaling information has been set to 0 at 0% scale, and 100 at Full scale, a raw input value of 0.6 volts would produce a scaled value of 60.

_______ Pulses = _______ Hours

If the screen type is “PULSE,” this specifi es the calibration information for the pulse meter connected to channel 1 of the satellite controller. The fi rst input is a “choice” fi eld, and therefore a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

CHOICES: < 100, 1000 >

The second input is used to “scale” or “calibrate” the particular sensor that is being used. For example, consider a pulse meter which measures the kwh of a building. Electrical meters are basically a small motor whose speed is proportional to power being used. Let’s consider a meter where one revolution equals one kwh, and the meter sends 5 pulses to the satellite controller for every 6 revolutions. Therefore, we would enter “100 Pulses = 120 kwh Hours.” (Note: maximum pulse rate allowed = 4 pulses per second.)

5 pulses = 6 revolutions1 revolution = 1 kwh5 pulses = 6 kwh100 pulses = 120 kwh

Units-of Measure Message #: 1

A number is entered here that references a message on the On/Off Units Messages Screen. For example, if units-of-measure message #4 is “° F,” entering “4” will cause “°F” to be displayed as the units-of-measure for the analog input.

Filter Time Constant: ____ Seconds

Specifi es the sampling rate of the analog input. This is used by the satellites to “fi lter” (or smooth) the analog input signal. This can be used on inputs that “jump around” to reduce sporadic load control. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: < 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 >

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired fi lter time constant has been selected and then pressing <Enter>.

------ALARMS------Controlled by:

Specifi es the binary value that selects the ON or OFF alarm limits. When this value is OFF, the OFF alarm limits are selected; when it is ON, the ON alarm limits are selected.

Alarm Type:

Specifi es the priority (or “importance”) level for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (highest priority) to eight (lowest priority). The system prints out and calls out higher priority alarms fi rst. (The fi rst fi ve alarm priorities (1-5) have call-out-on-alarm capabilities.)

Alarm Message # Low: ___ High: ___

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, one for LOW alarms and the second for any HIGH alarms. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message which is entered on the Alarm Message Screen.

Alternate Limits Selected By:

Specifi es the point that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal alarm limits are selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate alarm limits are selected.

Limits Low HighOn _____ _____ °. FOff _____ _____ °. FOn (alt) _____ _____ °. FOff (alt) _____ _____ °. FLocal Set _____ _____ °. F

This group of inputs specifi es the alarm limits for the “Normal,” “Alternate,” and “Local Set” modes. Each mode has a LOW and HIGH limit. When the value of the analog input goes out of these limits, an alarm is generated, and it will automatically print-out and call-out (provided that the print-out has not been disabled on the System Parameters II Screen and the call-out has not been disabled on the System Parameters Screen).

There are two fi elds on this screen that determine which set of limits are active—the status of the “Controlled by” fi eld and the status of the “Alternate Limits selected by” fi eld. When the value that has been input in the “Controlled by” fi eld is ON, either the “On” limits or the “On (Alt)” limits are active depending on the status of the value input in the “Alternate Limits selected by” fi eld. If the value in the “Alternate” fi eld is on, the “On (Alt)” limits are used, and when the “Alternate” value is OFF, the “On” limits are used.

Alternate Limits Active AlarmControlled by: Selected by: Limits: On Off On On On On (Alt) Off Off Off Off On Off (Alt)

The local set alarm limits become active if the front end computer quits communicating with the satellite controller. After communications are re-established, any alarms that occurred while the satellite was in local set will be reported.

------ BINARY SETPOINTS ------____Above:________Below:____

These inputs are used to convert the analog signal to a binary (On/Off) signal. The value that is going ON and OFF is a software point referred to as a comparator. Each analog input has a comparator associated with it named “Cn.” The comparator for analog input #1 is “C1,” analog input number 2 is “C2,” and so on. The status of the comparator can be seen on the Analog Input Summary Screen.

When the User

has selected:

The value of the comparator is:

OFF Above & OFF Below:

OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints.

OFF Above & ON Below:

OFF when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint.

ON Above & OFF Below:

OFF when the Analog Input value is less than or equal to the BELOW setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes greater than the ABOVE setpoint, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than or equal to the ABOVE setpoint or until the Analog Input value becomes less than the BELOW setpoint.

ON Above & ON Below:

OFF when the Analog input value is equal to either one or between the two setpoints, and ON when the Analog Input value is greater than the ABOVE setpoint or less than the BELOW setpoint.

Because this is a “choice” fi eld, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <ON, OFF>

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice is selected and then pressing <Enter>.




On Message #:Off Message #:

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, the fi rst for the ON state and the second for the OFF state of the comparator. These numbers are used by the system to reference a message on the ON/OFF Units Message Screen. For example, the comparator might be set up to come on when the outside air temperature is below 55 °F for economizer operation. Set up the On/Off Message Screen so that message #3 is “ECON” and message #4 is “REFRIG.” The “On Message” number would be “3” (ECON), and the “OFF Message” number would be “4” (REFRIG).

CONTROL OUTPUT SCREENSThe Control Output Screens are used to “tell” the satellite controller when to open or close the binary output contacts. A binary output contact may be “programmed” using one of the following screens:

1) EA Driver 2) Dual Limit 3) Timeclock

EA Driver ScreenThe EA Driver Screen is generally used to control the electric actuators on a Tempmaster variable air volume (VAV) box; however, it can be used for other applications. The Tempmaster “EA Actuators” have two 24 VAC motors—one motor drives the damper closed, and the other motor drives the damper open. The EA Driver Screen uses two binary outputs on the satellite controller—the “COM to H” contact closes on a call for heating, and the “COM to C” contact closes on a call for cooling. The generic term for the method of control provided by the EA Driver Screen is “3 point fl oating control.” When the analog input signal is within the deadband, both contacts open and the actuator does not move. When the analog input signal falls below the setpoint into the pulse band, the “COM to H” output contact pulses at a preset rate to slowly move the actuator toward the required position. If the analog input signal falls below the pulse band, the “COM to H” contact closes and the actuator drives full speed. When the analog input signal rises above the setpoint, the same sequence occurs with the “COM to C” contact.

Dual Limit ScreenThe Dual Limit Screen is used to “program” one binary output on the satellite controller to open and close based on how the value of an analog input compares to the setpoints. It is called dual limit because you have the option of entering two setpoints if required. For example, if you are using the SAT II to control a heat pump compressor, the binary output should close if the space temperature is below 72 °F for heating, close if the space temperature is above 76 °F for cooling, and be open when the space temperature is between 72 °F and 76 °F.

Timeclock ScreenThe Timeclock Screen is used to open and close a binary output based on time only. For example, if you want the SAT II to run a pump from 8:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday, a Timeclock Screen would be used to “program” the binary output for the pump.

Control Out



You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type appears and then pressing <Enter>. If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new screen information.

Satellite ______

Specifi es the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the control output summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

To view or edit a specifi c control output, use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Control Output Screen for the specifi c point will now appear.

Time Date


COMMENTS

The description message which was entered on the control output screen is displayed here to help you identify the different control outputs within the system.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Control Out Satellite 1 Time Date ----------Control Outputs---------- 17:07 7/07

SCHED ANALOG CONTROL LIMIT COMMENTS STATUS STATUS MODE CONTROL INPUT LOW HIGH

Klh: RM101 GHLT Lght On + W1 c: AHU #1 Fan On + GB2 76.2 Deg F 74.0 200.0K2 VAV BOX Idle + GB2 74.7 Deg F set = 74.0

K3h: c:K4h: c:K5h: c:K6h: c:K7h: c:K8h: c:

HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN




STATUS

A message is displayed here to help you monitor the status of the equipment being controlled. For items being controlled by the time clock or dual limit modes, the on/off messages which were input on the respective control output screens will automatically appear here. For the EA driver mode you will see one of the following symbols or messages:

idle: When this message appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is within the setpoint deadband. In the idle mode, both the “h” and “c” contacts are open and the controlled device remains in its present position.

->C When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is above the deadband but within the pulse band. The “c” contact is pulsing at the programmed time intervals.

-->C When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is above the pulse band. The “c” contact is closed, and the controlled device is moving full speed toward the cooling position.

->H When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is below the deadband but within the pulse band. The “h” contact is pulsing at the programmed time intervals.

-->H When this symbol appears, the value of the analog input associated with the control output is below the pulse band. The “h” contact is closed, and the controlled device is moving full speed toward the heating position.

Sched Status

The binary input which is controlling the schedule of the control output is shown here along with a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus and minus signs indicate the present status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the input value which is controlling the schedule. For example, if week schedule W1 has been input to control the schedule on an EA Driver Screen, the message “+ W1” will appear here when week schedule #1 is “ON,” and “- W1” will appear when week schedule #1 is “OFF.”

Mode

One of the following messages may be displayed here:

alt: This message is to inform you that the setpoints for the EA Driver or Dual Limit Screens are in the alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the alternate setpoints is “ON,” the “alt” message will be displayed here.

altl: This message is to inform you that a control output using the time clock mode is in the primary alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the primary alternate mode is “ON,” the “altl” message will be displayed here.

alt2: This message is to inform you that a control output using the time clock mode is in the secondary alternate mode. When the status (“ON” or “OFF” state) of the [binary] input value which has been entered on the Control Output Screen to select the secondary alternate mode is “ON,” the “alt2” message will be displayed here.

loc: This message is to inform you that the control outputs are in the local set mode. This message will appear if the small toggle switch on the front of the satellite controller labeled “local set” is in the on position. This message will also appear when the satellite is going through a power up delay. The power up delay allows the ECC/WCC II system to soft-start the equipment after a power failure. When power is restored to a satellite, the output contacts will remain open for an adjustable amount of time. The delay time is entered for each satellite controller on the satellite summary screen.

CAUTION: Note that the contact outputs in the satellite controller will remain open during the power up delay time. This should be taken into consideration when you are deciding whether an open contact in the satellite should cause the equipment to be ON or OFF.

revr: This message appears when the control output is in the reverse acting mode (EA Driver Screen only.)

ovr: When using the Dual Limit Screen, this message will appear when the output has been overridden from the Override Screen.

Analog Control Input

The value of the analog input associated with the EA Driver and Dual Limit Screens will automatically be displayed here.

CONTROL LIMITLOW HIGH

The setpoints entered on the EA Driver and Dual Limit Screens will automatically be displayed here.

Satellite #:_____

Specifi es the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Control Output _____

This “fi eld” actually contains two separate fi elds. The fi rst fi eld specifi es the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired point type has been selected. If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.

The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

Mode: __________

Specifi es the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <EA Driver, Time Clock, Dual Limit>

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT 2 Mode: EA Driver

Description: VAV BOX COM to H makes on Decreasing Ctrl Sig Analog Control by: A1 COM to C makes on Increasing Ctrl Sig Schedule Control by: W1

--------------Setpoints-------------- On Schedule: 74.0 Deg F Alternate On: 0.0 Deg F Off Schedule: 90.0 Deg F Off: 0.0 Deg F Local Set: 74.0 Deg F Selected by: . . . . Dead Band Width +/-: 1.0 Deg F Reverse Action Selc’d when . . . . is ON Pulse Band Width +/-: 2.0 Deg F “ “ Off Time: 2 Seconds “ “ On Time: 2 Seconds

CONTROL ACTION DIAGRAM

<-----COM to H-----> <------------ALL-----------> <-----COM to C-----> ON PULSED OFF PULSED ON Setpoint +--------Dead Band-------+

+---------------------Pulse Band-------------------------+

HOME for menu

EA DRIVER SCREEN

You make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired point type appears and then pressing <Enter>. If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.

Description: ____________

A short message entered here will appear on summary screens to help you remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Analog Control by:

Specifi es the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output. Analog points within the satellite are named A1-A8. Global analog values are GA1-GA128. (See Table of Point Addresses in the General Instructions section on page 1-7 for more information.)

Schedule Control by: ____________

Specifi es the binary (On/Off) point address used to schedule this control output. When this address is zero (or OFF), the OFF schedule mode is selected; when it is one (or ON), the ON schedule mode is selected.

COM to H makes on Decreasing Control SignalCOM to C makes on Increasing Control Signal

Displayed by the system as a reminder of the function of the output contacts in the EA Driver mode. The EA Driver mode uses two of the SAT II binary output contacts. The COM to H contact closes to complete a 24 VAC signal when the value of the analog input is less than the setpoint. The COM to C contact closes to complete a 24 VAC signal when the value of the analog input is greater than the setpoint.

----------- Setpoints ----------On Schedule: ______ Alternate On: ______Off Schedule: ______ Off: ______Local Set: _______ Selected by: ______

Specifi es a set of analog setpoints (5 total) for the ON and OFF normal mode schedule, ON and OFF alternate mode schedule, and Local Set.

The value of the input in the Schedule Control by fi eld and the Alternate Limits Selected by fi eld determine which setpoint will be used as shown as follows:

Schedule Alternate LimitsControl by: Selected by: Setpoint On Off On Schedule On On Alternate On Off Off Off Schedule Off On Alternate Off

Dead Band Width (+/-): _______Pulse Band Width (+/-): _______

Specifi es the width (plus or minus the setpoint) of the Dead and Pulse bands. When the system is within the Pulse band, the EA driver is pulsed, using the timing given below. When the system is within the Dead band, both contacts open and the controlled device will remain in its present position.

“ “ Off Time: ____ Seconds “ “ On Time: ____Seconds

Specifi es the length of time for the ON and OFF states of the contact in the Pulse mode. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. These inputs also act as a minimum On/Off time for the COM to H and COM to C contacts. That is, if 10 seconds is entered as the Pulse ON and Pulse OFF times, once either contact opens it will remain open for a minimum of 10 seconds, and once a contact closes it will remain closed for a minimum of 10 seconds.

Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: < Seconds, Minutes >

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press <Enter>.

Reverse Action Selection When _______is _______

Specifi es the binary point address along with the value that the point address must have to select reverse action mode. When the reverse action mode is enabled, the opposite contact closes. Normally, the COM to C contact closes when the value of the analog input is above the setpoint, but while the reverse action mode is in effect, the COM to H contact closes and vice versa.


CHOICES: <Off, On>

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired state has been selected, press <Enter>.:

Satellite #: _____

Specifi es the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Control Output _____

This fi eld actually contains two separate fi elds. The fi rst fi eld specifi es the point “type” (i.e., analog input, control output, analog output, etc.) and displays the current type in textual form. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position

the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

Mode: ____________

Specifi es the mode type of the output contact. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected, and then pressing <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.

_______ Contact

Specifi es which of the two available contacts per point (H or C) to confi gure. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <H,C>

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT 1 Mode: Dual Limit

-------------- C Contact --------------

Description: HP COMP Contact Open Message #: 2 Off Analog Control by: A5 Contact Closed Message #: 1 On Schedule Control by: W1 Minimum Off Time: 3 Minutes Alt Mode Selected by: . . . . Minimum On Time: 3 Minutes Override OPEN when . . . . is ON Hysteresis: +/- 5 x 0.1 Deg F

Low Limit Hi Limit Local Set OPEN Between 70.0 & 76.0 Deg F On Schedule OPEN Between 70.0 & 76.0 Deg F Off Schedule OPEN Between 60.0 & 80.0 Deg F On Schedule (alt) OPEN Between 0.0 & 0.0 Deg F Off Schedule (alt) OPEN Between 0.0 & 0.0 Deg F

Data Register is measured from Midpoint and Refl ects Hysteresis HOME for menu----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DUAL LIMIT SCREEN

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected and then pressing <Enter>.

Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that they must be used to control heating or cooling loads respectively.

Description: ______________

A short message is entered here which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to help you to remember points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Analog Control by: _______________

Specifi es the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output.

Schedule Control by: _________________

Specifi es the binary point address used to schedule this control output. When this address is OFF, the OFF schedule setpoints are used; when it is ON, the ON schedule setpoints are used.

Alternate Mode Selected by: _________________

Specifi es the binary point address that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal mode is selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate mode is selected.

Override __________ when _________ is __________

This fi eld is used to override the satellite contact either open or closed based on a binary value going ON or OFF. This has priority over everything except the minimum on and off times.

Override ______


CHOICES: <Closed, Open>

Closed means that the satellite contact will be forced closed when the override statement is true. Open means the satellite contact will be forced open. To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired override state has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

When _____ is _____

The override is enabled when this statement is true. For example, if you enter “Override Open When GB1 is ON,” the satellite contact will be forced open when global binary #1 goes ON.

Contact Open Message #: ____Contact Closed Message #: ____

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, one for the contact open state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example, message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed message etc.

Minimum Off Time: ____ secondsMinimum On Time: ____ seconds

Specifi es the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <Seconds, Minutes>

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press <Enter>.

Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over demand limiting, overrides, etc.

Hysteresis: = _____ x 0.1

Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify how much a measure variable, such as room temperature, has to change before the switch changes state. For example, consider a temperature setpoint of 72 °F with a +/-0.5 °F hysteresis. The switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises to 72.5 °F and will not switch back to its original state until the temperature drops to 71.5 °F.

The multiplier is automatically selected based on the data pattern for the analog input associated with this screen. If the data pattern is xxx.x, then 0.1 will appear as the multiplier. If a +/-0.5 hysteresis is desired, input 5, and the system will multiply 5 by 0.1 to equal 0.5.

Low Limit High LimitLocal Set _______ Between_______ & _______On Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______Off Schedule _______ Between_______ & _______On Schedule (Alt)____ Between_______ & _______Off Schedule (Alt)_____Between_______ & _______

This group of inputs specifi es the setpoints for the “Local Set,” “Normal,” and “Alternate” modes.

The “Local Set” setpoints are selected whenever the front end computer quits communicating with the satellite controller.

The value of the input in the Schedule Control by fi eld and the Alternate Mode Selected by fi eld determine which setpoints will be used as shown below:

Schedule Alternate ModeControl by: Selected by: Setpoint On Off On Schedule On On On Schedule (Alt) Off Off Off Schedule Off On Off Schedule (Alt)

In the fi rst fi eld you specify whether you want the satellite contact to “Open” or “Close” when the value of the analog input is between the limits. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <CLOSED, OPEN>

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired contact state appears and then pressing <Enter>.

If you have an application where you want the low limit to be negative infi nity, input the slash (/) for the low limit value. The system will show a series of minus signs as the (-----) setpoint. In the same manner, if you want the high limit to be positive infi nity, input the slash (/) as the high limit value. The system will show a series of plus signs (+++++) as the input value.

Data register is measured from ______ and ______ Hysteresis.

For the phrase: “Data register is measured from ...”

CHOICES: Midpoint, Nearest Limit>

and for the phrase: “and __________ Hysteresis.”

CHOICES: <Ignores, Refl ects>

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired defi nition appears and then pressing <Enter>.

If “Midpoint” is selected, the value of the data register will be the difference between the actual value of the analog input associated with this screen, such as room temperature, and the midpoint between the two setpoints.

If “Nearest Limit” is selected, the value of the data register will be the difference between the actual value of the analog input associated with this screen, such as room temperature, and the nearest setpoint.

See the Data Register write-up in the General Instructions section of this guide on page 1-8 for more information.

Satellite #: ____

Specifi es the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Control Output ____



You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.) The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Control Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

Mode: ______________

Specifi es the mode type of the currently specifi ed contact. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a mode type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.)

______ Contact

Specifi es which of the two available contacts per point (H or C) to confi gure. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <H,C>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 CONTROL OUTPUT 1 Mode: Time Clock

-------- H Contact --------

Description: RM101 LGHT Contact Open Message #: 8 Lght Off Contact Closed Message #: 7 Lght On Minimum Off Time: 0 Seconds Minimum On Time: 0 Seconds

Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule Selected by: W1 CLOSED in Primary Alternate Mode Selected by: L1 OPEN in Secondary Alternate Mode Selected by: //// HOLD LAST in Local Set

HOME for menu

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TIMECLOCK SCREEN

Note that the H and C contact designations do not mean that the contacts must be used to control heating or cooling loads, respectively.

Description: _____________

A short message is entered here which will be displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Contact Open Message #: ____Contact Closed Message #: ____

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, the fi rst for the contact open state and the second for the contact closed state. These numbers refer to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. For example, message #1 might be “Fan On” and message #2 “Fan Off.” If you want the message on the Control Output Summary Screen to be “Fan On” when the satellite contact is closed, enter “#1” as the contact closed message etc.

Minimum Off Time: _____ secondsMinimum On Time: _____ seconds

Specifi es the minimum ON and OFF times for switching a load to its opposite state (i.e., ON to OFF or OFF to ON). That is, once the satellite contact closes it will remain closed for the minimum ON time, and once it opens it will remain open for the minimum OFF time. The range is 0 to 60 seconds or minutes, depending on the unit of time selected. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <Seconds, Minutes>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice, and when the desired unit of time appears, press the <Enter> key.

Note that the minimum ON and OFF time has precedence over demand limiting, overrides, etc.

Contact is:_________in “On” Schedule Selected by:_________________in Primary Alt Mode Selected by:_________________in Secondary Alt Mode Selected by:________ _________in Local Set Selected by:________

The fi rst fi eld specifi es whether the satellite contact is to Open or Close when the binary value entered in its Selected by fi eld goes On.

The Primary Alt mode has highest priority, followed by Secondary Alternate, and then On Schedule.

Since the fi rst fi eld is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <CLOSED, OPEN, HOLDS LAST>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired contact state has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

Note that the HOLDS LAST is available for Primary Alt, Secondary Alt and Local Set modes only. If HOLDS LAST is selected, the contact will stay closed if it was closed at the time the satellite went into local set or will stay open if it was open when the satellite went into local set.

An analog output is a proportional DC voltage supplied by the SAT II with a maximum range of 0-15 VDC. The analog outputs are proportional only, not proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID).

Analog Out

Specifi ed the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

CHOICES: <Analog In, Control 0, Analog Ou, Trend Lo>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the new information.

Satellite ______

Specifi es the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the analog output summary data for a different satellite, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the desired number, and press <Enter>.

To view or edit a specifi c analog output, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Analog Output Screen for the specifi ed point will appear.

Time and Date

The current time and date will automatically be displayed here.

COMMENTS

The description message which is entered on the individual Analog Output Screens will automatically appear here to help you identify the different analog outputs within the system.

STATUS

The amount of DC voltage supplied by the analog output is shown here to help you monitor the status of the analog output.

MODE

An “alt” message may be displayed in this column to inform you that analog output is in its alternate mode. When the status of the binary input which has been entered on the analog output screen to select the alternate mode is “ON,” the alternate control limits are used, and the “alt” message is shown here.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Analog Out Satellite 1 Time Date 17:17 7/07

--------Analog Outputs--------

COMMENTS STATUS MODE CURRENT INPUT INPUT RANGE OUTPUT RANGE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- P1: CHW VALVE 7.1 V 54.7 Deg F 50.0 - 60.0 0.0 - 15.0 V P2: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P3: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P4: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P5: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P6: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P7: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V P8: 0.0 V 0 - 0 0 - 0 V

HOME for menu--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ANALOG OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREENANALOG OUTPUTS




CURRENT INPUT

The value of the analog input associated with the Analog Output Screen is automatically displayed here. For example, if you are controlling a chilled water valve based on supply air temperature, the supply air temperature will be shown here.

INPUT RANGE OUTPUT RANGE

You specify an output voltage for a given analog input signal on the Analog Output Screen. The values which are input on the analog output screen are shown here. For example, if you input the following ranges on the Analog Output Screen:

Output = 0.0 volts when input is 50.0 °FOutput = 15.0 volts when input is 60.0 °F

The Summary Screen would look like this:

INPUT RANGE OUTPUT RANGE ----- ------ 50.0 - 60.0 0.0 - 15.0 V

Satellite # _____

Specifi es the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, move the cursor to this fi eld using arrow keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Analog Output #_____


CHOICES: <ANALOG IN, CONTROL O, ANALOG OU, TREND>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.

This second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Analog Output Screen, this number can range from one to eight, corresponding from P1 to P8, respectively. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

Description

This is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Filter Time Constant: _____ seconds

Specifi es the reaction rate of the analog output. This is generally used to slow down the rate at which the analog output changes voltage to reduce “hunting.”


CHOICES: <0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64>

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 ANALOG OUTPUT # 1 Description: CHW VALVE Filter time constant: 8 seconds Controlled by input: A6 Output = 0.0 volts when input is 50.0 Deg F Output = 15.0 volts when input is 60.0 Deg F

-----------------Alternate Mode------------------ Selected by: C3 Output = 0.0 volts when input is 0.0 Deg F Output = 0.0 volts when input is 100.0 Deg F HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ANALOG OUTPUT SCREEN

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired fi lter time constant has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

Controlled by input:

Specifi es the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal source for the control range specifi ed. The output voltage is proportional to the value of this input.

Output = ___._ volts when input is _____Output = ___._ volts when input is _____

Specifi es the output voltage range for a given analog input signal. The maximum output range is 0 to 15 volts D.C., and may be specifi ed in such a way as to allow a proportional (direct acting) or an inversely proportional (reverse acting) output voltage. (Alternate and normal modes each have an output voltage range specifi cation.)

For example, if

Output = 0.0 volts when input is 72 °FOutput = 15.0 volts when input is 76 °F

is used, the output will range from 0 to 15 volts when the input signal is from 72 °F to 76 °F. If the input signal is less than 72 °F or greater than 76 °F, the output will be 0 and 15 volts, respectively.

Selected by:

Specifi es the [binary] point address that initiates the Alternate mode. When this address is zero (or OFF), the Normal output range is selected; when it is one (or ON), the Alternate output range is selected.

TREND LOGGING

The ECC/WCC II system has four trend modes described below.

Change of StateA trend logging mode which records any changes of state (i.e. “OFF” going to “ON” or “ON” going to “OFF”) of a binary value along with the time and date of the change.

Run Time TotalA trend logging feature which allows the ECC/WCC II to accumulate the amount of time a binary value has been “ON” or “OFF.”

Analog TrendA trend logging mode which records the value of a measured variable, such as room temperature, at programmed time intervals.

Analog PeakA trend logging mode which records the highest and lowest value of a measured variable along with the time and the date that the peak occurred.

Trend Log



Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate information.)

Satellite ______

Specifi es the number of the satellite which you are currently communicating with. If you would like to view the trend log summary data for a different satellite, simply position the cursor to this fi eld using the arrow keys, enter the desired number, and press <Enter>. To view or edit a specifi c trend log, simply position the cursor (shown as “>“) using the arrow keys to the desired point,

and press <Enter>. The Trend Log Screen for the desired point will appear.

Point

The system automatically displays the “name” of each of the trend log points.

T = Trend Log 1 - 8 = The number of the trend log c = Change of State r = Run Time a = Analog Trend p = Analog Peak

Description

The message which is entered on the specifi c Trend Logging Screen is automatically displayed here to help you identify the different trend logs within the system.

Each of the trend log modes have a heading such a “Last Change,” “Current Value,” etc. The most recent value of the individual trend logs will automatically be displayed here.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Trend Logging Satellite 1 Time Date 9:58 7/07

--------CHANGE OF STATE-------- -----------------RUN TIME TOTAL---------------- Point Description Last Change Point Description Current Val Alm Limit T1c: HP COMP 9:55 7/07 T1r: HP COMP 240 Hours 500 Hours T2c: Non Exist T2r: Non Exist T3c: Non Exist T3r: Non Exist T4c: Non Exist T4r: Non Exist T5c: Non Exist T5r: Non Exist T6c: Non Exist T6r: Non Exist T7c: Non Exist T7r: Non Exist T8c: Non Exist T8r: Non Exist

---------ANALOG TREND---------- ------------------ANALOG PEAK---------------- Point Description Last Sample Point Description Low High Units T1a: RM101 TEMP 73.9 DEG F T1p: OA TEMP 5.4 98.8 DEG F T2a: Non Exist T2p: Non Exist T3a: Non Exist T3p: Non Exist T4a: Non Exist T4p: Non Exist T5a: Non Exist T5p: Non Exist T6a: Non Exist T6p: Non Exist T7a: Non Exist T7p: Non Exist T8a: Non Exist T8p: Non Exist

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TREND LOGGING SUMMARY SCREEN

Satellite #: ____

Specifi es the number of the satellite you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different satellite, position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired satellite number, and press <Enter>.

Trend Log #: ____



Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

of Type:

Specifi es which of the four available trend logging modes (analog peak, analog trend, change-of-state, and run time) you wish to use. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <ANALOG TR, ANALOG PE, CHANGE OF, RUN TI>

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press

<Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Records time and date of high & low peaks for:

Specifi es the analog point address for which the analog peaks (high and low) are to be recorded.

Starting at: 00:00 on 00/00

Specifi es the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the low and high peaks independent of the time and dates, enter “*.* on */*.”

Reset by ______ being ____.

Specifi es the [binary] point address that will be used to reset (or clear) the record trend log data. The fi rst fi eld specifi es the point address, and the second specifi es the state or condition that the point address needs to be in in order to clear the data.

Last Low Peak: 00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00Last High Peak: 00.0 at 00:00 on 00/00

This is the actual trend log data. It is displayed by the system from information received by the satellite. It details the value of the high and low peaks and the time and date of their occurrence.

Press <Ctrl><R> to Reset Data

If you want to reset (clear) the existing trend log data, you may do so by pressing and holding <Ctrl> and then pressing <R>. After several seconds this will automatically reset (clear) the data on the Trend Log Screen (you must leave the screen and come back to it for the screen to clear). On new systems, each Trend Log Screen should be reset after it has been programmed to clear out any “random data” that might be in the satellite controller.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: ANALOG PEAK

Records time and date of high & low Starting at: *:* on */* peaks for: A3 OA TEMP Reset by: L16 being ON Last Low Peak: 5.4 Deg F at 5:34 on 12/22 Last High Peak: 98.8 Deg F at 16:56 on 7/04

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ANALOG PEAK TREND LOG SCREEN

Satellite #: ____


Trend Log #: ____



To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data. The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Trend Log

Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

of Type:



Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: ANALOG TREND

Records value of: A1 RM101 Starting at: *:* on */* once every: 1 Minute Reset by: L16 being ON Roll after 48 readings

16:32 7/07 75.5 16:48 7/07 73.8 17:04 7/07 73.9 16:33 7/07 75.4 16:49 7/07 73.8 17:05 7/07 73.9 16:34 7/07 75.4 16:50 7/07 73.8 17:06 7/07 73.9 16:35 7/07 75.4 16:51 7/07 73.7 17:07 7/07 73.9 16:36 7/07 75.4 16:52 7/07 73.7 17:08 7/07 73.9 16:37 7/07 75.3 16:53 7.07 73.7 17:09 7/07 73.9 16:38 7/07 75.2 16:54 7/07 73.7 17:10 7/07 73.9 16:39 7/07 75.0 16:55 7/07 73.6 17:11 7/07 73.9 16:40 7/07 74.8 16:56 7/07 73.6 17:12 7/07 73.9 16:41 7/07 74.6 16:57 7/07 73.6 17:13 7/07 73.9 16:42 7/07 74.4 16:58 7/07 73.6 17:14 7/07 73.9 16:43 7/07 74.3 16:59 7/07 73.7 17:15 7/07 73.9 16:44 7/07 74.2 17:00 7/07 73.7 17:16 7/07 73.9 16:45 7/07 74.0 17:01 7/07 73.8 17:17 7/07 73.9 16:46 7/07 73.9 17:02 7/07 73.8 17:18 7/07 73.9 16:47 7/07 73.9 17:03 7/07 73.8 17:19 7/07 73.9 HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ANALOG TREND TREND LOG SCREEN

Record value of: ______once every _____ minutes

Specifi es the [analog] point address for which the analog trend is to be recorded. Also specifi es the time interval between samples in either minutes or hours. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <MINUTES, HOURS>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired units of time have been selected.


Specifi es the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the analog trend values independent of the time, enter “*:* on */*.”

Reset by ___________ being _______


_______ after 48 readings

Specifi es whether the data logging process will stop after 48 readings have been taken or will continue (roll over).

Trend Log Graph

The Analog Trend Screen has a graph which can be accessed by pressing <Ctrl> and <G>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time. A graph which shows the value of the analog global versus time should appear on the screen. If the ECC/WCC II system is “re-painting” the screen at the moment you access the graph, the full graph will not be displayed. To make sure that you get a full graph on the screen, move the cursor to the “Home” position on the screen, and press <Ctrl><G> while the cursor is blinking at the HOME position.

After the graph appears on the screen, the upper and lower range values on the scale may be changed. A Graphic Help Menu is available from the screen with the graph by pressing <Alt> and <H>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. The following menu should appear:

--------------Graphic Help Menu-----------Alt B : Assign the bottom number of the display rangeAlt T : Assign the top number of the display range

If you want to change the bottom scale of the screen, press <Alt> and then , holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. The system will prompt you for the number you want to use for the bottom of the scale. Type in the number and then press <Enter>. If you want to change the top scale on the screen, press <Alt> and then <T>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys. The system will then prompt you for the number to be used for the top of the scale. The modifi ed scale values will be erased when you leave the screen by pressing the space bar.

Save/Retrieve Data on Disk

A “snap-shot” of the values on the Analog Trend Screen can be saved on the data disk in the CPU by pressing <F9> while the Trend Log Screen appears on the monitor. The data can be retrieved by pressing <F10>. After you press <F10>, the following message will appear on the bottom of the screen:

Press ‘M’ for manual search, ‘A’ for auto-search

If you press <A>, the system will search for the most recent data fi le. If you press <M>, the following set of prompts will appear one at a time on the bottom of the screen:

Year of Data File to Load {Enter} for current value: [1987]Month of Data File to Load {Enter} for current value: [1-12]Day of Data File to Load {Enter} for current value: [1-31]Hour of Data File to Load {Enter} for current value: [1-23]

When the system fi nds the data fi le, the values that were saved on disk will be displayed on the screen with the following message at the bottom of the screen:

Data from disk, Ctrl-G to Plot, and ‘F’ and ‘B’ to search

If you want to plot the data on a graph, press <Ctrl><G>. If you want to search back in time press , and if you want to search forward in time, press <F>.

The system will search seven days from the date showing on the data screen. If you want to search seven more days, press or <F> again.

You may want to periodically make back-up copies of the analog trend data fi les and then delete the trend log fi les to avoid over-fi lling the data disk. The trend log data fi les are saved using the following format:

001T2708.321

001 -> Satellite number (001-240) T -> Always T, for analog trend log 2 -> Analog Trend Log # (1-8) 7 -> Last digit of the year (i.e. 1987 = 7) 08 -> Hour that the trend log was saved (0-23) 3 -> Month in Hex Code (1-C) 21 -> Day of the Month that the trend log was saved (1-31)

Press <Ctrl> <R> to Reset Data

If you want to reset (clear) the existing trend log data, you may do so by pressing and holding <Ctrl> and then typing <R>. After several seconds this will automatically reset (clear) the data on the Trend Log Screen (you must leave the screen and come back to it for the screen to clear). On new systems, each Trend Log Screen should be reset after it has been programmed to clear out any “random data” that might be in the satellite controller.

Satellite #: _____


Trend Log #: ____



You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data. The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

of Type


CHOICES: ANALOG TR, ANALOG PE, CHANGE OF, RUN TI>

You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected. (When

you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Record time & date of state change on: ________

Specifi es the [binary] point address for which the change-of-states are to be recorded.


Specifi es the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to always log the changes-of-state peaks independent of the time and date, enter “*:* on */*.”

Reset by _________ being _____.


_________ after 48 readings

Specifi es whether the data logging process will stop after 48 readings have been taken or will continue (roll over).



-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: CHANGE OF STATE

Records time & date of Starting at: *:* on */* state changes on: K1c HP COMP Reset by: L2 being on Roll after 48 readingsON --- 0. 5:43 7/07OFF --- 1. 9:55 7/07

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CHANGE OF STATE TREND LOG SCREEN

Satellite #: _____


Trend Log #: ____



You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.

The second fi eld specifi es the point number to edit. For the Trend Log Screen, this number can range from one to eight. If you would like to edit a different point, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired point number, and press <Enter>.

of Type



Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (When you select a trend logging mode that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Records total ____ time for: ______

Specifi es the state (ON or OFF) and the [binary) point address for which the run time is to be recorded. Because the state fi eld is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <OFF, ON>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

Current run time: _____ seconds

This is the current accumulated run time. You may select the units of time by positioning the cursor after the current run time. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <Hours, Seconds, Minutes>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired state has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: RUN TIME

Records total ON time Starting at : *:* on */*for Klc HP COMP Reset by: L16 being ON Alarm Type 6 Alarm Message #: 3Current run time: 261 Hours Alarm Limit: 500 Hours

HOME for menu -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

RUN TIME TREND LOG SCREEN





Specifi es the time and date that the trend log recording should begin. (The time is represented in 24-hour format.) The system considers *’s in these positions to be “wild cards.” Therefore, if you want the system to log the run time independent of the time and date, enter “*:* on */*.”

Reset by _______ being ____.


Alarm Type: _____

Specifi es the priority (or “importance level”) for any alarms generated by this input. Alarm types range from one (high priority) to eight (low priority). The system responds to higher priority alarms fi rst.

Alarm Message #: _____

Specifi es a message number for the run time alarm condition. This number is used by the system to reference a textual message which is displayed on the Trend Log Summary Screen.

Alarm Limit: ____ seconds

Specifi es a time limit at which point an alarm will be activated. That is, when the total run time exceeds this limit, an alarm indication will be sent from the satellite. The units of time will be the same as that selected for the current run time.



Logic Switch

Specifi es the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


You may make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Satellite #: ____


Description

This location displays the descriptive message of the address. The information comes from the description area of the logic switch screen.

On Message

The ON message for the logic switch is displayed here.

Off Message

The OFF message for the logic switch is displayed here.

Current Value

The current value of the logic switch will be displayed in this location. The value will either be ON or OFF.

To input data, or to edit data on this screen, you need to access the Logic Switch Screen by positioning the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys to the desired point, and press <Enter>. The Logic Switch Screen will now appear.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Logic Switch Satellite 1 Time Date 9:59 7/07

Description On Message Off Message Current Value L1: TEN OVR 1 ON 2 OFF OFF L2: OFF L3: OFF L4: OFF L5: OFF L6: OFF L7: OFF L8: OFF L9: OFF L10: OFF L11: OFF L12: OFF L13: OFF L14: OFF L15: OFF L16: OFF

HOME for menu----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LOGIC SWITCH SUMMARY SCREENLOGIC SWITCH

The Logic Switch Screen looks the same as the Logic Switch Summary Screen except for the location of the “LOGIC SWITCH” and “Satellite #” labels at the top of the page. You must access the Logic Switch Screen to input or edit data.

Satellite # _____


Logic Switch

Specifi es the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired point type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a point type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen and data.)

Description

Specifi es a short textual message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to twelve characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

On Message Off Message

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, one for the switch open state and the other for the switch closed state. These numbers are used by the system to reference a textual message which is displayed in association with this switch input.

Current Value

The current value of the logic switch will be displayed in this location. The value will either be ON or OFF.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Satellite # 1 LOGIC SWITCH

Description On Message Off Message Current Value L1: TEN OVR 1 ON 2 OFF OFF L2: OFF L3: OFF L4: OFF L5: OFF L6: OFF L7: OFF L8: OFF L9: OFF L10: OFF L11: OFF L12: OFF L13: OFF L14: OFF L15: OFF L16: OFF

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

LOGIC SWITCH SCREEN

Address:

This location designates the address which is, or has been, in alarm and has not been acknowledged. The listing for the alarm addresses will be in sequential order from the lowest satellite number to the highest satellite number. Twenty alarms can be viewed on one screen. To move from the present twenty alarms to the next set of twenty alarms, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located on the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous twenty alarms, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on the keypad.

Alarm Screen Access

If you would like to view any of these alarms, you may move the cursor (>) to the desired alarm by using the arrow keys located on the keypad and then pressing <Enter>. This will bring you to the summary screen of the point in alarm. At this summary screen you may acknowledge the alarm if desired. (For further information on acknowledging alarms, refer to the Analog Input Summary Screen section on page 3-7.)

<Ctrl A> Acknowledge Individual Alarms

An alarm may be acknowledged at the Alarm Summary Screen by using the arrow keys to move the cursor (>) to the desired alarm and pressing <Ctrl><A>. To perform a <Ctrl><A> function, press <Ctrl> down and then press <A>, holding both keys down at the same time and then releasing both keys. The alarm message will automatically disappear, but the address, class, and description will remain until you have exited the screen. When you return to the Alarm Summary Screen, this information will be gone.

<Alt A> Acknowledge All Alarms

If you would like to acknowledge all of the alarms at once, press <Alt> and <A> simultaneously while the cursor is at the top of this screen.

Class:

This location designates the class level (1-8) which has been assigned to the alarm. 1 is the highest priority, and 8 is the lowest priority.

Pending:

If the system has detected an alarm but has not reported it on the local or remote printer, a message will show up indicating an alarm is pending. PRT will appear when an alarm is waiting to print on the local printer, and CAL will appear when an alarm is waiting to call out. If the local has been disabled using the System Parameter II Screen, the PRT message will not appear.

Description:

This location displays the description message of the address. This information comes from the description area of the screen corresponding to that particular address.

Alarm Message(s):

This location will display the alarm message associated with the particular alarm. If the address was assigned two alarm messages (a low message and a high message), the alarm which is initiated fi rst will appear under the Alarm Message(s) section. If a second alarm exists, it will appear after the fi rst message which is located under the time and date location.

If you have a high and/or low alarm message and wish to see at what time and on what day the alarm occurred, you will need to go to the summary screen for the particular address to view this information.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Alarm Summary Time Date Address Class Pending Description Alarm Message(s) 11:54 7/21

1A1 5 TRAININ RM Temp Too Low 1T3r 2 AHU Motor Chg Filters

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

ALARM SUMMARY SCREEN

Clearing Random Data in SatelliteRun Time Registers

You may see some blank lines between two actual alarms on the Alarm Summary Screen the fi rst time the ECC/WCC II system is brought on line. These blank lines are caused by random data in a satellite run time register the fi rst time a satellite controller is powered up. If these registers are not cleared, the speed at which the ECC/WCC II system can move from screen to screen will be much slower.

To fi nd which satellite run time registers need to be reset, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to one of the blank lines on the Alarm Summary Screen and press <Enter>. The Run Time Screen that needs to be reset will appear on the screen.

Enter data in the Run Time Screen as shown below:

Now press <Home> until the Alarm Summary Screen reappears on the screen. Clear all of the alarms by pressing and holding <Alt> and then typing <A>. Wait for about 30 seconds, and the blank line should disappear from the screen.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 TREND LOGGING # 1 of Type: RUN TIME

Records total ON time Starting at: *:* on */* for 1 logical on Reset by: .... being OFF

Alarm Type 8 Alarm Message #: 60Current run time: -1 Hours Alarm Limit: 9999 Hours

HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sat #:

Twenty satellites will appear on each Satellite Summary Screen. If your system has more than twenty satellites, to view the next twenty satellites, simply press <PgDn> (Page Down) located on the keypad to the right of the keyboard. To view the previous twenty satellites, simply press <PgUp> (Page Up) also located on the keypad.

When fi rst entering this Satellite Summary Screen, you will experience a slight delay in acquiring information on the screen. This is because the system needs to travel the entire communication loop to gather the information needed for this particular segment of the program.

Location:

This location is a user entered message which may pertain to the name of the satellite, the location of the satellite, etc.

If you are adding satellites to an existing system, you will not see the new satellites on this screen until you have rebuilt the data tables for these satellites. With any new hardware additions (adding new satellites, optional boards, etc.), you MUST rebuild the table for the particular satellite controller using the new hardware. Also, whenever you receive and install a new version of ECC/WCC II software, you MUST rebuild the ENTIRE table for the ENTIRE system. For further information on rebuilding the table for the system, consult the Special Purpose Keys section on page 3-1 of this guide.

Power-Up Delay:

This feature allows the ECC/WCC II system to soft-start a building after a main power failure. If power is lost to the building, the satellites cannot control any of the equipment because everything will be off. When power is restored, the binary output contacts on the satellite controller will remain open for the power up delay time, thus holding the equipment off. You may want to bring on a critical satellite fi rst (lighting) and less critical satellites later.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite Summary Time Date Sat # Location Power-Up Alarms 11:54 7/21 Delay by-class LOC TST TYPE VER ERR 1 Satellite #1 10 Seconds 12345678 II 1.06 2 Satellite #2 3 Minutes 12345678 II 1.06 3 SOS 4 Non-Existent 5 Non-Existent 6 Non-Existent 7 Non-Existent 8 Non-Existent 9 Non-Existent 10 Non-Existent 11 Non-Existent 12 Non-Existent 13 Non-Existent 14 Non-Existent 15 Non-Existent 16 Non-Existent 17 Non-Existent 18 Non-Existent 19 Non-Existent 20 Non-Existent HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SATELLITE SUMMARY SCREEN




Caution: Please note that the contacts in the SATELLITE will remain open during the power up delay time. This should be taken into consideration when you are deciding whether an open contact in the satellite should cause the equipment to be ON or OFF.

Specifi c points may be soft-started within the satellite by using the Shed/Restore Programs. (For more information, consult the Shed/Restore Programs section on page 3-89 of this guide.)

An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of the entered time when the satellite is presently in the power up delay mode.

Alarms by class:

This location will display the eight alarm classes associated with each satellite. When there is an alarm type active within the satellite, the alarm type number will be in reverse-video. This will aid you in acknowledging alarm conditions present within the satellite. After viewing the alarm, you should go to the Alarm Summary Screen to locate the alarm specifi cally.

LOC:

The “loc” message will appear if the “local set” switch on the front of the satellite controller is in the ON position, causing the satellite controller to operate in its local set mode.

TST:

This location will designate if you are operating the satellite controller in the test mode. The test mode is active if the test switch on the front of the satellite controller is in the on position. The test mode can be used to check out the operation of the system. For example, if a piece of equipment is controlled using the time clock mode, “TEST” can be input as the binary value which closes the contact to run the piece of equipment in question. To make sure the system works properly, place the test switch in the on position and the contact on the satellite controller should close to run the piece of equipment in question.

TYPE

The satellite type will appear here, either a Sat II, Sat II-A, or Sat II-B.

Time Date

The present time and date will automatically appear in these locations.

VER:

The satellite controllers have their own software. This location will tell you what version of software your satellite controllers have. This is necessary for any updates or changes in software for the satellites in the future.

ERR:

This location is generally used by Temperature Industries for monitoring transmission and receiving errors. We must monitor such information to aid in trouble-shooting various problems associated with the communications of the system.

SOS

If the system determines that a satellite controller has stopped communicating, an SOS (Satellite Out of Service) message will appear on the screen. The system will automatically give this alarm a priority 1, and it will print-out and call-out.

To activate this feature, the satellite tables must be rebuilt (see Utility Screen - Rebuild Satellite Table on page 3-98). Once the system “sees” the satellite controller by rebuilding the table, it will give an SOS alarm if the satellite controller is missing.

This screen allows you to override addresses within the system for programmable time periods. The allowable choices for override type depend on the password level.

With Level 1 Password, choices are <Schd On, Schd Off>With Level 2 Password, choices are <On, Off, SchdON, SchdOffWith Level 3 Password, choices are <ALL>

ADDRESS

This is a user entered fi eld which initiates the Override program of the ECC II/WCC II system. Addresses which may be used on this screen are shown below:

#An - Analog Input#Pn - Analog Output#KnH - Control Output (H Contact)#KnC - Control Output (C contact)Wn - Week ScheduleSn - Optimal StartGBn - Binary GlobalGAn - Analog Global

Type/Value

The Type or Value of the address is entered in this position. A binary type of address will have a type of either being ON or OFF. An analog address will have a numerical value such as °F, PSI, KW, % Sun, etc.

----- Start -----

----- End -----

The Start and End portion of the program is where you enter the Time, Month, and Day for the override to occur. If you enter a start time later than the present time, the override will erase itself from the screen after the override has been completed.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OVERRIDES -----------Start----------- ------------End------------ADDRESS Type/Value TIME MONTH DAY TIME MONTH DAY W12 Off 745 2 15 845 2 15 S5 Off 745 2 15 845 2 15 GB9 On 745 2 15 845 2 15 GA15 72.5 Deg F 950 2 16 1200 2 17 GA10 30.0 Deg F 1130 3 17 2200 3 18 184K2C Schd On 900 4 11 1500 4 14

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

OVERRIDE SCREEN




--------Start-------- ---------End---------

TIME MONTH DAY TIME MONTH DAY

Enter the Start time, month, and day that you wish to begin a holiday. Then enter the End time, month, and day that you wish to end the holiday. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the month).

The Holidays may be entered up to one year in advance and may be entered out of sequence.

Each week schedule has a location at the bottom of the screen named HOL as shown in the next screen. This HOL location becomes active on the dates listed on the Holiday Schedule Screen.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------HOLIDAY SCHEDULE-------------------- ------------Start------------ -------------End------------- TIME MONTH DAY TIME MONTH DAY 0001 7 4 2359 7 4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

HOLIDAY SCHEDULE SCREEN

The week schedule will obey the entries listed on the HOL line when a holiday occurs. In this example, the week schedule will be off on the dates listed as holidays on the Holiday Screen. (When the system sees ---, it will remain in its present state until it sees the next on or off command.)

There must be at least eight hours between the Start time and End time of the Holiday. If a shorter time is needed, you will need to set up the strategies within the Override Screen, described on page 3-40.

The data on this screen DOES NOT erase itself after the holiday has been completed. If you need to erase a particular holiday, simply position the cursor over the value in the month column at the left hand side of the screen of the holiday in question. Press <Ctrl> and then <Home>, holding both keys down at the same time and then releasing them. The <Ctrl><Home> feature will clear out one holiday at a time. To perform the <Ctrl><Home> function, you must have a level 3 access code.

------ WEEK SCHEDULES ------ Description: Week Schedule#1 Current status Week Off OFF WED 1456

On Message #: 1 Week On Password level req’d to alter: 2Off Message #: 2 Week Off

DAY EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT ---------------------------------------MON on 0700 off 1800 --- --- --- --- TUE on 0700 off 1800 --- --- --- --- ---------------------------------------WED on 0700 off 1800 --- --- --- ---THR on 0700 off 1800 --- --- --- --- ---------------------------------------FRI on 0700 off 1800 --- --- --- ---SAT on 0900 off 1500 --- --- --- --- ---------------------------------------SUN on 1200 off 1500 --- --- --- ---HOL off --- --- --- --- --- ---------------------------------------HOME for menu

Present TimeTime Month Day Year

Specifi es the current time and date. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the current month).

Daylight Savings AdjustmentType Time Month Day

Specifi es the type, time, and date of the next Daylight Savings adjustment to be made. The time is in 24-hour format, the month has a range of 1 to 12 (1 for January and 12 for December), and the day can range from 1 to 31 (depending on the current month).

The daylight savings adjustment type is either SPRING (set the clock one hour ahead), FALL (set the clock one hour back), or NONE (does not change the time). Because this is a “choice” fi eld, a list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <SPRING, FALL, NONE>

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until you’ve selected the desired daylight savings type, and then press <Enter>.

You are required to enter these parameters once for every daylight saving adjustment. The actual adjustment, however, occurs automatically.

System ID:

Specifi es a line of text that identifi es your system. This “I.D.” is printed whenever alarm information is reported and on the Main Menu and Energy Consumption Table. You may enter up to 50 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Present Time Daylight Saving AdjustmentTime Month Day Year Type Time Month Day1641 7 7 86 FALL 0200 3 26 SPRING 0000 0 0System ID: ECC/WCC II

Alarm Type Disabled by Calls Phone #’s

5 1st Alt 4 1st Alt 3 1st Alt 2 1st Alt 1 1st 555-5555 Alt 333-3333

Current Operator: 33333 Code: 3333 View All CodesTime out: 30 Minutes Remote printer: 182

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Alarm Type Disabled by Calls Phone #’s

Eight alarm types can be entered on the various screens that have alarm limits. The fi rst fi ve alarm types can be reported to a remote printer over standard telephone lines.

The “Disabled by” column specifi es the [binary] point address that disables the alarm call out feature. When this address is zero (or OFF), the alarm call out feature is active; when it is one (or ON), the alarm call-out feature is disabled. For example, assume you want to call a remote printer at your house if an alarm occurs during non-working hours, but you don’t want the system to call when you are at work. You can create a week schedule, Week Schedule #1 (W1) for example, that is “ON” during your normal working hours. If W1 is entered as the “Disabled by” input, then the system will not call out if an alarm occurs while W1 is “ON.”

The “Calls Phone #’s” column specifi es two telephone numbers that are to be used in the event of an alarm. The system will attempt to use the “1st” phone number. If this number does not answer, the system will then attempt to use the “ALT” phone number, if specifi ed. (The system will alternate between the 1st and ALT phone numbers until one of them answers.) The system must connect with a modem and must “dump” all of its information. If it doesn’t, it will call again. If only one number is supplied (either 1st or ALT), the system will attempt to call out using only that number. You may enter up to 30 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

If you want the system to report the alarm to both telephone numbers, access the Utility Screen from the Main Menu and then access the System Parameters II Screen. You may instruct the system to call “either” or “both” telephone numbers for each alarm type.

Current Operator: Code:

Each operator is assigned a password which consists of a 5 digit operator ID and a 4 digit code. When an operator signs on, he or she must enter their 5 digit Operator ID at the “Current Operator” location and press <Enter>. The cursor will move to the right and await the code. The operator then enters the 4 digit code and presses <Enter> again. The “View Screen Only” message in the lower right hand corner of this screen will change to indicate which level of access the operator has.

View Screen Only

This is the lowest privilege level possible (Level 0) within the system. At this level, the operator can only view the various screens. No editing of data is allowed.

General Edit Allowed

This privilege level (Level 1) allows the operator to view all screens and edit selected portions of each screen. In general, the operator may edit any item for a particular point, but may not change the point’s type (e.g., the operator may not change a point set to the Dual-Limit mode to the EA Driver mode).

Effect Screen Edit

This privilege level (Level 2) allows the operator to view all screens and edit most portions of the program except operator password codes and other “sensitive” information.

View All Codes

This is the highest privilege level possible (Level 3) within the system. At this level, the operator can perform all of the functions allowed by the lower levels as well as gain access to the operator password codes and other “sensitive” information.

Time out:

The time out feature causes the ECC/WCC II system to automatically “sign off” if there has not been any keyboard activity for the input amount of time. The system will reset the access level to zero which will allow the user to view screens only.

Remote Printer:

The ECC/WCC II system has the capability of automatically calling-out over standard telephone lines and printing alarms as they occur on a remote printer. The ECC/WCC II system will support two different printers—an Okidata 82A or Okidata 182. The operator needs to designate which remote printer is used with the system using this input.

Operator

Specifi es the password that identifi es an operator. A character, symbol, number or a space (press <space bar>) should be entered for each of the fi ve spaces (control codes, ALT codes, and double quote characters are not allowed).

Note: The Operator ID must be 5 digits or the ECC/WCC II system will allow the operator access without requiring the 4 digit code.

Code

Specifi es a password code for that operator. This protects the system from unauthorized use. A character, symbol, number, or space (press <space bar>) should be entered for each of the four spaces (control codes, ALT codes, and double quote characters are not allowed).

Level

Specifi es the level of priority that is to be assigned to an operator. This value can range from zero (lowest priority) to 3 (highest priority).

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Operator Codes Operator Code Level 1. 33333 3333 3 2. JohnB 9876 2 3. 0 4. 0 5. 0 6. 0 7. 0 8. 0 9. 0 10. 0 11. 0 12. 0 13. 0 14. 0 15. 0 16. 0 Level 0 = View Only Level 1 = General Entry Allowed Level 2 = Level 1 + modes, globals & energy management options Level 3 = Level 2 + system parameters & operator codes HOME for system parameters-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

OPERATOR CODES SCREEN

The ECC/WCC II system will accept up to 30 On/Off messages which can have up to eight characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).

The ECC/WCC II will accept up to 24 units of measure messages which can have up to 6 characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).

If you are beginning to “program” the ECC/WCC II system for the fi rst time, you may wish to print these screens. To print a screen, fi rst press <Shift> and then press <PrtSc>. The system will then print the screen on the printer.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- On/Off Messages 1. On 11. 21. 2. Off 12. 22. 3. Fan On 13. 23. 4. Fan Off 14. 24. 5. Open 15. 25. 6. Closed 16. 26. 7. Lght On 17. 27. 8. Lght Off 18. 28. 9. CHW 19. 29. 10. Econ 20. 30.

Units-of-Measure Messages 1. Deg F 9. 17. 2. % 10. 18. 3. PSI 11. 19. 4. % Sun 12. 20. 5. IN WG 13. 21. 6. KW 14. 22. 7. 15. 23. 8. 16. 24.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ON/OFF UNITS OF MEASURE MESSAGE SCREEN

The ECC/WCC II system will accept up to 60 alarm messages which can have up to 16 characters each. The number which corresponds to the message is entered on a Data Input Screen. As the number is entered, the system automatically prints the message on the Data Input Screen and the appropriate summary screen(s).

If you are beginning to “program” the ECC/WCC II system for the fi rst time, you may wish to print a copy of this screen. To print this screen, fi rst press <Shift> and then press <PrtSc>. The computer will then print the screen on the printer.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Alarm Messages 1. High Temperature 21. 41. 2. Low Temperature 22. 42. 3. Maint Routine #5 23. 43. 4. OA Temp < -10 F 24. 44. 5. OA Temp > 100 F 25. 45. 6. Peak KW 26. 46. 7. Grease Bearings 27. 47. 8. 28. 48. 9. 29. 49. 10. 30. 50. 11. 31. 51. 12. 32. 52. 13. 33. 53. 14. 34. 54. 15. 35. 55. 16. 36. 56. 17. 37. 57. 18. 38. 58. 19. 39. 59. 20. 40. 60.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ALARM MESSAGE SCREEN

SATELLITE SAVE/RESTOREThe data which is entered on the following ECC/WCC II screens is stored in the memory of the satellite controllers and is not stored in the CPU (personal computer):

1) Analog Inputs 2) Control Outputs 3) Analog Outputs 4) Trend Logs 5) Logic Switches 6) TUC

However, you have the option of saving the information which is in the satellite controllers on a disk in the Central Processing Unit (CPU) to allow you to have a back-up copy of the satellite data. We strongly encourage you to do this to avoid the possibility of having to manually re-enter satellite data.

The satellite data may be saved on a disk which is in the CPU (personal computer) located at the building being controlled, or if you have our remote communications software, you may save this information on a disk in a remote computer which communicates with the CPU over telephone lines.

The information for up to 240 satellite controllers may be saved on a hard disk, or information for up to 10 satellite controllers may be saved on one 5¼” fl oppy disk or 20 satellites on a 3½” disk. Before the system saves the data on the disk, it checks to see if data for the particular satellite already exists on the disk. If it does, the information which is already on the disk is put in a back-up fi le, and the new information is saved in a new data fi le. Therefore, when you are saving the information from the satellites for the fi rst time, it is possible to get the data from 20 satellite controllers on one 5¼” fl oppy disk. However, the next time you try and save the data, you will get a “disk full” message due to the system making the back-up fi les. If your system has more than 10 satellites controllers, and your CPU has dual fl oppy 5¼” disk drives, then we recommend saving satellites 1-10 on one disk, 11-20 on the next disk, etc.

An ECC/WCC II system requires a System Disk, a Data disk, and a Satellite Backup Disk(s). We recommend keeping a backup copy of these disks, especially if you have a CPU with a hard disk drive. See the Section in this manual titled, “Initiating the System” for additional information on making backup disks.

System Disk

The system disk has the computer programs, or “code”, on it which enables the CPU to operate as an energy management and temperature control system. This disk stays in drive A or B (depending on the version of software) on dual disk systems (dual fl oppy disk drives). If your system has a hard disk drive, the information from this disk is loaded onto the hard disk (drive C).

Data Disk

The information which is entered on the screens in the “Overview” and “Central Unit” categories of the Main Menu is automatically saved on the data disk. This disk stays in drive A or B (depending on the version of software) on dual disk systems. If your system has a hard disk drive, the information is automatically saved on the hard disk (drive C).

Satellite Backup Disk(s)

Data from the satellite controllers is copied onto the satellite backup disk. If you have a dual disk drive system, the satellite backup disk(s) is not kept in the CPU, but should be kept in a safe, dry, dirt and dust free location. If your system has a hard disk drive, this information is kept on the hard disk (drive C).

Change Path

The system will automatically save the information from the satellite controllers on the same drive as the Data Disk which is shown on the heading of this screen after “Satellite File Directory.” If you would like to save the data to a different disk drive, follow these instructions:

Access the System Parameters Screen and sign on by entering your password. You must have a level 3 access code to perform this operation.Return to the Main Menu and place the cursor over the words “Save/Restore to Disk” and press <Enter>. The following screen should appear:

---------------------------------------------

--SATELLITE <--> DISK Operations -- Satellite File Directory: a:\

S(save to disk), R(restore from disk), C(change path) or E(exit)?

---------------------------------------------

Since you would like to “change the path” of where the data is to be saved, press <C>.

1.

2.

3.

The following message should appear on the screen:Current directory is a:\ (c: for a hard disk system)Enter desired path:

If you would like to change paths, enter the letter corresponding to the desired default drive, followed by a colon, and press <Enter>. If you decide not to change paths, simply press <Enter>.The system will return you to the Save/Restore Screen. Press <E> to return to the Main Menu.

CAUTION: This path also tells the ECC/WCC II system where the Data Disk is located. If you change the path for the satellite save/restore operation, you must change the path back to what it was when you accessed this screen after your save/restore operations are completed, or the ECC/WCC II system will start saving data on the wrong disk which will eventually cause your system to malfunction.

Save Satellite Data

If you would like to save information from the satellite(s) on a data disk, follow these instructions:


---------------------------------------------



---------------------------------------------

Since you want to save information from the satellite to the disk, press <S>. The following screen should appear:

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

---------------------------------------------


Save SAT #(s):

Separate satellite numbers with commas or spaces.

Place a dash between two satellite numbers to include all satellites between the numbers.

Example:

1 3-8 25, 26

would specify satellites 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 25 and 26

---------------------------------------------

If you have a dual disk drive system, remove the Data Disk. You can determine which disk is the Data Disk by looking at the heading on this screen. The Data Disk is in the drive specifi ed as the Satellite File Directory. In this example, it is the A (left hand) drive.


Replace the Data Disk with a formatted disk which will serve as the Satellite Backup Disk. (See Section 2: Initiating the System–Formatting Disks on page 2-2 for instructions on how to format a disk.) You may save up to 10 satellite controllers on one fl oppy disk.

Enter the numbers of the satellite controllers which are to be “saved to disk” in the format shown on this screen, and press <Enter>.The system will display the points on the screen as the information is being copied from the satellite. After the process is complete, the number of the successfully, as well as unsuccessfully, saved satellite controllers will be displayed on the screen. The following message will be at the bottom of the screen:

Save/Restore complete. Hit any key to continue...

4.

5.

6.

Press the <space bar> and the Save/Restore Screen will appear. Press <E> to return to the Main Menu.If you have a dual disk system, remove the Satellite Backup Disk and insert the “Data Disk.”Store the Satellite Backup Disk in a safe, dry, dirt and dust free location.

Restore Satellite Data

If you would like to restore information from the Satellite Backup Disk to a satellite, follow these instructions:


---------------------------------------------



---------------------------------------------

Since you want to restore information from the Satellite Backup Disk to the satellite, press <R>. The following screen should appear:

---------------------------------------------


Restore SAT #(s):

Separate satellite numbers with commas or spaces.

Place a dash between two satellite numbers to include all satellites between the numbers.

Example:

1 3-8 25, 26

would specify satellites 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 25 and 26

---------------------------------------------

7.

8.

9.

1.

2.

3.

If you have a dual disk drive system, remove the Data Disk. You can determine which disk is the Data Disk by looking at the heading on this screen. The Data Disk is in the drive specifi ed as the Satellite File Directory. In this example it is the A (left hand) drive.-

-SATELLITE <--> DISK Operations -- Satellite File Directory: a:\

Replace the Data Disk with the Satellite Backup Disk.

Enter the numbers of the satellite controllers which are to have information transferred to them from the disk using the format shown on the screen, and press <Enter>.The system will display the points on the screen as the information is being copied to the satellite. After the process is complete, the number of the successfully, as well as unsuccessfully, restored satellite controllers will be displayed on the screen. The following message will be at the bottom of the screen:

Save/Restore complete. Hit any key to continue...

Press the <space bar> and the Save/Restore Screen will appear. Press <E> to return to the Main Menu.If you have a dual disk system, remove the Satellite Backup Disk”and re-insert the Data Disk.Store the Satellite Backup Disk in a safe, dry, dirt and dust free location.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.




If the cursor skips over this position on the Main Menu Screen, you need to check your access level. A password level of 3 is needed to access this screen.

Copy from Satellite #:

Specifi es the number of the satellite which has the information which will be transferred to the other satellites(s).

Copy to Satellite #:

Specifi es the number for the satellite(s) which will receive the information. You may input multiple satellites in this location by using commas between and/or two (2) periods for strings of satellites as in the example below:

Copy from Satellite # : 2Copy to Satellite # : 4, 6, 12, 21..27, 57, 158

In this example, we are copying information from Satellite #2 to Satellites #4, 6, 12, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 57, and 158.

Point Number

The Point Numbers are the top row of numbers which are labeled All and 1-16. This information corresponds to the addresses of the satellites in question.

Point Name

The Point Names are All Analog Inputs through TUC’s located vertically on the left of the screen. These also correspond to the addresses of the satellite controllers in question.

Specifying Points for Copy (*)

An asterisk (*) must be inserted in the location which corresponds with the “Point Name” and the “Point Number” on the screens you are wanting to copy.

SATELLITE COPY SCREEN

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SATELLITE COPY

Copy from Satellite # : _____Copy to Satellite # : _____

Point Number

Point Name All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

All *Analog Inputs :Analog Outputs :Heat Contacts :Cool Contacts :Run Time :Change of State :Analog Peak :Analog Trend :Logic Switches :TUC’s :Velocity Reset :

Allow overwrite of valid structures in destination satellite ? NOInclude non-valid structures from source satellite in copy ? NO Are you ready for the copy to begin? NO

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Allow overwrite of valid structures in destination satellite ? NO

You are given the choice of a YES or a NO answer for this question. When in this area of the screen, you may simply toggle the choices by pressing the <space bar> on the keyboard and then pressing <Enter> to enter the choice. If the satellite which is receiving the information has previously been programmed, but you would like to over-write what is presently in it, enter YES. If you want to save what is already in the satellite which is receiving the information, but want the new information to be copied onto screens that are presently blank, enter NO.

For example, if you are copying from satellite #1 to satellites #2 and #3, but satellite #3 has good information which you would like to keep and #2 does not, then you would choose NO for this choice, so that the valid structures in #3 would not be written over.

Include non-valid structures from source satellite in copy ? NO

You are given the choice of a YES or NO answer for this question. When in this area of the screen, you may simply toggle the choices by pressing the <space bar> on the keyboard and then pressing <Enter> to accept the choice. If you do not want to include non-valid structures (such as blank screens) from the satellite which is sending the information, then a NO answer should be left in this location. If you wish to include any non-valid structures (such as blank screens) from the satellite you are copying from, then a YES answer should be applied to this location.

You will generally leave the “NO” answer in this location. There are not very many times non-valid structures from the source satellite need to be included. This selection is generally used in trouble-shooting to distinguish between a problem with the satellite’s processor and the CPU processor by duplicating the programming in the memory from one satellite controller to another.

Are you ready for the copy to begin ? YES

When you are ready for the copy process to begin, simply change the “NO” to a “YES” by pressing the <space bar> while at this position and pressing <Enter>. The copy process will automatically begin. The points being copied will show on the screen, and when the process has been completed, the system will return you back to the Main Menu.

COPY ONE SCREEN AT A TIMEYou must have a level 3 access code to use this feature. You may copy from one screen to another by using <Alt>, <F>, and <C>. <Alt> is located to the left of the <Space Bar> on the keyboard. <F> and <C> are located on the alpha section of the keyboard.

When at the screen that has the information which is to be transferred to the other screen, the cursor may be at any place on the screen. Press <Alt> and then press <F>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys. The system will automatically beep three times, and the following message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

Point ___ of Satellite ___ was tagged for copy!

For example, if you want to copy from analog input #2 to analog input #7 on satellite #183, the message would read:

Point 2 of Satellite 183 was tagged for copy!

After this portion of the process has been completed, you need to move the cursor to the Home position of the screen which will receive the new information. Once you are at this HOME position, press <Alt> and then press <C>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys. The system will automatically beep three times, and the screen will be fi lled in with the new information. The copying process has been completed.

This copying process must be done for each screen you wish to copy. You cannot tag one point and copy this point to three other points.

If you “Tag” a point to be copied and suddenly change your mind, you can perform one of the following two procedures:

Go HOME to the Main Menu. This will clear out the copying command.You can make changes to the screen and Re-Tag the screen or go to another screen and Tag it. The last screen Tagged will be the screen to be copied from.

SECURE SCREENThis position on the Main Menu Screen is used for signing off after you are fi nished using the system. To sign off, place the cursor over “Secure the System” by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, and press <Enter>. This will cause the access level to return to zero which allows the operator to “View Screens Only.”

The ECC/WCC II system has an automatic lock-out feature which automatically monitors keyboard activity. If there has not been any keyboard activity for a set period of time, the system will automatically sign off and secure the system to a level zero access. The amount of time which will cause the system to automatically sign off is entered on the System Parameters Screen.

1.

2.

The ECC/WCC II system has ten Energy Consumption Screens. The number directly under the ENERGY CONSUMPTION SUMMARY title is the number of the screen. To change the number, move the cursor to this fi eld, enter the number you would like, and then press <Enter>.

Building A

The same message that is entered on the System Parameter Screen to identify the system is automatically printed on the Energy Consumption Screen.

Satellite #: 1

Enter the number of the satellite controller which has the pulse type kw meter connected to it. (Note: The pulse meter must be connected to the analog input #1 on the satellite controller, and the pulse switch on the front of the satellite controller must be in the “On” position.)

Current Demand:Consumption Since Last Reset:

The current demand and the current consumption since last reset are automatically displayed here. To reset the consumption, with the cursor in the home position on the screen, press <Ctrl> and then <R>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

The following units may be selected for consumption by placing the cursor over the units for the “Consumption since last reset,” pressing the <space bar> until the desired units appear, and then pressing <Enter>.

KWH = 1 KWHDKH = 10 KWHHKH = 100 KWHMWH = 1,000 KWHDMH = 10,000 KWHHMH = 100,000 KWHGWH = 1,000,000 KWHDGW = 10,000,000 KWH

5428 KWH will appear as 543 DKH5428 KWH will appear as 54 HKH etc.

The units selected will appear for the consumption since last reset and also for the monthly consumption. The maximum value of 9999 for monthly consumption should be taken into consideration when selecting units. The signifi cant fi gures will be adjusted as different choices are selected. For example, if you have a present value of 5428 KWH,and you change the units from KWH to HKH, 54 HKH will appear on the screen. If you then change back to KWH, 5400 KWH will appear.

ENERGY CONSUMPTION SCREEN

----------------ENERGY CONSUMPTION SUMMARY----------------

1 11:29 2/23

Building A----------Current Consumption Statistics----------

Satellite #: 1 Current Demand: 50 KW Consumption Since Last Reset: 3500 DKH Demand From: GAO

-----------Energy Consumption History---------- Today Yesterday This Month Last MonthConsumption: 1000 KWH 1200 KWH 1200 DKH 4200 DKHPeak Demand: 62 KW 65 KW 65 KW 72 KWTime of Peak: 10:20 16:05 14:30 2/10 16:50 1/25

Consumption Past 12 Months in DKH Average over 12 Months 6200 DHK

JAN 5600 NOV 6600 SEP 3450 JUL 6780 MAY 5700 MAR 5600DEC 4600 OCT 6000 AUG 8900 JUN 7700 APR 4600 FEB 5000

Demand From: GA0

If you would like to average the kwh of the building using the sliding window feature of the analog globals, enter the number of the analog global which has the building kwh. If you want to read the kwh from the satellite controller directly, enter GA0.

Energy Consumption History

The system will automatically show what the consumption (kwh) and demand (kwh) is for today, yesterday, this month, and last month. The system will also show the time and date when the peak occurred.

<Consumption> <Demand>

You may select either Consumption or Demand by placing the cursor in this fi eld, pressing the <space bar> until the desired word appears and then pressing <Enter>.

<Past 60 Days> <Past 12 Months>

You may also choose to display the past 60 days of data or the past 12 months by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>.

You may move the cursor down into the consumption or demand table and manually enter kwh or kwh demand for certain days or months.

Energy Consumption Printout

The energy consumption data for each screen will automatically be printed once an hour if a printer is connected to the ECC/WCC II. If you do not want this print-out, go to the Utility-System Parameter II Screen to deactivate the print-out feature.

---------------------------------------------

Utility - System Parameter II Screen

Disable Energy Consumption print-out: <Yes> <No>

---------------------------------------------

Week Schedule Summary W_____

Specifi es the number of the fi rst week schedule to be displayed on the Summary Screen. The system can display summary information for 20 schedules at one time.

To view or edit a specifi c week schedule, simply use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The week schedule for the specifi ed point will now appear.

Time Date


Description: ____________

The description message which was entered on the Week Schedule Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the individual week schedules within the system.

State

There are two messages which appear under this heading. The fi rst one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Week Schedule Screen. The second message is the current status of the week schedule.

Used by Optimals

The optimal start programs within this system are based on week schedules. That is to say, the optimal start programs will automatically start the heating and air conditioning equipment at the latest possible moment each morning and yet have the space at the desired temperature level when a week schedule goes “ON.” The optimal start programs within the system that are based on the particular week schedule will be shown next to that week schedule.

WEEK SCHEDULE SUMMARY SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Week Schedule Summary W 1 Time Date 14:17 7/07 Description State Used by Optimals

W1 : STANDARD SCHEDULE On ON S1 W2 : W3 : W4 : W5 : W6 : W7 : W8 : W9 : W10: W11: W12: W13: W14: W15: W16: W17: W18: W19: W20: HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK SCHEDULES

WEEK SCHEDULE _____

Specifi es the number of the week schedule which you are currently editing. If you would like to edit a different week schedule, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired week schedule number, and press <Enter>. There are 32 week schedules within the ECC/WCC II system to choose from.


Specifi es a short textual message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to ten characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allows).

Current status ______

Displays the current status (ON or OFF) of this week schedule.

On Message #:___ Off Message #: ___

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, the fi rst for the ON schedule and the second for the OFF schedule state. These numbers correspond

to a message on the On/Off Message Screen. The message is then displayed in association with this week schedule.

Password level req’d. to alter: ____

Specifi es the minimum priority level required by the system to either allow you to make changes to the existing week schedule or enter a new one. This priority level corresponds directly to the priority level assigned each operator.

Event Entry

You may specify up to six events per day. Each event requires an event type and time. The event time is in a 24-hour format, and the event type is a choice list. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <OFF, ON, -- >

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired event type has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

WEEK SCHEDULE SCREEN

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Week Schedule 1-------------

Description: STANDARD SCHEDULE Current Status On ON MON 14:17

On Message #: 1 On Password Level req’d to alter: 2Off Message #: 2 Off

DAY EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT EVENT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------MON on 0700 off 1700 on 2050 off 2300 --- ---TUE on 0700 off 1700 --- --- --- --- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------WED on 0700 off 1700 --- --- --- --- THUR on 0700 off 1700 --- --- --- --- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------FRI on 0700 off 1700 --- --- --- --- SAT on 1000 off 1500 --- --- --- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SUN --- --- --- --- --- ---HOL on 1000 off 1500 --- --- --- --- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------HOME for menu

OPTIMAL START #_____

Specifi es the number of the optimal start program you are currently editing. The ECC/WCC II will accept up to 64 optimal start programs.

The optimal start programs are referred to as S1 to S64. If a piece of equipment is to be optimally started, then Sn (n being a number from 1 to 64) is used for the schedule on the Control Output Screen for that piece of equipment. If the week schedule that the optimal start program is based on is input as the schedule for the control output, the control output will not operate based on the optimal start schedule. The Sn designation must be used to utilize the optimal start program. The Sn designation may be input directly in the Control Output Screen or used in a binary global.

BASED ON SCHEDULE:

Specifi es the time period for which the building is to be at the “ON” schedule temperature. For example, if the user enters W1 (week schedule #1), and W1 is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, then the

ECC/WCC II system will start the equipment early enough in the morning to have the space temperature at the target temperature when the occupants arrive at 8:00 am.

OUTDOOR SENSOR: INDOOR SENSOR:

Specifi es the location of the indoor and outdoor temperature sensors to be used with this optimal start program. For example, if the outdoor air temperature sensor is wired to analog input A3 on satellite number 1, 1A3 may be input for the outdoor air sensor. Or, you may want to use a global analog which would allow you to average or sort the temperature of several zones.

MODE:

Specifi es the mode to be used. Because this is a choice fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the page.

<LOCKED, ADAPTIVE, DISABLED>

OPTIMAL START SCREEN----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Optimal Start # 7 Time Date 10:14 7/07

Based on Schedule: W1 Outdoor Sensor: 1A3Description: 1st Floor - EastMode: adaptive Indoor Sensor: GA2Status: ON SCHEDULE Cooling Target: 76.0 Deg FReason: Done Late Heating Target: 70.0 Deg FLast start occurred at 6:10 on 7/06 with Outdoor = 85.0 Deg F with Indoor = 81.0 Deg FLast start completed within normal tolerance

Outdoor reading Advance Time ------------------- ----------------- 105.0 Deg F 11:00 Advance time is measured in 85.0 Deg F 10:00 minutes/1.0 Deg F difference 65.0 Deg F 8.07 between indoor and target 45.0 Deg F 12:11 temperatures 25.0 Deg F 13.00 5.0 Deg F 13.20 -15.0 Deg F 14.30 - 35.0 Deg F 15.00

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Locked:

The system will use the advanced time variable specifi ed by the user and will not adjust these values.

Adaptive:

The system will automatically adjust the advance start time based on previous system performance. This allows the ECC/WCC II system to “fi ne tune” the morning start time so your building is at the target temperature when the schedule it has been assigned to goes ON.

Disabled:

The optimal start will be disabled when this choice has been selected. The optimal start will have no effect and the value input for the “based on schedule” category of this optimal start will provide the on/off schedule for the equipment.

STATUS

The Optimal Start Screen will automatically display one of the four messages below:

Status: <OFF, ON SCHEDULE, COOL START, HEAT START>

The messages correspond with the following descriptions below:

OFF: The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the moment.

ON SCHEDULE: The Optimal Start program is not in effect at the moment, but the schedule which is assigned to the Optimal Start is in the “ON” mode.

COOL START: HEAT START: The Optimal Start program is in effect at the moment and is either initiating a COOL START or a HEAT START.

REASON:

Done On Time: The space temperature was at target temperature within 5 minutes of when the week schedule went on.”

Done Early: The space temperature was at target temperature more than 5 minutes before the week schedule went on.

Done Late: The space temperature was at target temperature more than 5 minutes after the week schedule went on.

COOLING TARGET: _____ °FHEATING TARGET: _____ °F

Specifi es the desired temperature to be maintained in the space by the time the schedule associated with the optimal start goes on.

The cooling target temperature MUST be greater than the heating target temperature. Also, the cooling target temperature must be greater than or equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in question, and the heating target temperature must be less than or equal to the ON schedule setpoint of the zone in question.

LAST START OCCURRED AT _____ ON _____

The system will automatically fi ll in the time and date of last start. This permits the user to check the system during the day to observe when the Optimal Start Program began.

A Change-Of-State Trend Log may also be used to log the start and stop time of the Optimal Start. To use the Change-Of-State Trend Log, record the change of state for Sn (n being a number from 1 to 64 which corresponds to the optimal start in question).

with Indoor = with Outdoor =

When the last start occurred, the Outdoor and Indoor temperatures at the time of the start will automatically be recorded and displayed. This will aid you in monitoring the Optimal Start Programs for your system.

Last start completed <required major adjustment><within normal tolerance> required major adjustment -

Locked Mode

The “required major adjustment” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “locked mode” if the space temperature did not reach target temperature within 2 minutes of when the week schedule for this screen went ON.

Adaptive Mode

The “required major adjustment” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the target temperature was not reached within the number of minutes equal to the difference between the actual temperature and target temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there was a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the target temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then the “required major adjustment” message will appear if the space temperature did not reach target temperature within 10 minutes of when the week schedule went ON.




within normal tolerance -

Locked Mode

The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the locked mode when the space temperature reaches the target temperature within 2 minutes of when the week schedule for this screen goes ON.

Adaptive Mode

The “within normal tolerance” message will appear when the Optimal Start Screen is in the “adaptive mode” if the space temperature reaches the target temperature within the number of minutes equal to the difference between the actual temperature and target temperature when the optimal start began. That is, if there was a 10 °F difference between the actual temperature and the target temperature when the Optimal Start Program began, then the “within normal tolerance” message will appear if the space temperature was at the target temperature within 10 minutes of when the week schedule went ON.

OUTDOOR READING

Enter two values under the outdoor reading heading—the top value and the bottom value. The computer automatically fi lls in the values between these two numbers at even increments. Usually, the highest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the top, and the lowest outdoor air temperature expected is input at the bottom.

ADVANCE TIME

This is a user-entered fi eld which corresponds with the Outdoor reading. These values also correspond with the message to its right which states:

Advance time is measured in minutes/1.0 Deg F difference between indoor and target temperatures.

In the LOCKED mode, the system will always use these advance start times. In the ADAPTIVE mode, the system will automatically adjust these values based on previous system performance.

The Optimal Start Program reads the indoor temperature and calculates how far it is away from the target temperature. It also reads the outdoor temperature and then determines the start time needed to bring the building to the target temperature. The largest number which may be entered in this position is 99.99.

For example, assume the outdoor temperature is 45 ºF, the indoor temperature is 65 ºF, and the indoor target temperature is 70 ºF.

Outdoor Temperature: 45 ºF Indoor Temperature : 65 ºF Target Temperature : 70 ºF

From the Advance Start Table, the advance start time is 12.11 minutes per ºF.

The difference between the indoor and target temperatures is5 ºF.

Target Temperature: 70 ºF Indoor Temperature: 65 ºF ----------- Difference: 5 ºF

Therefore, the advance start time is 60.55 minutes.

12.11 x 5 = 60.55 MINUTES EARLY START

If you have selected the “adaptive” mode, and the space temperature does not reach the target temperature when the schedule associated with this optimal start program goes ON, the system will automatically increase the advance start time. If the space reaches the indoor target temperature before the schedule goes ON, then the system will automatically reduce the advance start time.




ANALOG GLOBALS

The ECC/WCC II system has 128 analog globals. The term “ analog” means a numerical value represented by a directly measurable quantity such as temperature, pressure, etc. The term “ global” means information which is shared by all of the satellite controllers in the system. Therefore, an “analog global” is a numerical value which can be used by any satellite controller within the ECC/WCC II system.

An ECC/WCC II system has the capability of generating the value of the analog globals by the following methods:

Averaging several numerical valuesSorting several numerical values to fi nd the highest number, lowest number, or any number in betweenCalculating a “sliding window” averageAveraging one value over a period of timeAdd data readings together to obtain an accumulated totalMath functionsLook up tables

••

•••

••

ANALOG


CHOICES: <ANALOG, BINARY>

To make your selection, press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.)

To view or edit a specifi c analog global, use the arrow keys to position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left-hand side of the screen) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Analog Global Screen for the specifi ed point will now appear.

Description

The description message which was entered on the Analog Global Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different analog globals within the screen.

Value

The present value of the global analog is displayed on the screen at this location.

Alarm Limits Alarm Time

The alarm limits for the global analog are shown here along with the time that the alarm occurred.

The alarms for global analogs do not appear on the Alarm Summary Screen. However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement.

Acknowledge Alarms

The global analog alarms are acknowledged from the Global Analog Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm and pressing <Ctrl><A>. If the global analog value is within the alarm limits, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen. It can take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the screen.

ANALOG GLOBAL SUMMARY SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ANALOG Global Summary GA 1 Time Date 10:02 7/07 Description Value Alarm Limits Alarm TimeGA1: GLOBAL ANALOG #1 74GA2:GA3:GA4:GA5:GA6:GA7:GA8:GA9:GA10:GA11:GA12:GA13:GA14:GA15:GA16:GA17:GA18:GA19:GA20:

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Global #:____

Specifi es the global number and its type. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.)

If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, entering the desired global number, and pressing <Enter>.

name is ______

Specifi es the name (point address) of this analog global. Any changes to the global number will be refl ected in this point address (e.g., ANALOG GLOBAL #: 28 would show GA 28 as the name).

Description: ________________

Specifi es a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Data Pattern: _____

Specifi es the number of signifi cant digits for analog global values displayed by the system. Because this is a “choice” fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <x,xxx, xxx.x, xx.xx, x.xxx>

Units of Measure:

Specifi es a message number to be used throughout the system to reference a textual message which is displayed with the values associated with this global. For example, if units of measure message #4 is Deg F, and the units of measure message for the specifi c analog global is degrees Fahrenheit, then the units of measure would be 4.

In Local Set this global defaults to


CHOICES: <FIXED, LAST>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired default choice has been selected, and then press <Enter>.

ANALOG GLOBAL SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Description: GLOBAL ANALOG # 1 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1

In Local Set this global defaults to FIXED value of: 74

Mode 1: Averaged List Values to be averaged 5A4 7A6 22A1 13A3 ____ ____ ____ ____

Substitute 72 for each unavailable value until more than 3 values are unavailable, then use 70 as the value for this global.

Range Low Limit High Limit Type Message # MessageInside 0.0 0.0 0 0-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The term local set means that communication is lost between the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the satellite controllers. If the CPU stops communicating, the global analog values will be gone. This input allows you to specify a default value for the global analog if the CPU quits communicating. You may input a fi xed number, or you may choose to select LAST VALUE. If LAST VALUE is chosen, the global analog will default to the value it had when communications with the CPU were lost.

Mode


CHOICES: <AVERAGED, SORTED, INTEGRAL, MATH, LOOK UP>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. One of the following screens will appear, depending on which choice you select:

Averaged List Math Function Sorted List Look-Up Table Integral External Sliding Window Average Accumulation

CAUTION Select the mode before entering any other data on an Analog Global Screen. If other information is entered before the mode is selected, there is a chance that the global analog will not perform properly. If data has already been entered and you want to change the mode, you must fi rst clear the screen by using the <Ctrl><Home> feature, and then exit to the Global Analog Summary Screen before re-entering data.

Value to be averaged

You may input up to 8 analog values to be averaged. The values may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20).

If a satellite controller that has an analog input used on this screen stops communicating, then a value will be missing from the list. The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify a default value for the missing values. However, if several inputs are missing, you may default to a fi xed value. Consider the following example:

Substitute 72 for each unavailable value until more than 3 values are unavailable, and then use 70 as the value for this global.

If one analog input on this screen is lost, then 72 will be substituted for the lost value. If more than 3 analog input values are missing from this screen, the value of the global will default to 70.

Range

The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this global analog is either inside or outside of the desired range. If inside is selected, an alarm will be generated when the value of the global analog is within the two limits specifi ed. If outside is selected, an alarm will be generated if the value of the global is outside the limits specifi ed.

Low Limit High limit

The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this fi eld, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice fi eld, press the <Space Bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.

If you select “Value” as the choice for this fi eld, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit.

If you select “Address,” you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.

ANALOG GLOBAL - AVERAGED LIST-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Description: GLOBAL ANALOG # 1 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1

In Local Set this global defaults to FIXED value of: 74 Mode 1: Averaged List Values to be averaged 5A4 7A6 22A1 13A3 ____ ____ ____ ____

Substitute 72 for each unavailable value until more than 3 values are unavailable, then use 70 as the value for this global.

Values to be sorted

You may input up to 8 analog values to be sorted. The values may be input in the form of 12A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #12) or GA20 (global analog #20). The values of the analog inputs on this screen will be sorted from the lowest to the highest. For example, assume that the following analog inputs have been entered on this screen as values to be sorted:

5A4 7A6 22A1 13A3 _____ _____ _____ ___

Assume:

The value of analog input #4 on satellite #5 (5A4) = 76 º FThe value of analog input #6 on satellite #7 (7A6) = 72 º FThe value of analog input #1 on satellite #22 (22A1) = 70 º FThe value of analog input #3 on satellite #13 (13A3) = 74 º F

The system will order the values from the lowest to the highest as shown below:

1 2 3 4 ---- ---- ---- ---- 70 72 74 76

You may designate the value of this global to be any of these four values. Let’s assume that we want the value of this global to be the next highest of the sorted values. Therefore we would input a 3 for the sorted list element #.

Global value = sorted list element #: 3

The value of the global analog would be 74 in this example since 74 is number 3 in the ordered list.

If a satellite controller which has an analog input used on this screen stops communicating, a value will be missing from the

list. The statement at the bottom of the screen allows you to specify a default value. If several inputs are missing, you may default to a fi xed value. Consider the following example:

If more than 3 values are unavailable, then use 74 as the value for this global.

If more than 3 inputs are lost, the global will no longer sort the list, but default to 74.

Range



The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this fi eld, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice fi eld, press the <space bar> until the desired choice appears, and then press <Enter>.

If you select Value as the choice for this fi eld, you can enter a number which will serve as the alarm limit.

If you select Address, you can specify an address such as an analog input or global analog to be used as the alarm limit.

ANALOG GLOBAL - SORTED LIST-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Description: GLOBAL ANALOG # 1 Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1In Local Set this global defaults to FIXED value of: 74 Value to be sorted ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

List will be ordered from lowest of above values to highest. Lowest element will be number 1. Highest will be number n.Global value = sorted list element #:____.

If more than ____ values are unavailable, then use ____ as the value for this global.




ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODE

The integral mode can be used to either determine the average value of a measured variable using a “sliding window” effect or the straight average for a given time period. The integral may also be used to add data readings together to obtain an accumulated total.

SLIDING WINDOWAssume that we want to know the average kW demand of a building over a 30 minute time period. The ECC/WCC II system will take a kW reading at programmed time intervals; for example, 1 reading every three minutes. The value of the analog global will be the average kW for the 10 most recent readings. To understand this mode better, think of the data as being in a “window” which moves along the time axis and has the 10 most recent kW readings in it. The value of the analog global is the average of the kW values that are in the window. As the next kW reading becomes available,

the oldest kW reading in the window drops off and is no longer included in the data set which is used to determine the value of the global analog.

Notes:

Sampling From:

The value of the global analog will be the average of this input using the sliding window averaging method.

For example, if 3A1 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog input #1 on satellite controller #3. The value of the global analog will be the average of several of the most recent readings, depending on how other inputs on this screen are fi lled out.

Automatically reset by GB1 being OFF

This allows you to have the system automatically restart the averaging cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF.

Sampling Rate: 3 Minutes Window: 10 Sam

Assume we are monitoring building kW, and 3 minutes is entered as the sampling rate, and 10 samples is entered for the Window. The system will read the value of the building kW every 3 minutes and then average the 10 most recent readings. The value of this global analog will be the average kW for the last 30 minutes. The maximum number of samples allowed is 11.

Integral Mode: Sliding Window

There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears, and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available:

<Sliding Window, Average, Accumulation>

Divisor: 1

Due to memory limitations within the ECC/WCC II system, the maximum value of any global analog is 65,535, and the largest number which can be displayed on the screen is 9999. The value of the global analog is divided by this number to lower the number shown on the screen. The maximum divisor allowed is 9999.

ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL MODESLIDING WINDOW MODE SCREEN

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ANALOG Global #: 30 Name is GA30

Description: Building kW Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 4 kW

In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE Mode 3: Integral

Sampling from : GA1 Automatic Reset by GBA1 being ONSampling rate: 3 Minutes Window: 10 samplesMode: Sliding Window Divisor: 1

i = nGlobal value = ( Σ Di/n) / divisor

i = 1

If sampling data is unavailable, then use 50 as default value

---------------Alarm---------------Range Low Limit High Limit Type Message # MessageNone

Press <Ctrl> <R> to reset data

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

i = n

Global value = ( Σ Di / n) / divisor

i = 1

This is simply the form of the math equation used to generate the value of this global analog.

If sampling data is unavailable, use 50 as the default value.

If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to this number.

Range



The Low and High Limits can be either an Address or a Value. When you move the cursor to this fi eld, the word Address or Value will appear. Since this is a choice fi eld, press the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.



Press <Ctrl> <R> to reset data.

After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes to the screen, you should reset the data by moving the cursor to the home position on this screen and then pressing <Ctrl> and then <R>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. The computer will beep three times after it has reset the data. You may also use the reset feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start over.




ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRAL AVERAGE MODE

The integral mode can be used to obtain an average value for a measured variable over a given time period. For example, this can be used to obtain the average outside air temperature for a month. The ECC/WCC II system will take an outdoor air temperature reading at programmed time intervals, for example, 1 reading every minute. The value of the analog global will be the average temperature for all of the readings taken since this mode was started. To understand this mode better, think of the data as being in a “window” which moves along the time axis and has all of the outside air temperature readings

in it since the beginning of the month. The value of the analog global is the average of all the temperature readings that are in the window. As the next temperature reading becomes available, the window increases in size until the value of the analog global is automatically cleared or erased at the of the month.

Notes:

Sampling From:

The value of the global analog will be the average of this input over the specifi ed time period.

For example, if 1A3 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog input #3 on satellite controller #1. The value of the global analog will be the average of the readings over the specifi ed time period.

Automatically reset by GB1 being ON

This allows you to have the system automatically restart the averaging cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF.

Sampling Rate: 1 Minutes Window: 33 Days

Assume we are monitoring outside air temperature and 1 minute is entered as the “sampling rate” and 33 days for the Window. The system will read the value of the outside air temperature every minute and then average the values until 33 days have elapsed. After 33 days the calculation process will start over.

In the example above, GB1 goes on at the beginning of each new month to restart the averaging process, so the end of the window is never reached. If the end of the window is reached, the system will restart the calculation process.

The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window will accept from 0-9999 minutes, hours, days, or samples.

Integral Mode: Average

There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available:


GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODEAVERAGE MODE SCREEN


Description: AVG OA TEMP Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 1 °F


Sampling from : 1A3 Automatic Reset by GB1 being ONSampling rate: 1 Minutes Window: 33 daysMode: Average Divisor: 1

i = nGlobal value = ( Σ Di/n) / divisor i = 1




HOME for Menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Divisor: 1


i = n


i = 1



If the input value is not available or is invalid, the value of this global analog will default to this number.

Range







After you enter data on this screen, or after you make any changes to the screen, you should reset the data by moving the cursor to the home position on this screen and pressing <Ctrl> and then <R>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys. The computer will beep three times after it has reset the data. You may also use the reset feature whenever you want to cause the calculation process to start over.

ANALOG GLOBAL - INTEGRALACCUMULATION MODE

The integral mode may also be used to add data readings together to obtain an accumulated total. For example, assume that the ECC/WCC II system is monitoring the gallons per minute (gpm) of fuel oil used by a building. We can use the integral mode to take a sample gpm reading every minute and accumulate the readings to obtain a total gallons used each day. For example, consider the following table of data:

Time

(minutes since

midnight)

Sample Reading

(gpm)

Value of the

Global Analog

(total gallons)1 5 52 6 113 5 164 4 20

1439 5 7200

At the end of the day, the total gallons used (7200 in the above example) can be automatically written on a Trend Log Screen. After the value is saved on a Trend Log Screen, the total gallons used can be reset to 0 to allow the system to start accumulating the next day’s oil usage.

The screen on the next page is a Global Analog Screen using the accumulation mode to total the gallons of fuel oil used:

Notes:

Sampling From:

The value of the global analog will be the accumulated total of this input over the specifi ed time period.

For example, if GA20 is input here, the system will periodically read the value of analog global #20. The value of the global analog will be the accumulated total of the readings over the specifi ed time period.

Automatically reset by GB1 being ON

This allows you to have the system automatically restart the accumulation cycle when a binary value goes either ON or OFF.

Sampling Rate: 1 MinutesWindow: 24 Hours

Assume we are monitoring fuel oil usage in gpm, and 1 minute is entered as the sampling rate and 24 hours is entered for the Window. The system will read the value of the fuel oil usage rate (gpm) every minute and then add the current value to the accumulated total until 24 hours have elapsed. After 24 hours, the calculation process will start over.

The sampling rate can vary from 1 minute to 99 hours. The window will accept from 0-999 minutes, hours, days, or samples.

Integral Mode: Accumulation

There are three integral modes which can be selected by pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then pressing <Enter>. The following choices are available:


GLOBAL ANALOG - INTEGRAL MODE - ACCUMULATION MODE SCREEN


Description: Oil Usage Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 7 Gal


Sampling from : GA20 Automatic Reset by GB2 being ONSampling rate: 1 Minutes Window: 24 hoursMode: Accumulation Divisor: 1

i = nGlobal value = ( Σ Di/n) / divisor i = 1




HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Divisor: 1


i = n


i = 1



If the input value is not available or invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to this number.

Range











Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100

The math formula to be calculated is entered here. The ECC/WCC II system has the following math functions:

Arithmetic Functions

Operator CommentAdd + Adds the value at its right to the value at

its leftSubtract - Subtracts the value at its right from the

value at its leftMultiply * Multiples the value at its right by the value

at its leftDivide / Divides the value at its left by the value at

its rightSquare Root sqrt(X) Yields the square root of the value in the

parenthesesLog (Base 10)

log(X) Yields the log of the value in the parentheses

Exponential (Xy)

pow(X,Y) Yields the value of the fi rst variable (X) raised to the power of the second variable (Y)

Natural Log 1n(X) Yields the natural log of the variable in the parentheses

Exponential (ex)

exp(X) Yields the value of “e” raised to the power of the variable in parentheses

Remainder % Yields the remainder when the value at its left is divided by the value to its right (integers only)

Trigonometric Functions

Operator Comment

Sine sin(X) Yields the sine of the value in parentheses

Cosine cos(X) Yields the cosine of the value in parentheses

Tangent tan(X) Yields the tangent of the value in parentheses

Arc-sine asin(X) Yields the arc-sine of the value in parentheses

Arc-cosine acos(X) Yields the arc-cosine of the value in parentheses

Arc-Tangent atan(X) Yields the arc-tangent of the value in parentheses

ANALOG GLOBAL - MATH FUNCTION MODEThe Math Function mode allows the ECC/WCC II system to perform mathematical functions using global analog values.

MATH FUNCTION SCREEN----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ANALOG Global #: 33 Name is GA33

Description: % Outside Air Data Pattern: x,xxx Unit of Measure: 6%In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUE Mode 4: Math FunctionGlobal Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100If the math function can’t be calculated successfully, use 20 as value.


HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Relational Functions

Operator Comment

Equal to = = The combined expression is true if the value to its left is equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise

Greater Than

> The combined expression is true if the value to its left is greater than to the value to its right; it is false otherwise

Greater Than or Equal to

=> The combined expression is true if the value to its left is greater than or equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise

Less Than

< The combined expression is true if the value to its left is less than the value to its right; it is false otherwise

Less Than or Equal to

=< The combined expression is true if the value to its left is less than or equal to the value to its right; it is false otherwise

Unequal =! The combined expression is true if the value to its left is not equal to the value on its right; it is false otherwise

Logical Functions

Operator Comment

Logical “or” | | The combined expression is true if the value to its left or the value to its right is true; it is false otherwise

Logical “and” && The combined expression is true if the value to its left and the value to its right is true; it is false otherwise

Logical “not” ! The expression is true if the value to its right is false, and vice versa

Miscellaneous Functions

Operator CommentConditional ?: The conditional operator takes 3

expressions arranged as follows:

expression1 ? expression2 : expression 3

The conditional operator yields the value of expression2 if expression1 is true and yields the value of expression3 otherwise

As an example, assume that we want to calculate the percent outside air using the following formula:

(Return Air Temperature) - (Mixed Air Temperature)% OA = --------------------------------------------------------------x 100 (Return Air Temperature - Outside Air Temperature)

Assume 2A5 (satellite controller #2, analog input #5) is the return air temperature, 2A6 is the mixed air temperature, and GA3 is the outside air temperature. The value of the global analog will be percent outside air.

Global Value = ((2A5-2A6)/(2A5-GA3))*100

If the math function can’t be calculated successfully, use 20 as value

If the input value is not available or is invalid, then the value of this global analog will default to the number entered here.

Range




This graph can be reconstructed within the ECC/WCC II system with the use of a look up table. For this example, assume that the 0-1 VDC signal from the sensor is connected to analog input 2A3 (Analog input #3 on satellite controller #2). The signal from the sensor is the Analog Input for the look up table, and the actual temperature is the value of global analog #121.

The data entered in the IN column must be in sequence with “1” being the smallest and “60” the largest. If the input data is less than the smallest value in the IN column, the smallest IN value on the screen is used. If the input is greater than the largest IN value, the largest IN value is used.

ANALOG GLOBALLOOK UP TABLE MODE

Eight of the global analog screens (GA121-128) have a “look up table” available. The look up table generates an output number based on the value of an input number.

This mode is very useful for curve fi tting applications. For example, consider a non-linear temperature sensor that has the characteristics shown on the following graph:




ANALOG GLOBAL- LOOK UP TABLE SCREEN


Description: Temperature Data Pattern: xxx.x Unit of Measure: 1 °F

In Local Set this global defaults to LAST VALUEAnalog Input: 2A3Extend Data to Next Table?: NO Mode 5: Look Up TableIf the input data is unavailable, then use 70 as default value IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT 1: 41 -> 41.5 16: 56 -> 59.5 31: 71 -> 68.0 46: 86 -> 78.0 2: 42 -> 42.5 17: 57 -> 60.3 32: 72 -> 68.5 47: 87 -> 78.7 3: 43 -> 44.5 18: 58 -> 61.0 33: 73 -> 69.0 48: 88 -> 79.7 4: 44 -> 46.5 19: 59 -> 61.5 34: 74 -> 69.5 49: 89 -> 80.7 5: 45 -> 47.5 20: 60 -> 62.0 35: 75 -> 70.0 50: 90 -> 81.7 6: 46 -> 49.0 21: 61 -> 62.5 36: 76 -> 70.6 51: 91 -> 83.0 7: 47 -> 51.5 22: 62 -> 63.0 37: 77 -> 71.3 52: 92 -> 84.0 8: 48 -> 51.8 23: 63 -> 63.5 38: 78 -> 72.0 53: 93 -> 85.3 9: 49 -> 53.0 24: 64 -> 64.0 39: 79 -> 72.5 54: 94 -> 86.5 10: 50 -> 54.0 25: 65 -> 64.8 40: 80 -> 73.0 55: 95 -> 88.0 11: 51 -> 55.0 26: 66 -> 65.5 41: 81 -> 74.0 56: 96 -> 89.5 12: 52 -> 56.3 27: 67 -> 66.0 42: 82 -> 74.5 57: 97 -> 91.0 13: 53 -> 57.0 28: 68 -> 66.3 43: 83 -> 75.3 58: 98 -> 93.0 14: 54 -> 58.0 29: 69 -> 67.0 44: 84 -> 76.0 59: 99 -> 95.5 15: 55 -> 59.0 30: 70 -> 67.3 45: 85 -> 77.0 60: 100 -> 100.0HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Each look up table has a graph associated with it which can be displayed on the screen. The graph for GA121 is shown below:

Extend Data to next Table

Each look up table can hold up to 60 sets of data. If you have an application which requires a larger look up table, the data may be extended to the next look up table.

Graph <Ctrl-g>

BINARY GLOBALSThe ECC/WCC II system has 256 binary globals. The term “binary” simply means a value which is represented by one of two conditions, ON or OFF. The term “global” means information which is shared by all of the satellite controllers in the system. Therefore, a “binary global” is an ON/OFF value which can be used by any satellite controller within the ECC/WCC II system.

BINARY:

Specifi es the summary type to be displayed. Because this is a choice fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired summary type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a summary type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.

To view or edit a specifi c binary global, simply position the cursor (shown as “>” along the left hand side of the screen) using the cursor positioning (arrow) to the desired point and press <Enter>. The Binary Global Screen for the specifi ed point will now appear.

Description

The description message which was entered on the Binary Global Screen is displayed here to aid you in identifying the different binary globals within the system.

Binary Global Summary Screen-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

BINARY Global Summary GB 1 Time Date 10:02 7/07 Description State Alarm TimeGB1: GLOBAL BINARY #1 OFF OffGB2:GB3:GB4:GB5:GB6:GB7:GB8:GB9:GB10:GB11:GB12:GB13:GB14:GB15:GB16:GB17:GB18:GB19:GB20:

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

State

There are two messages which appear under this heading. The fi rst one is the On/Off message the user enters on the Global Binary Screen. The second will be one of the following messages which describe the current status of the global binary value.

ON - The binary global is ON.

OFF - The binary global is OFF.

DUTYCYC - The binary global is OFF, because it has been overridden by the duty cycle program.

SHED - The binary global is OFF, because it has been overridden by the shed/restore program.

OVR - The binary global is forced ON and OFF due to a command on the override screen.

Alarm Time

The ECC/WCC II system has the capability of alarming if the value of a binary global is either ON or OFF. The time that the alarm occurred is shown here.

The alarms for global binary values do not appear on the Alarm Summary Screen. However, if a global alarm is active, the alarm class will appear on the Main Menu after the “Active alarms in classes:” statement.

Acknowledge Alarms

The global binary alarms are acknowledged from the Global Binary Summary Screen by moving the cursor to the active alarm and pressing <Ctrl> <A>. If the global binary value has returned to normal, the alarm message will be cleared from the screen. It can take up to 30 seconds before the alarm is cleared from the screen.

The ECC/WCC II can generate the ON or OFF value of the global binary using either the Combinatorial, Compare, or Alarm mode of operation.

The Combinatorial mode has the capability of generating the ON or OFF value of the binary global using “and/or” logic. For example, binary global #1 (GB1) can be programmed to be ON if the outside air temperature is above 60 ºF, the building is in the day mode, and the chilled water pump is running. The ECC/WCC II system could then be programmed to turn on a chiller whenever GB1 is ON. The mode used to generate the ON/OFF value of the binary global using “and/or” logic is called Combinatorial because several statements are combined together to determine the ON or OFF value of the binary global.

The Compare Screen allows the ECC/WCC II system to do “greater than/less than” logic. The ON or OFF value of the binary global is determined by one numerical value being [equal to], [greater than], [greater than or equal to], [less than], or [less than or equal to] another numerical value. For example, the ECC/WCC II system could monitor the enthalpy (total heat content) of the outside air and the return air and select the air stream with the lowest heat content to be used for cooling. The Compare Screen could be used to cause binary global #2 (GB2) to go ON if the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy, indicating that outside air should be used for cooling. The ECC/WCC II system could then be programmed to open the outside air damper and lose the return air damper when GB2 is ON.

The Alarm mode causes the binary global to generate an ON or OFF value based on either an active or non-active alarm that has been either acknowledged or not acknowledged.

Global #: ____

Specifi es the global number and its type. Because this is a choice fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:


Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired global type has been selected, and then press <Enter>. (If you select a global type that is different than that currently being displayed, the screen will be rewritten with the appropriate screen information.)

If you would like to edit a different global, simply position the cursor to this fi eld by using the cursor positioning (arrow) keys, enter the desired global number, and press <Enter>. The new screen will automatically appear.

name is ______

Specifi es the name (point address) of this binary global. Any changes to the global number (above) will be refl ected in this point address (e.g., BINARY Global #: 28 would show GB28 as the name).

Description: ________________

Specifi es a short message which is displayed on Summary and Data Entry/Editing Screens to aid you in remembering points within the system. You may enter up to 20 characters (control, codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

On Message #: ____ Off Message #: ____

Specifi es a pair of message numbers, one for the binary global OFF state and the second for the binary global ON state. These numbers are used by the system to reference a textual message which is displayed in association with this binary global.

Mode: Combinatorial

Specifi es the mode used to generate the ON or OFF value of the binary global. Because this is a choice fi eld, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES:<Combinatorial, Compare, Alarm, Alarm-by-Class>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <Enter>. Whenever you change modes, you must fi rst clear the existing screen by using the <Ctrl> <Home> feature.

Value is ____ when ____ of the following conditions are met

Specifi es the state (or value) that the binary global will take if the specifi ed conditions are true. Because these two fi elds are choice fi elds, the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICES: <OFF, ON> and <ANY, ALL>

BINARY GLOBAL SCREENCOMBINATORIAL MODE

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BINARY Global #: 1 Name is GB1

Description: Global Binary 1 On Message #: 1 ONMode: Combinatorial Off Message #: 2 OFF

Value is OFF when ANY of the following conditions are met.

1L1 is ON default falseW1 is ON default true

In local set this global defaults to ON.

-----------------------ALARM------------------------- Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired value and condition have been selected, and then press <Enter>.

To understand how the combinatorial binary global works, a short description of logic is needed. The combinatorial global is read as “Value is (ON or OFF) when (ANY or ALL) of the following conditions are met.”

The phrase “Value is (ON or OFF)...” simply states what value the binary global will have if and only if the rest of the phrase is a true statement.

This second part of the sentence reads as “...when (ANY or ALL) of the following conditions are met.” If the word “ANY” is selected, the binary global will take on the specifi c value if at least one of the statements following the sentence is true. If the word “ALL” is selected, then the binary global will take on the specifi ed value if and only if all of the statements following the sentences are true. The logical equivalent for “ANY” is the boolean function “OR,” and the logical equivalent for “ALL” is the boolean function “AND.”

_____ is ON default true_____ is OFF default false

Next on the Binary Global Screen is a list of “statements” which are used to determine the “trueness” or falseness” of the binary global. These statements are constructed by entering the logical address of a particular point. This is best shown by the following examples:

Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met:

W2 is ON default FALSE GB5 is OFF default TRUE

The segment of the screen shown above would read, “Value is ON when either week schedule #2 is ON or binary global #5 is OFF.” Note that the word “or” was used to describe the global.

Value is ON when ALL of the following conditions are met:

1K1H is ON default TRUE W6 is OFF default FALSE

This screen would read, “Value is ON when the 1H contact of satellite #1 is ON and week schedule 6 is OFF.” Again, note that the word “and” was used to describe the global.

If a value or any of the point addresses specifi ed by the user cannot be found, then the system will look at the command given in the “default” column. In other words, in the example given, if week schedule #6 (W6) cannot be found (i.e., it has not been set up), then the system will consider the statement “W6 is OFF” to be a false statement, and therefore it will assume W6 is ON.

In Local Set this global defaults to _____.

Specifi es the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer.

------------ALARM-------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0

The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. The type is 1-8, 1 being the highest priority and 8 being the lowest. The system will automatically print out the alarm message associated with the message number above. The ECC/WCC II system can report alarm types 1-5 to a remote printer.

Notes:

The compare mode generates the ON or OFF value of the binary global depending on how one analog value compares to another analog value.

Value ON if 1A4 > 2A5Default value: 25 20

In the above example, the global binary will be ON when the value of 1A4 (analog input #4 on satellite controller #1) is greater than 2A5 (analog input #5 on satellite controller #2). If the analog value is unavailable, the system will use the default value below the analog value. For example, if satellite controller #1 was off-line, the value for analog input #4 on satellite controller would default to 25.

Entering a Constant Number

If you want to enter a constant for one of the two values, leave the top blank and enter a number in the default space as shown below:

Value ON if 1A4 > ------Default value: 25 20

In the above example, the value of the global binary will be ON when 1A4 is greater than 20.

Math Operators (>, = =, !=)

The math operators are in a choice fi eld and therefore the list of available choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen:

CHOICE (>, = =, !=)

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired mode has been selected, and then press <ENTER>.

Math Operator Description> The statement is true when the

value to the left of the symbol is greater than the value to the right. (Or, the statement is true when the value to the right is less than or equal to the value to the left.)

= = The statement is true when the value to the left is equal to the value to the right.

!= The statement is true when the value to the left of the symbol does not equal the value to the right of the symbol.

BINARY GLOBAL SCREENCOMPARE MODE


Description: Enthalpy Comparison On Message #: 10 Use OAMode 2: Compare Off Message #: 11 Use RA

Value ON if 1A4 > 1A5 Hysteresis +/- GA3Default value : 25 20 5

In local set this global defaults to Off


HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Hysteresis +/- GA3

This entry allows you to add hysteresis to the equation:

Value ON if 1A4 > 2A5 Hysteresis +/- GA3Default value: 25 20 5

In the above example, the value of 1A4 must be greater than 2A5 by the value of GA3 before the global will go ON. Also, the value of 2A5 must be less than 1A4 by the value of GA3 before the global binary will go OFF. If the analog value that is entered here (GA3 in the above example) is invalid or unavailable, the default value under the analog value will be used as the amount of hysteresis.

In Local Set this global defaults to ____

Specifi es the state (or value) of the binary global when the satellite is in the Local Set mode. The satellite is in local set when it has lost communications with the front end computer.

---------------ALARM----------------Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0

The system has the capability of generating an alarm if the value of this binary global is either ON or OFF. The type is 1-8, 1 being the highest priority and 8 being the lowest. The system will automatically print out the alarm message associated with the message number above. The ECC/WCC II system can report alarm types 1-5 to a remote printer.

Value ON if 1A2 is active alarm and [Current in Alarm] and [Alarm not acknowledged]

In the above example, the ON or OFF value of the global binary is determined by the alarm status of analog input #2 on satellite controller #1. When an alarm occurs, the alarm message will blink on the Analog Input Screen. After the alarm has been acknowledged, one of two things will happen. If the value of the analog input is presently within the alarm limits, the alarm message will disappear. If the value of the analog input is still outside the alarm limits, the message will stay on the screen, but it will quit blinking.

The term “active alarm” means that the alarm has not been cleared. It is either a “blinking” or “solid” alarm within the system.

The conditional statements are in a “choice” fi eld and therefore the choices are shown at the bottom of the screen.

CHOICES:<NONE,Current in Alarm,Current not in Alarm><NONE,Alarm Acknowledged,Alarm not Acknowledged>

[NONE][NONE]

When NONE is selected for both of the choice fi elds, the value of the global binary will change state (go ON in the above example) whenever the analog input specifi ed on this screen is in an alarm condition, either unacknowledged (“blinking” alarm) or acknowledged (“solid” alarm).

[NONE][Alarm Acknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the alarm for the analog input is acknowledged while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits. That is to say, the global binary will go ON whenever this analog input has “solid” alarm condition.

[NONE][Alarm NotAcknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the alarm for the analog input has not been acknowledged and remains a “blinking” alarm.

[Current in Alarm][NONE]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input is outside of the alarm limits.

[Current in Alarm][Alarm Acknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits and the alarm has been acknowledged (“solid” alarm).

[Current in Alarm][Alarm not Acknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON while the value of the analog input is outside the alarm limits and the alarm is unacknowledged (“blinking” alarm).

[Not in Alarm][NONE

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will] go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, regardless of whether it has been acknowledged or not.

[Not in Alarm][Alarm Acknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, provided it was acknowledged while it was outside the alarm limits.

[Not in Alarm]Acknowledged]

When these choices are selected, the value of the global binary will go ON when the value of the analog input returns inside the alarm limits, provided it was not acknowledged while it was outside the alarm limits.

BINARY GLOBAL SCREENALARM MODE


Description: Alarm On Message #: 10 AlarmMode 3: Alarm Off Message #: 11 Normal

Value ON if 1A2 is active alarm and [Current in Alarm] and [Alarm not acknowledged]

In local set this global defaults to Off


HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




THIS SCREEN IS NOT SUPPORTED AT THIS TIME.

Notes:

BINARY GLOBAL SCREENEXTERNAL MODE


Description: External On Message #: 10 AlarmMode 4: External Off Message #: 11 Normal


HOME for menu--------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Value [ON][OFF] when alarm class 3 is active and not acknowledged

The ECC/WCC II system has the capability of distinguishing between 8 different alarm levels or alarm types. Alarm type #1 has the highest priority and will be reported before alarm type #2, etc. The ECC/WCC II system has the capability to call out and print alarms on the remote printer for the fi rst 5 alarm types or alarm levels.

When the Alarm-by-Class mode is selected, the ON/OFF value of the global binary is generated if any point within the system that is assigned to this alarm type goes into alarm

For example, assume that all of the room temperatures in a building are assigned a level 3 alarm priority, and global binary #10 (GB10) is set to go ON when alarm class 3 is active and not acknowledged.

GB10 will be ON when any room temperature is in alarm and has not yet been acknowledged.

BINARY GLOBAL SCREENALARM-BY-CLASS MODE


Description: Alarm On Message #: 10 AlarmMode 5: Alarm-by-Class Off Message #: 11 Normal

Value ON when alarm class 3 is active and not acknowledged

In local set this global defaults to OFF


HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Shed/Restore Program #:

Specifi es the number of the program you are currently editing. The ECC/WCC II system has 10 shed/restore programs.

Shed/Restore based on input:

Specifi es the [analog] point address that acts as the input signal source for this shed/restore program. For example, if you are monitoring the kW demand of a building, and the kW meter is connected to analog input #1 of satellite controller #10, you would input 10A1. You may also use global analog values for this input.

and schedule:

Specifi es the [binary] point address that provides the schedule control of the shed/restore program. When this address is zero (or OFF), the OFF schedule mode is selected. When this address is one (or ON), the ON schedule mode is selected.

On Schedule Off Schedule

Shed Level:Restore Level:

When the [analog] input associated with this program rises to the shed level, the system will start turning off the binary globals which are listed as “items to be shed.” When the [analog] input associated with this program falls to the restore level, the system will start turning the binary globals listed as “items to be shed” back on.

Shed/Restore rate:

Specifi es the time interval the system uses to turn the items on or off. For example, if you have a shed/restore rate of 1 minute per item, and the value of the analog input rises above the shed level, the system will shut off the fi rst binary global (GB5 on the example screen) and wait one minute. If the analog input value is still above the shed level, the next global will be turned off (GB7 on the example screen). This process will continue until the value of the analog input is below the shed level. After the value of the analog input falls below the shed level, the system will not turn any binary globals back on until the analog value falls below the restore level. At this point, the system will start bringing the binary globals back on at the time interval specifi ed by the shed/restore rate.

Items to shed:

The user enters the names of the binary globals which will be used in the shed/restore program. There may be up to 16 items entered per program. Only binary globals may be entered in these spaces, but some spaces may be left blank if desired. If a space is left blank, the system will pause for the amount of time specifi ed by the shed/restore rate as it comes to the blank space.

Current # of items shed:

This location informs you of the number of item(s) which have been shed.

SHED/RESTORE SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Shed/Restore Program # 1

Shed/Restore based on input: 10A1 and schedule: W1

On Schedule Off ScheduleShed level: 500.000 KW 700.000 KWRestore level: 450.000 KW 600.000 KW

Shed/Restore rate: 5 minutes/item

Items to shed: GB5 GB7 GB30 GB200

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Default Number of Items to Shed:

This input allows the system to “soft-start” the items connected to this satellite controller after a power failure. For example, if you enter 3 for this input, the satellite controller will stage the 3 items on at the designated shed/restore rate after the power has been restored to the satellite. Item 3 will be turned on fi rst and item 1 last.

To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this screen to control the schedule of the equipment. For example, if you want to turn off a bathroom exhaust fan if the building kW reaches the shed level of 500 kW, as shown on the example screen, then you should control the bathroom exhaust fan based on a time clock mode which selects its “ON” schedule by a binary global as outlined below:

Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you want the exhaust fan to be on during the day unless the kW demand of the building reaches its peak but off all the time at night, enter a week schedule which is “ON” during the day and “OFF” at night.

Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the corresponding week schedule is ON.

Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the binary inputs that select the schedule. A portion of the time clock screen is shown below:

Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule Selected by: GB5

When GB5 is “ON,” the contact on the satellite controller is closed and the exhaust fan is on. When the building reaches its shed level, GB5 goes “OFF” which causes the contact to open which causes the exhaust fan to go off.

1.

2.

3.

Duty Cycling Program #:

Specifi es the number of the program you are currently editing. The ECC/WCC II has 5 duty cycle programs.

Program is: ____ segments

Choose how many segments you would like to set up for the duty cycling duration. There is a maximum of 12 segments for a duty cycle program. When a “v” (lower case v) has been input under a segment, the item will be off at this point for the amount of time entered above.

of: ____ minutes each

A user entered value specifying the time interval of each segment. You may input a value of 1 to 60 minutes in this fi eld.

Currently in segment #:

This area automatically displays which segment the duty cycling program is currently in.

Item:

Enter Global Binary values which will be duty cycled by this program. You may enter up to twelve items per program. Only Binary Global values may be used in this program.

To cause equipment to be turned off when the binary globals are turned off, use the binary globals listed on this screen to control the schedule of equipment. For example, if you want to duty cycle a bathroom exhaust fan, then you should control the bathroom exhaust fan based on a time clock mode which selects its “ON” schedule by a binary global as outlined below:

Enter a week schedule which corresponds to the schedule of the exhaust fan. For example, if you want the exhaust fan to be duty cycled from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm M-F and off the rest of the time, you would create a week schedule that is “ON” from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm M-F.

Create a binary global which is “ON” whenever the corresponding week schedule is ON.

Input the global binary on a time clock screen as the binary input that selects the schedule. A portion of the time clock screen is shown below:Contact is: CLOSED in “On” Schedule

Selected by: GB6

When GB6 is ON, the contact on the satellite controller is closed, and the exhaust fan is on. When GB6 is OFF, the contact opens which causes the exhaust fan to go off. The exhaust fan will be duty-cycled along with the binary global.

Notes:

1.

2.

3.

DUTY CYCLE SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Duty Cycling Program #: 1 Program is: 12 segments of: 5 minutes each Currently in segment #: 4Item Segment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12GB6 v v v v v vGB19 v v v v v vGB21 v v v v v vGB38 v v v v v vGB52 v v v v v vGB57 v v v v v vGB61 v v v v vGB72 v v v v v v v vGB77 v v v v v v v v

v <--> segment where item is off-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Proportional Reset Screen

Description: HW Reset

As 1A5 varies from 0 Deg F to 60 Deg F,

Adjust the setpoint(s) of 1k3h

From: 200 Deg F to: 80 Deg F for the following

--------------Setpoints to be Affected---------------- On Off Alt. Alt. Schedule Schedule On Sch. Off Sch.EA Driver *-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PROPORTIONAL RESET SCREEN

Proportional Reset Graph

Description:

A short message is entered here to help you remember what the reset schedule is used for.

As _____ varies from: _____ to _____

The fi rst input on this line is the value that is to serve as the analog input for the Reset Screen. For example, assume that we want to reset hot water temperature based on outside air temperature according to the following reset schedule:

O.A. Temperature H.W. Temperature 0 ºF 200 ºF 60 ºF 80 ºF

The analog input value is the outside air temperature sensor in the above example. The outside air temperature sensor is entered as “1A5” which means that the sensor is connected to channel #5 on satellite controller #1. Global analog values (GAn) can also be entered at this location.

The next two inputs on this line designate the range for the input value. In our example the outside air temperature range is from0 º to 60 º.

Adjust the setpoint(s) of _____

This input designates the location of the control output which is to have the setpoint adjusted. In our example, it is the location of the output which controls the hot water valve. “1k3h” means that the hot water valve is controlled by channel 3 of satellite controller #1. The last letter in this input is either an “h” or a “c.” If channel 3 on satellite controller is programmed using the EA Driver Screen, “h” is entered as the last letter. If channel 3 was programmed using Dual Limit Screens, “h” means the contact in the satellite controller which makes the “COM” to “H” terminals, and “c” means the contact in the satellite controller which makes the “COM” to “C.”

--------------Setpoints to be Affected--------------

On Off Alt. Alt. Schedule Schedule On Sch. Off Sch.

EA Driver *

Designate Setpoint to be Affected (*)

An asterisk (*) is placed under the setpoint that is to be changed according to the reset schedule. In the above example, the On schedule setpoint is reset with outdoor air temperature.

The “EA Driver” input on this line is a choice fi eld which allows you to “tell” the system what screen has been used for the device being controlled (i.e. hot water valve). Since this is a choice fi eld, the choices will appear on the bottom of the screen.

CHOICES: <EA Driver, Dual High, Dual Low>

To make your selection, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to this fi eld, then press the <space bar> once for each choice. When the desired control type appears, press <Enter>.

EA Driver

EA Driver means that the binary outputs which are being used to control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) are programmed using the EA Driver Screen. An EA Driver Screen has the following setpoints available:

On Schedule: 160 ºF Alternate On: 0.0 ºFOff Schedule: 120 ºF Alternate Off: 0.0 ºF

Dual High/Dual Low

Dual High or Dual Low means that the binary output which is being used to control the output device (i.e. hot water valve) is programmed using the Dual Limit Screen. The Dual Limit Screen has time following setpoints available:

Low Limit High LimitOn Schedule CLOSED Between -------- & 130 ºFOff Schedule CLOSED Between -------- & 120 ºFAlt On Schedule OPEN Between 0.0 & 0.0 ºFAlt Off Schedule OPEN Between 0.0 & 0.0 ºF

“Dual Low” is selected if the Low Limit setpoints are to be reset, and “Dual High” is selected if the High Limit setpoints are to be reset.

This graph is accessed from the Proportional Reset Screen by fi rst pressing <Ctrl> and then <G>, holding both keys down at the same time and then releasing both keys. The bottom of the graph shows the range of the input value along with the actual value of the input, and the left side of the scale shows the setpoint range along with the actual setpoint value.

Proportional Reset Graph

SPECIAL KEYS PROGRAMThe ECC/WCC II Special Keys Program allows you to “teach” the system a set of key strokes that can be repeated at set time intervals at a specifi c time each day when a global binary value goes ON or manually. Among other things, this allows you to automatically print screens on the local or remote printer at certain times or when certain events occur without operator interface. There are 10 auto-scan/print routines in the ECC/WCC II system. Each of the 10 routines can have up to 100 keystrokes.

The auto-scan/print routines are part of the standard software. However, the CPU (front end personal computer) needs to have 640 k of RAM memory. WattMaster will provide the auto-scan/print routines to any user that has an existing system for a nominal fee to cover the cost of the disk(s) and handling. WattMaster will not pay for any additional hardware items required to increase a system’s memory to 640 k.

To “teach” the system a set of keystrokes, the following procedure is used:

Start the “learning” process at the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu by pressing <Alt> and then pressing <L>, holding both keys down at the same time for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

While you are in the “learning” mode, the following keys perform special functions (to use these special keys, press <Alt> down fi rst and then press the second key, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys):

Alt A: Enter append mode; used at “Sat #” position on Main Menu Screen. The append mode is used to add keystrokes to an existing auto-scan/print routine. The <Alt A> feature works only when the cursor is at the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen.

Alt E: Stop learning or append mode. After you have entered all of the keystrokes that you would like to “teach” the system, use <Alt E> to exit from the learning mode.

Alt N Generate a form feed in the replay mode. If you are programming the system to automatically print a screen (or screens) on the printer during the replay mode, the <Alt N> command causes the printer to generate a form feed to cause the outputs to be printed on separate pages.

Alt L: Enter learning mode; used at “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen. Using the <Alt L> command while the cursor is in the “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen starts the learning mode.

1.

Alt P: Print a screen on the local printer in the replay mode.Normally, you can print the characters that are currently on the screen by fi rst pressing <Shift> and then <PrtSc>. However, when you are “teaching” the system a set of keystrokes to perform automatically, the <Shift> <PrtSc> command will not be recognized by the system in the replay mode. As you are entering the keystrokes you want the system to automatically replay, use the <Alt P> command instead of the <Shift> <PrtSc> command when you are at a screen that you want to print on the printer.

Alt T Print a screen on the remote printer in the replay mode.As you are entering the keystrokes you want the system to automatically replay, use the <Alt T> command when you reach a screen that is to be printed at the remote printer. The fi rst time the <Alt T> is used for each of the 10 special key buffers, a line will appear at the bottom asking for the associated alarm class for remote call-out. The ECC/WCC II system will print the screen on the remote printer using the telephone number associated with this alarm class. There are 10 special key buffers; each special key buffer will be allowed one alarm type from 1 to 5. The screens will only be printed at one remote site, even if the “dial both telephone numbers” feature is enabled. The fi les will be saved on the disk temporarily; they are erased the next time a screen is printed remotely.

Alt Q: Quit replay mode before it is fi nished. If the system has started to replay the keystrokes that you taught it, and you want to cause it to stop, use the <Alt Q> command.

Alt S: Start replay mode; used at “Sat #” position on the Main Menu Screen. If you want to manually start the replay mode, use the <Alt S> command while the cursor is at the “Sat 3” position on the Main Menu Screen.

: :

Note: These commands are on the Help Screen and will appear on the ECC/WCC II System Screen by pressing <Alt> and <H> simultaneously.

The system will then ask you for the Buffer #. You can teach the system up to 10 separate auto-scan/print routines, so enter a number from 1 to 10. (Later you will access the Special Keys Screen to “tell” the system when to perform this auto-scan/print routine.)

Now, simply enter the same keystrokes that you want the system to automatically perform at the selected time(s). For example, if you want to print an Analog Trend Screen, go through the exact same keystrokes that you normally would to print the Analog Trend Screen, except when you want to print the current screen use <Alt>, not <Shift><PrtSc>.

2.

3.

After you have entered the desired keystrokes, press <Alt><E> to exit from the learning mode.

Then return to the Main Menu and access the Special Keys Screen if you want to system to automatically replay these keystrokes at certain times or when certain events occur.

Special KeysBuffer # Description Activated # of Keys

1 Room 101 Temp Interval: 8 Hours 182 Optimal Start 1 At Time: 0800 213 AHU Chg of State Global: GB10 194 None 05 None 06 None 07 None 08 None 09 None 010 None 0

Buffer #:

There are 10 auto-scan/print routines available and are referred to as buffer #1-10 on this screen.

Description:

You may enter a message as an aid to help you remember what keystrokes have been programmed in each of the buffers.

Activated:

The auto-scan/print routine will be “activated” or automatically started according to what is entered here. The 4 choices available for this input are:

<None, Interval, At Time, Global>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired choice appears on the screen, and then press <Enter>.

None

If “None” is chosen, the system will not automatically replay the routine.

4.

5.

Interval: 8 Hours

If “Interval” is chosen to activate the auto-scan/print routine, two more fi elds appear on the screen to allow you to tell the system the time interval between the automatic replay of the auto-scan/print routine. The fi rst input has a maximum range of 0 to 127. The second input is either Minutes or Hours.

In the Special Keys example table, 8 hours is entered. This means that the system will repeat the keystrokes that you “taught” it every 8 hours.

At Time: 0800

The auto-scan/print routine can be activated at a certain time each day by selecting the “At Time” choice. The time is entered in 24-hour format; that is to say 1:00 pm is 1300.

In the Special Keys example table, 0800 is entered. This means that the system will repeat the keystrokes that you “taught” it at 8:00 every morning.

Global: GB1

The auto-scan/print routine can also be initiated by a global binary value going ON. In the Special Keys example table, when GB1 goes ON, the routine will start. Other very useful entries that can be input here are “NewDay” and “NewMon.” These inputs have a pulse type nature and are ON for approximately 1 second. NewDay is ON for 1 second at the beginning of each new day, and NewMon is ON for 1 second at the beginning of each new month to cause the routine to be activated.

Notes:




The Enhanced Graphics and Tenant Override options are available at additional cost.

Notes:

UTILITY SCREEN 17:08 11/03

WATTMASTER CONTROL CENTER II

+---------------------Utility Screen-----------------------+ System Parameters II Rebuild Satellite Table Search and Override Point Description Search Logical Address Search Enhanced Graphics Custom Screens Set Monitor Color Tenant Override Message Screen WCC/SCC File Management Exit WCC II System

+----------------------------------------------------------+

Disable local print-out: Yes

The printer will automatically print alarms as they occur, operator ID as the user signs on and off the system, any overrides that are entered, satellite-out-of-service (SOS) alarms, energy consumption reports, and the time and date of system re-boots. If you would like to disable the automatic print-out, select “Yes” at this location. Because this is a choice fi eld, the choices will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

CHOICES: <Yes, No>

Make your selection by pressing the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired entry appears, and then press <Enter>.

Disable Satellite Alarms: NO

If some of the data is unreadable when the ECC/WCC II attempts to communicate with a satellite controller, the system assumes that the satellite controller is out of service. Alarms of this type are considered a class #1 alarm and as such will print out locally and “Call-Out” if allowed. In addition to this, an “SOS” (Satellite-Out-Of-Service) message will appear to the right of the “VER” number which appears for the satellite controller on the Satellite Summary Screen.

If you would like to disable the automatic print-out and possible call-out that will result from this “SOS” condition, select “YES” at this location. Possible choices will appear at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the <space bar> will alternate the choices from YES to NO. Press <Enter> to select an answer.

Dial both Phone numbers for alarm type 1: NO “ 2: NO “ 3: NO “ 4: NO “ 5: NO

The System Parameters I Screen permits the user to enter two telephone numbers for each of the fi rst fi ve alarm types. If an alarm occurs and the System Parameters “Disabled By” fi eld permits the ECC/WCC II to call-out, the system will fi rst try to contact the primary (1st) telephone number. If successful, the system will wait two minutes and try the alternate (Alt) telephone number. This sequence will be repeated until one of the two numbers is reached.

If you want the ECC/WCC II system to report the alarm to both telephone numbers, select “Yes” at this location.

Since this is a choice fi eld, press the <space bar> until the desired choice appears and then press <Enter>.

Satellite alarm (“SOS”) Counter: 10

Due to a wide variety of communication error possibilities such as communication loop wire gauge, loop length, number of satellite controllers on-line, improperly grounded or missing loop shield, and induction or high voltage interference, a false “SOS” (Satellite-Out-Of-Service) alarm may be generated. To avoid false alarms, it may be necessary to instruct the ECC/WCC II to receive several “Sat Failure” messages before it issues an “SOS” alarm. This can be accomplished by entering a number from 0 to 255 in this section. In the example screen, we have instructed the ECC/WCC

SYSTEM PARAMETER II SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

System Parameters II

Disable local print out: YesDisable Satellite Alarm: No

Dial both phone numbers for alarm type 1: NO “ 2: NO “ 3: NO “ 4: NO “ 5: NO

Satellite alarm (“SOS”) Counter: 10Disable Energy consumption print out: NOClear disk-write-error fl ag: NoTime delay for screen blank: 5 minutes-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

II to report an “SOS” alarm if it has received 10 “Satellite Failure” messages in a row.

If the user does not specify a number in this section, the ECC/WCC II will report an “SOS” alarm after one “Satellite Failure” message. We have found that our method of determining whether a satellite is still communicating is too sensitive, and we recommend a number between 5 and 10 for most systems if problems of this type are encountered.

Disable Energy Consumption print out: NO

If the system is using one or more of the 10 Energy Consumption Screens, the accumulated data will automatically be printed once an hour. If you do not want the ECC/WCC II to print this energy consumption report each hour, enter a “NO” in this section. Pressing the <space bar> will change the value from YES to NO. Pressing <Enter> when the desired value is displayed will enter that choice. “YES” is assumed by the system unless instructed otherwise.

Clear disk-write-error fl ag: NO

If the ECC/WCC II cannot write a fi le to disk because there is not enough space left on the disk, a “disk-write-error” message will appear on the Main Menu Screen. To clear the message, select “Yes” as the choice for this fi eld.

Time delay for screen blank: 5 minutes

If the system does not detect any keyboard activity for this amount of time, the screen will go blank. The screen is restored by pressing the <space bar>.

General

The data pattern tables for the satellite controllers need to be rebuilt whenever one or more of the following events occur:

A new ECC/WCC II system is installed.New software is installed in ECC/WCC II CPU or the satellite controller.New hardware is installed in the system (i.e. new satellite controllers, new communication board in the CPU, new communication board in the satellite controller, etc.)

For a new system, or for new satellite controllers installed in an existing system, the tables should be (re)built before the programming data is entered.

Before a value is displayed on the screen, the system checks to see where the decimal point should go. The pattern is called the “Data Pattern.” In the ECC/WCC II system, there are four data patterns allowed. They are “x,xxx”, “xxx.x”, “xx.xx”, and “x.xxx.” (The x’s are used to denote numeric values, and are not to be taken literally.) Additionally, rebuilding the data tables insures that the proper units of measure, ON/OFF, and alarm messages will be displayed with its associated number.

Save Table before Exit: Yes

After the data tables are rebuilt, the data tables should be saved on the data disk.

To save the data pattern tables to disk, place the cursor above this input and press the <space bar> until “Yes” appears. Then press <Enter>. The data will be saved when you press <Home> to exit from this screen.

1.2.

3.

Satellite number: 0

This entry allows you to designate the number of the satellite controller which will have its tables rebuilt. Entering 251 will cause the system to rebuild the tables for the Global Analog Screens.

To insure proper rebuilding of tables, we recommend pressing the 0 (zero) to allow the system to rebuild data tables for all of the satellite controllers and the Global Analog Screens. The satellite controller number will fl ash at the bottom of the screen for an instant. If the system “fi nds” the satellite controller, the bottom of the screen will be blank for a few seconds. If the system does not fi nd the satellite controller, the next satellite number will appear (if zero is entered).

Notes:

REBUILD SATELLITE TABLE SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Rebuild Satellite Table

Enter 0 to rebuild whole table for all satellites.Enter satellite number 1 to 250 to rebuild part of the table.Enter 251 to rebuild table for global analog.

Satellite number: 0 Save Table before exit: NO-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

General

The Search and Override Screen allows you to select an occupied, unoccupied, or automatic mode of control for a zone by simply entering the room number (or room description) and then selecting the new control option you would like. The most common application for this feature is controlling the occupied/unoccupied schedule for individual hotel rooms.

<Ctrl T> Update Description List

When you access this screen for the fi rst time, the ECC/WCC II system will automatically go through a process of searching for each satellite controller on the loop and storing the data from the “Description” input on the EA Driver, Dual Limit and Time Clock Screens. If you make any changes to the “Descriptions” after that, you need to manually force the system to search the satellites again by moving the cursor to the “Home” position on the Search and Override Screen and pressing <Ctrl> and then <T>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

A message will appear at the bottom of the screen asking which satellite is to be rebuilt. Input the satellite number and press <Enter>.

Note: Rebuilding tables for Search Screens is an entirely different function than rebuilding data tables from the Utility Screen.

String to Match: Rm 200

The “String to match” is the “Description” that you have previously input on an EA Driver, Dual Limit or Time Clock Screen. The system will distinguish between small and capital letters, so you need to remember exactly how the “Description” was set up.

If the user has “Level 0” access, the ECC/WCC II will fi nd and display descriptions that start with the “~” character only. If the user has “Level 1” access, the ECC/WCC II will fi nd and display descriptions that start with either the “~” character or the “^” character. All of the descriptions will be matched if the user has “Level 2” or “Level 3” access.

If you have a level 2 or 3 password, and you do not remember the exact “Description” for the zones, you can enter an asterisk (*) as a wild card, and all of the descriptions will appear. Or, if you know that all rooms start with “Rm,” you can enter Rm, and all of the descriptions that have Rm in them will appear.

The fi rst twenty zones will appear on the screen. If more than twenty zones match the description, use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to the area on the screen where the zones are displayed and press <PgDn>.

Continue Present Search: NO

You can eliminate the unwanted zones on the screen by moving the cursor to “Continue Present Search,” pressing the <space bar> until “Yes” appears, and then pressing <Enter>. Now move the cursor to “String to Match” and enter the rest of the description that you want to match.

Execute State Change: Yes

After you have located the zone that you want to override, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (>) to left of that zone. Then press the <space bar>, and you should see either an O, N, or A appear under the “New State” heading. If you select an O, the zone will be forced to the “Occupied” mode. If you press the <space bar> again, an N will appear for “Non-Occupied.” Press the <space bar> one more time, and an A will appear for “Automatic.” After the desired choice appears on the screen, press <Enter> and the cursor will move up to the “Execute State Change” fi eld. If you have made all of the changes that are required, press the <space bar> until “Yes” appears, and then press <Enter>.

SEARCH AND OVERRIDE SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Search and Override

String to Match: Rm 200 Continue present search: NOExecute state change: NO

Description Current state New State Logical AddressRm 200 Auto 0 7k1h-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




The messages under the “Current State” heading will refl ect the changes.

Unoccupied: If you force the zone to the unoccupied mode, the system will put a zero (always OFF) in the “Schedule Selected by” input on the Control Output Screen for that zone.

Occupied: If you force the zone to the occupied mode, the system will insert a 1 (always ON) in the “Schedule Selected by” input on the Control Output Screen for that zone.

Automatic: If you select automatic, the system will restore the input in the “Schedule Selected by” fi eld of the Control Output Screen to its normal schedule (i.e. W1).

Logical Address: 7k1h

The logical address of the control output for the zone in question is shown here in the form of 7k1h.

7 => The satellite number (1-250).k => Control Output (always k).1 => Satellite Controller Channel (1-8).h => The load is connected to either the COM & H or COM & C terminals on the satellite (h or c).

“7k1h” means that the piece of equipment serving the zone in question is connected to the COM and H terminals on channel number 1 of satellite controller #7.

Point Description Search

This feature allows you to fi nd and access a “point” within the ECC/WCC II system by entering the words that have previously been input in the “Description” fi eld on one or more of the following screens:

Analog InputControl Output Time Clock Mode Dual Limit Mode EA Driver ModeAnalog OutputLogic SwitchTUC

In other words, if you want to fi nd the Analog Input Screen for the outdoor air temperature sensor, and you know the description has been entered as “OA Temp,” you can fi nd the screen by simply entering “OA Temp.”

<Ctrl T> Update Description List

When you access this screen for the fi rst time, it will automatically go through a process of searching for each satellite controller and storing the data from the “Description” input on the screens listed above. If you make any changes to the “Descriptions” after the

list has been generated, you need to manually force the system to search the satellites again by moving the cursor to the “Home” position on the Point Description Search Screen and pressing the <Ctrl> and then <T>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

A message will appear at the bottom of the screen asking which satellite is to be rebuilt. Input the number of the satellite and press <Enter>.

Note: Rebuilding tables for Search Screens is an entirely different function than rebuilding data tables from the Utility Screen.

String to Match: Rm 101

The “String to match” is the “Description” that has previously been entered on one or more of the satellite screens. The system will distinguish between small and capital letters, so you need to remember exactly how the “Description” was entered.

If you do not remember the exact “Descriptions,” you can enter an asterisk (*) as a wild card, and all of the descriptions will appear.

POINT DESCRIPTION SEARCH SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

Point Description Search String to Match: Rm Continue Present Search: No

Logical Address Description Current Status

1: 1A1 Rm101 Temp 76.2 2: 1A2 Rm102 Temp 73.2 3: 1A3 Rm103 Temp 75.2 4: 1k1h Rm101 VAV -->Cool 5: 1k2h Rm101 Heat Ht Off 6: 1k2c Rm101 Fan Fan Off 7: 1k3h Rm102 VAV -->Warm 8: 1k4h Rm102 Heat Ht On 9: 1k4c Rm102 Fan Fan On 10: 1k5h Rm103 VAV -->Cool 11: 1k6h Rm103 Heat Ht Off 12: 1k6c Rm103 Fan Fan Off

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The fi rst twenty zones will appear on the screen. If more than twenty zones match the description, use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to the area on the screen where the zones are displayed and press <PgDn>.



Screen Access

After you have found the “point” you are looking for, you can access its screen by simply using the arrow keys to position the cursor (>) at the left of the point you want to access and pressing <Enter>.

Notes:

Logical Address Search

This feature allows you to trace a “logical address” and fi nd where it is used within the ECC/WCC II system. A “logical address” is an analog input, binary input, analog output, binary output, week schedule, optimal start, global analog, or global binary.

For example, if you want to change week schedule #1 (W1) you can use this feature to fi nd all of the screens that use W1, so you don’t accidentally change the schedule for more zones than you intended to.

<Ctrl T> Update Table

When you access this screen for the fi rst time, it will automatically go through a process of searching for each satellite controller on the loop and storing the required information in a data table. If you make any changes to the system after the tables have been built, you need to manually force the system to search the satellites again by moving the cursor to the “Home” position on the Logical Address Search Screen and pressing <Ctrl> and then <T>, holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys at the same time.

A message will appear at the bottom of the screen asking which satellite is to be rebuilt. Input the number of the satellite and press <Enter>.

Note: Rebuilding tables for Search Screens is an entirely different function from rebuilding data tables from the Utility Screen.

Rebuild Global Table: Yes

The global tables must be rebuilt after changes to one or more of the following screens:

Optimal Start Screens Duty Cycle ScreensGlobal Analog Screens Proportional Reset ScreensGlobal Binary Screens Shed/Restore Screens

Logical Address to Match: W1

The “name” of the “logical address” you want to trace is input in this fi eld. For example, if you want to trace analog input #3 on satellite controller #2, you input 2A3. This fi eld is upper and lower case sensitive, so you must use capital letters when you input the names.

Logical

Address

Input Form

(Name)

Comment

Analog Inputs 2A3 Analog input #3 on Satellite #2Binary Inputs 4L2 Binary input #2 on Satellite #4Analog Outputs 7P6 Analog Output #6 on Satellite #7Binary Outputs 3K1c COM to C contact on channel #1

of Satellite controller #3Optimal Start S12 Optimal Start #12Global Analog GA3 Global Analog #3Global Binary GB27 Global Binary #27

LOGICAL ADDRESS SEARCH SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-


Logical Address to Match: W1 Continue Present Search: NORebuild global table: No

Logical Address Location1: W1 1A12: W1 1A43: W1 1A74: W1 1k3h5: W1 GB16: W1 GB127: W1 S1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Location:

The screen(s) which contain the “logical address” as one of their inputs is displayed under the “Location” heading. The following designations are used for the various screens.

Logical Address Input

Form

(Name)

Comment

Analog Inputs 2A3 Analog input #3 on Satellite #2Binary Inputs 4L2 Binary input #2 on Satellite #4Analog Outputs 7P6 Analog Output #6 on Satellite #7Binary Outputs 3K1c COM to C contact on channel #1 of

Satellite controller #3Trend Logs

Analog Trend 4T3a Analog Trend #3 on Satellite #4Change of State 6T2c Change of State #2 on Satellite #6Run Time 3T8r Run Time #8 on Satellite #3Analog Peak 7T5p Analog Peak #5 on Satellite #7

Optimal Start S12 Optimal Start #12Global Analog GA3 Global Analog #3Global Binary GB27 Global Binary #27Shed/Restore SR5 Shed Restore Screen #5Duty Cycle DU2 Duty Cycle Screen #2Proportional PROP1 Proportional Reset Screen #1

The fi rst twenty addresses will appear on the screen. If more than twenty addresses match the description, use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to the area on the screen where the addresses are displayed and press <PgDn>.



Screen Access

You can access the screen which uses the “logical address” by using the arrow keys to position the cursor (>) at the left of the desired point and pressing <Enter>.

General

The Enhanced Color Graphics feature allows the ECC/WCC II to capture color graphics screens that have been created using PC Paintbrush, AutoCad, or one of many other graphics packages on the market today. The actual dynamic value of points within the ECC/WCC II system can then be placed on these screens. Up to 60 screens can be created, and up to 100 points (temperatures, ON/OFF status, etc.) can be placed on the screen.

The Enhanced Graphics feature is optional and is available at an additional cost. The following items are required for the Enhanced Color Graphics feature to function:

* Hard Disk system* An Enhanced Graphics Adapter (EGA) card and monitor* Color graphics software (such as PC Paintbrush)* Software key from WattMaster* “Capture” software from WattMaster

We recommend using PC Paintbrush as the graphics package to create the images to be used as the static background on the Enhanced Graphics Screen. A “mouse” is highly recommended to simplify creating the drawings. The ECC/WCC II front end computer can be used along with PC Paintbrush to create the drawings; however, to do this you must exit out of the ECC/WCC II program, and therefore, the satellite controllers will be operating in local set. Therefore, it is better to create the background drawings on another computer if one is available.

Use the following procedure to capture an Enhanced Graphics drawing within the ECC/WCC II.

Step #1: After you have created a drawing using PC Paintbrush or other drawing package, you need to save it on a data disk, using any fi le name as long as you remember what it is, and then exit out of the drawing program to DOS.

ENHANCED GRAPHICS SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Enhanced Graphics Screen

1. AHU1 21. 41. 2. 22. 42. 3. 23. 43. 4. 24. 44. 5. 25. 45. 6. 26. 46. 7. 27. 47. 8. 28. 48. 9. 29. 49. 10. 30. 50. 11. 31. 51. 12. 32. 52. 13. 33. 53. 14. 34. 54. 15. 35. 55. 16. 36. 56. 17. 37. 57. 18. 38. 58. 19. 39. 59. 20. 40. 60.

Press <Enter> to enter screen show mode. While in screen show mode, press <Enter> to enter address edit mode, or press <Ctrl U> to toggle updating. While in edit mode, <Ctrl F> to fi nd location of existing address, <Ctrl D> to delete the existing address of current location.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step #2: Now you must resave, or capture, the drawing in a form that the ECC/WCC II system can interface with. To do this, you must fi rst load a fi le named “Capture” which is sent from WattMaster on a separate fl oppy disk when the color graphics option is purchased.

Step #3: Then, with “Capture” present in the background, reload the drawing package and get the image on the screen that you would like to save.

Step #4: Press and hold <Alt> and <L Shift>, then press the <[> key, holding all three keys down at the same time, and then release all of the keys at once. (The <L Shift> is the shift key on the left side of the keyboard.)

NOTE: <Num Lock>, <Caps Lock>, and <Scroll Lock> must be disabled for the capture routine to work.

Step #5: This “imageXX.img” fi le is the picture that will be the static background for the Enhanced Graphics Screen. This fi le needs to be copied (and renamed, if desired) to the same directory or subdirectory as the ECC/WCC II software. The ECC/WCC II software is sent from the factory on the root directory of the hard disk. If your “imageXX.img” fi le was created on the root directory of the hard disk in the ECC/WCC II system, the fi le is in the proper place. If it was created on another computer and saved on a fl oppy disk, the fi le can be copied to the hard disk using the following commands:

Commands to transfer a fi le to the ECC/WCC II hard disk:

Step #1: Insert the disk that contains the “imageXX.img” fi les in Drive A of the ECC/WCC II computer and close the drive door.

Step #2: From the ECC/WCC II Main Menu, access the System Parameters Screen and sign on with a level 3 password. Then return to the Main Menu.

Step #3: From the Main Menu, go to the Utility Screen and then go to the WCC/SCC File Management Screen.

Step #4: Fill out the screen to copy a fi le from disk A to disk C. In the following example, we are copying a fi le named “image01.img” from the disk in drive A to a fi le called “ahu1.img” on the disk in drive C. The “ahu1” can be anything up to 8 characters that helps you identify each particular drawing.

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:image01.img

New fi le name: c:ahul.img

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:image01.img

Type the name of the fi le that is to be copied and press <Enter>. The “a:” specifi es the drive which has the disk with the fi le to be copied. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

New fi le name: c:ahu1.img

Type the new fi le name and press <Enter>. The “c:” specifi es the drive which has the disk which will receive the fi le. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

Direction: WCC

The direction category allows you to specify where the fi le management operation is to be performed. The following choices are available:

SCC ->WCC This option can be performed at the remote (SCC II) computer only. The fi le to be copied is at the remote computer (SCC II), and the new fi le will be written on the disk at the on site computer (WCC II).

WCC This choice can be selected for two different situations. If you are at the remote computer, you may select WCC and copy an existing fi le at the on-site computer to a new fi le at the on-site computer. Or this choice is selected if you want to perform a copy command while you are physically at the on-site computer.

Step #5: After the fi le has been transferred, press <Home> several times until the cursor is back at the Utility Screen.

After the “imageXX.img” fi le has been renamed and located in the proper place on the hard disk of the ECC/WCC II, use the following procedure to cause the ECC/WCC II to read the fi le from the Enhanced Color Graphics Screen.

Step #1: Place the cursor above “*Enhanced Color Graphics” and press <Enter>. Place the cursor to the right of the screen number that is to house this image and type the fi le name without the “img” extension. Then press <Enter>. In our example, the word “AHU1” would be entered.

Step #2: Press <Home> several times until the cursor is back on the Main Menu. Then access the Enhanced Color Graphics Screen again. This forces the system to read the fi le from the disk.

Note: To remove an Enhanced Color Graphics Screen, move the cursor to the Enhanced Graphics Summary Screen and place the cursor over the title of the drawing that is to be removed. Then press the <space bar> and press <Enter>. The image will still be on the disk, but it will not be “seen” by the ECC/WCC II system. If you want it to reappear, move the cursor to the right of the desired screen number and type in the name of the image fi le.

Place Points on the Enhanced Graphics Screen

To place ECC/WCC II points on the Enhanced Graphics Screen, fi rst display the desired Enhanced Graphics image on the screen. Wait for the cursor to appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen, and then press <Enter> once to allow you to use the arrow keys to move the cursor. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes (////) will appear on the screen. Then, type the point designation and press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from satellite #2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and the point value will appear on the screen.

Delete a Point Address on the Enhanced Graphics Screen

To delete a point on the Enhanced Graphics Screen, fi rst you must have the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed on the screen. To simplify fi nding this location, you can cause the cursor to move to the exact position where the point was created by pressing <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously. You may delete the point by pressing <Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously and then pressing <Enter>. The four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice. Then re-access the screen.

<Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating

The values of the points on the Enhanced Color Graphics Screen are “dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and while the Enhanced Graphics Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and again.

General

The Custom Screen allows the ECC/WCC II system to capture a Custom text or graphics screen and have actual dynamic values from points within the ECC/WCC II system on these screens. Up to 60 screens can be created, and up to 100 points (temperatures, ON/OFF status etc.) can be placed on the screen.

This feature is available as part of the standard software package; however, a hard disk is required for it to function. Custom screens will work with either a monochrome or color screen (CGA, EGA or PS2 VGA).

There are several screen editing software packages available. We recommend using ANSI of LA (AoLA). AoLA allows you to create both text and graphics for use as the static background of the Custom Screen in the ECC/WCC II system. Graphics packages such as PC Paintbrush, AutoCad, etc. cannot be used as a Custom Screen.

After you have created a screen using AoLA, you must save the screen from AoLA using the following procedure:

<Alt> <S> Save a Screen File

A message will then be displayed asking for the fi lename. The fi lename must be given a “TXT” extension.

Filename: sample.txt <Enter>

A message will then be displayed asking for the fi le type. Press <D> to select the “Dump” fi le to disk.

File type: D <Enter>

This screen will be the static background for the Custom Screen. This fi le needs to be copied to the same directory or sub-directory as the ECC/WCC II software. The ECC/WCC II software is sent from the factory on the root directory of the hard disk. If your AoLA fi le was created on the root directory of the hard disk of

CUSTOM SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Custom Screens 1. 21. 41. 2. 22. 42. 3. 23. 43. 4. 24. 44. 5. 25. 45. 6. 26. 46. 7. 27. 47. 8. 28. 48. 9. 29. 49. 10. 30. 50. 11. 31. 51. 12. 32. 52. 13. 33. 53. 14. 34. 54. 15. 35. 55. 16. 36. 56. 17. 37. 57. 18. 38. 58. 19. 39. 59. 20. 40. 60.

Press <Enter> to enter screen show mode. While in screen show mode, press <Enter> to enter address edit mode, or press <Ctrl U> to toggle updating. While in edit mode, <Ctrl F> to fi nd location of existing address, <Ctrl D> to delete the existing address of current location. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

the ECC/WCC II system, the fi le is in the proper place. If it was created on another computer and saved on a fl oppy disk, the fi le can be copied to the hard disk using the following procedure:

Step #1: Insert the disk that has the AoLA fi les in drive A and close the drive door.

Step #2: From the ECC/WCC II Main Menu, access the System Parameters I Screen and sign on with a level 3 password. Then return to the Main Menu.

Step #3: From the Main Menu, go to the Utility Screen; then go to the WCC/SCC File Management Screen.

Step #4: Fill out the screen to copy a fi le from disk A to disk C. In the following example, we are copying a fi le named “sample.txt” from the disk in drive A to the disk in drive C.

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:sample.txt

New fi le name: c:sample.txt

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:sample.txt

Type the name of the fi le that is to be copied and press <Enter>. The “a:” specifi es the drive that has the disk with the fi le to be copied. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

New fi le name: c:sample.txt

Type the new fi le name and press <Enter>. The “c:” specifi es the drive which has the disk which will receive the fi le. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

Direction: WCC


SCC ->WCC This option can be performed at the remote (SCC II) computer only. The fi le to be copied is at the remote computer (SCC II), and the new fi le will be written on the disk at the on site computer (WCC II).


After the AoLA fi le has been renamed and located in the proper place on the hard disk of the ECC/WCC II, use the following procedure to cause the ECC/WCC II to read the fi le from the Custom Screen.

Step #1: After the fi le has been transferred, press <Home> several times until the cursor is back at the Utility Screen. Then place the cursor above Custom Screens and press <Enter>.

Step #2: Type the name of the fi le without the “txt” extension and press <Enter>. In our example, the word “sample” would be entered.

Step #3: Press <Home> several times until the cursor is back on the Main Menu. Then access the Custom Screen again. This forces the system to read the fi le from the disk.

The AoLA image will now appear as the Custom Screen on the ECC/WCC II system. You can place the values of points within the ECC/WCC II system on the screen. In other words, you can place an analog value such as temperature or pressure or a binary value such as fan status on the screen. Up to 100 values may be placed on the screen.

<Ctrl-U> Toggle Updating

The values of the ECC/WCC II points on the Custom Screen are “dynamic.” That is, the values on the screen will change as the value of the point changes. However, you have the option of “freezing” the points at their present value by pressing <Ctrl> and while the Custom Screen is displayed on the monitor. To return to “live” data, press <Ctrl> and again.

Place Points on the Custom Screen

To place points on the Custom Screen, fi rst access the Custom Screen showing the AoLA image. Pressing <Enter> once allows you to move the cursor by using the arrow keys. When the cursor is at the place where you want the point value to be displayed, press <Enter> again, and the four slashes (////) will appear on the screen. Then type the point designation and press <Enter>. For example, if you want the value from satellite #2 analog input #4, enter 2A4. Then press <Home>, and the point value will appear on the screen.

Delete a Point Address on the Custom Screen

To delete a point on the Custom Screen, fi rst you must have the cursor in the exact location it was when the point was placed on the screen. To simplify fi nding this location, you may move the cursor near the existing point and then press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously to cause the cursor to move to the exact position where the point was created. You may delete the point by pressing <Ctrl> and <D> simultaneously, and then pressing <Enter>. The four slashes (////) will then appear. You may enter a new point, or to remove the slashes, leave the screen by pressing <Home> twice, and then re-access the screen.

Notes:

If your ECC/WCC II system has a color monitor, you can use this feature to select the screen colors for the normal display, cursor display, highlight display, and alarm display. You can select both the background and foreground colors.

To select another color, place the cursor over the word “color” associated with the chosen category, and press the <space bar>. The color of the word “color” will change each time you press the <space bar>. When the desired color appears, press <Enter>.

The background color is selected in the same manner. To select the background color, press one time and then press the <space bar> with the cursor over the word “color” in the desired category. The color of the background will change each time you press the <space bar>. When the desired color appears, press <Enter>. If you want to change the foreground again, press <F> once.

SET MONITOR COLOR SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Color Setting Screen

Normal Display colorCursor Display colorHighlight Display colorAlarm Display color

Color setting default to ForegroundPress for setting Background colorPress <F> for setting Foreground color-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




The Tenant Override Screen allows the occupants in the building to call the ECC/WCC II system on the telephone and cause the lights and/or heating and/or cooling equipment to control according to their occupied (daytime) control scheme.The system has the capability of overriding the control for 500 zones.

The ECC/WCC II system will “talk” to the tenant using an artifi cial voice. The computer will prompt the user as follows:

Hello, this is your WattMaster building control’s computer.

Please enter your access code.

[The user will enter the 5 digit password for his or her zone using the numbers on the telephone.]

Access code accepted.

Please enter your personal code.

[The user will enter his or her 4 digit personal code using the numbers on the telephone.]

Personal code accepted.

Place your control option now. Enter 1 for yes, 0 for no.

Do you want lights?

[The user will touch 1 if he or she wants to turn the lights on or 0 if lights are not required.]

TENANT OVERRIDE SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tenant Utility List 1

Offi ce Description: [Room 101]Access Code: [12345]Tenant Name: [Bill Jones] Personal Code: [3456]

The equipment addressed by the following outputs will be overridden:

Remaining Override TimeGL Light Group: [1k7c] [1k2h] [1k4h] //// //// hr:mnGH Heat Group: [1k3h] //// //// //// //// hr:mnGC A/C Group: [1k5h] [1k6h] //// //// //// hr:mn

Alt-R for Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

TENANT OVERRIDE REPORT

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tenant number: 001 Month: [Jul.] Option: [Total]

Name Equipment Start End Elapsed Time Total

Bill Jones Light 8:00 Heat 0:00 A/C 6:00-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Do you want heating?

[The user will touch 1 if he or she wants to cause the heat to be controlled according to the occupied (daytime) setpoints or 0 if heat is not required.]

Do you want air conditioning?

[The user will touch 1 if he or she wants to cause the heat to be controlled according to the occupied (daytime) setpoints or 0 if cooling is not required.]

Please enter the number of hours, or 0 to reset.

[The user will touch one number for the amount of override time in hours required. Entering 0 will stop the override for the equipment group selected.]

Goodbye.

The ECC/WCC II system has 500 screens like the one shown below which allows the user to enter password information and also to designate the outputs which are to be overridden for the lights, heat, and A/C categories.

Tenant Utility List 1

This is automatically displayed by the ECC/WCC II system. 500 Utility Lists (or screens) are available.

Offi ce Description:

The user may enter a description of the offi ce to help in remembering which zone is controlled by which override screen.

Access Code:

This 5 digit number must be entered by the occupant when the ECC/WCC II voice asks for the password.

Tenant Name:

A tenant description is entered here to help identify the tenant area assigned to this screen.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Tenant Utility List 1

Offi ce Description: [Room 101]Access Code: [12345]Tenant Name: [Bill Jones] Personal Code: [3456]

The equipment addressed by the following outputs will be overridden: Remaining Override TimeGL Light Group: [1k7c] [1k2h] [1k4h] //// //// hr:mnGH Heat Group: [1k3h] //// //// //// //// hr:mnGC A/C Group: [1k5h] [1k6h] //// //// //// hr:mn

Alt-R for Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Personal Code:

The 4 digit number assigned to each tenant must be entered by pressing the numbers on the telephone after the ECC/WCC II voice prompts the tenant for the personal code.

The equipment addressed by the following outputs will be overridden:

Remaining Override Time

GL Light Group: [1k7c] [1k2h] [1k4h] //// //// hr:mn

GH Heat Group: [1k3h] //// //// //// //// hr:mn

GC A/C Group: [1k5h] [1k6h] //// //// //// hr:mn

The operator assigns the outputs which are to be overridden by entering data on this part of the screen.

In the above example, the following binary outputs on the satellite controller will go “On” to turn the lights on when the tenant asks for lights:

1k7c - Satellite number 1, COM to C contact on channel 71k2h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 21k4h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 4

When the tenant asks for heat, the following outputs will control according to their occupied mode setpoints. For example, assume that the satellite controller is set to maintain 72ºF during the day (occupied period), and 65ºF during the night (unoccupied period). If a tenant comes in at 8:00 pm in the evening when the setpoint is 65ºF, and that tenant calls the ECC/WCC II system and asks for the heat to be overridden, the heating setpoint will be changed to 72ºF.

1k3h - Satellite number 1, COM to H contact on channel 3

The cooling (A/C) override is similar to the heating override.

Caution: Do not enter the same output contact on two or more separate Telephone Override Screens. Use the “global” feature if several zones (offi ces) require the same piece of central equipment to be overridden.

Global OverrideEach category of equipment on each screen has a separate global value which automatically goes ON when that category is overridden ON.

Tenant Override Screen #1

GL1 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON GH1 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON GC1 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON

Tenant Override Screen #2

GL2 goes ON when the lights are overridden ON GH2 goes ON when the heat is overridden ON GC2 goes ON when the cooling is overridden ON

These global values are then used as inputs in a Global Binary Screen.

In the above example, assume that air handler #1 (AHU #1) is ON whenever global binary GB1 is ON.

AHU #1 provides the cooling for the offi ces for the occupants listed on Tenant Override Screens 1, 2, and 3. When the cooling is overridden from a tenant listed on screen #1, GC1 will go ON, causing GB1 to ON, which in turn causes AHU #1 to go on. When the cooling category is requested from a tenant listed on screen 2, GC2 goes ON, which will also cause AHU #1 to go ON.

Remaining Override Time

The amount of override time remaining will be displayed here in an hour and minute format. When the override is not active, this portion of the screen will be blank.

Alt-R for Report

The amount of time the tenants use the override is recorded by the ECC/WCC II system and can be displayed by pressing <Alt> and <R>. The following screen will appear:

Binary Global Screen - Combinatorial Mode

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BINARY Global #: 1 name is GB 1

Description: AHU #1 On Message #: 1 ONMode: Combinatorial Off Message #: 2 OFF

Value is ON when ANY of the following conditions are met.

W1 is ON default true GC1 is ON default false GC2 is ON default false GC3 is ON default false Local set this global defaults to ON

----------------------------ALARM------------------------------ Set Condition: None Type: 0 Message 0

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tenant Override Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Tenant number: 001 Month: [Jul.] Option: [Total]

Name Equipment Start End Elapsed Time Total

Bill Light 8:00 Heat 0:00 A/C 6:00-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tenant Number:

This is automatically displayed by the ECC/WCC II system. There are 500 report screens.

Option:

The user can select how the information is to be displayed on the screen.

CHOICES: <Lights, Heat, A/C, All, Total.

Since this is a choice fi eld, pressing the <space bar> will cause the next choice to appear, and pressing <Enter> will select that category.

The following screen is an example of selecting “Lights” as the display option:

The following screen is an example of selecting “All” as the display option:

The following screen is an example of selecting “Total” as the display option:

Note: Two dedicated telephone lines are needed at the ECC/WCC II computer—one line for the remote/reset and call-out on alarm features and the other line for the telephone override option.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Tenant number: 001 Month: [Jul.] Option: [Lights]

Name Equipment Start End Elapsed Time Total Bill Jones Light 7/3 9:03 7/3 17:03 8:00 Light 8/1 14:27 8/1 18:27 4:00-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Tenant number: 001 Month: [Jul.] Option: [All]

Name Equipment Start End Elapsed Time Total Bill Jones Light 7/3 9:03 7/3 17:03 8:00 Light 8/1 14:27 8/1 18:27 4:00 Heat 12/5 12:23 12/5 14:23 2:00 A/C 7/3 9:03 7/3 17:03 8:00 A/C 8/1 14:27 8/1 18:27 4:00-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Tenant number: 001 Month: [Jul.] Option: [Total]

Name Equipment Start End Elapsed Time Total Bill Light 12:00 Heat 2:00 A/C 12:00

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Operator Message Screen allows you to leave messages for fellow employees or for people who might be calling the system from a remote computer. If a message has been entered on this screen, the word “Message!” will appear on the Main Menu.

To enter a message, simply type the message and press <Enter> after each line.

To delete a message, move the cursor to the line that is to be deleted and press <Ctrl> and <Home> simultaneously. Each individual line must be deleted separately. After all of the messages have been deleted, the word “Message” on the Main Menu will disappear.

MESSAGE SCREEN----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Operator Message 13:20 11/10

Joe, change the belts and fi lters on AHU #1

Bill, leave compressor #3 & 4 on AHU #5 off, they are low on refrigerant

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The File Management Screen allows you to perform the following operations using the on-site computer (WCC II) without exiting the system or using the remote computer (SCC II):

* copy * rename * delete * type * directory

COPY

To copy a fi le, you need to know the present fi le name and the new fi le name. In the following example, we are copying a fi le named “sample.dat” from the disk in drive A to the disk in drive C.

You can transfer several fi les at once, yet keep the same fi le names. For example, if you want to copy all of the data fi les from the local computer to the remote computer, the fi le name would be *.dat, the new fi le name would be *.*, and the direction would be WCC->SCC.

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:sample.dat

New fi le name: c:sample.dat

Direction: WCC

Action: Copy

---------------------------------------------

File name: a:sample.dat

Type the name of the fi le that is to be copied and press <Enter>. The [a:] specifi es the drive that has the disk with the fi le to be copied. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

New fi le name: c:sample.dat

Type the new fi le name and press <Enter>. The [c:] specifi es the drive which has the disk that will receive the fi le. If this is omitted, the system assumes the default drive.

Direction: WCC


WCC->SCC This option can be performed at the remote (SCC II) computer only. The fi le to be copied is at the on-site computer (WCC II), and the new fi le will be written on the disk at the remote computer (SCC II).

SCC->WCC This option can be performed at the remote (SCC II) computer only. The fi le to be copied is at the remote computer (SCC II), and the new fi le will be written on the disk at the on-site computer (WCC II).


SCC This choice is selected if you want to copy an existing fi le at the remote computer to a new fi le at the remote computer while you are physically at the remote computer.

WCC/SCC FILE MANAGEMENT SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WCC/SCC File Management Screen

File name:

New fi le name:

Direction: SCC --> WCC

Action: Copy-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

RENAME

To rename a fi le, you need to know the present fi le name and the new fi le name. In the following example, we are renaming a fi le that is presently named “oldname.dat” and renaming it to new fi le named “newname.dat.”

---------------------------------------------

File name: oldname.dat

New fi le name: newname.dat

Direction: WCC

Action: Rename

---------------------------------------------

File name: oldname.dat

Type the name of the fi le that is to be renamed and press <Enter>.

New fi le name: new.dat

Type the new fi le name and press <Enter>.

Direction: WCC


WCC This choice can be selected for two different situations. If you are at the remote computer, you may select WCC and rename an existing fi le in the on-site computer, or select this choice if you want to rename a fi le in the on-site computer while you are physically at the on-site computer.

SCC This choice is selected if you want to rename a fi le in the remote computer while you are physically at the remote computer.

Action: Rename

After you have entered the data on the screen, press the <space bar> until “Rename” appears, and then press <Enter>. The fi le should then be renamed.

DELETE

To delete a fi le, you need to know the name of the fi le you want to delete. In the following example, we are deleting a fi le named “bad.dat.”

---------------------------------------------

File name: bad.dat

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC

Action: Delete

---------------------------------------------

File name: bad.dat

Type the name of the fi le that is to be deleted and press <Enter>.

New fi le name:

This fi eld is left blank in this situation.

Direction: WCC


WCC This choice can be selected for two different situations. If you are at the remote computer, you may select WCC and delete an existing fi le in the on-site computer, or select this choice if you want to delete a fi le at the on-site computer while you are physically at the on-site computer.

SCC This choice is selected if you want to delete a fi le in the remote computer while you are physically at the remote computer.

DIRECTORY

If you want to view the names of fi les that are saved on the disk, you can perform the directory function. To view the fi le names, you need to know the name of the fi le(s). In the following example, we will view all of the data fi les (fi les with “dat” extensions).

---------------------------------------------

File name: *.dat

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC

Action: Directory

---------------------------------------------

File name: *.dat

Type the name of the fi le that is to be viewed and press <Enter>.

New fi le name:


Direction: WCC


WCC This choice can be selected for two different situations. If you are at the remote computer, you may select WCC and view fi le names in the on-site computer, or select this choice if you want to view the fi le names in the on-site computer while you are physically at the on-site computer.

SCC This choice is selected if you want to view the fi le names in the remote computer while you are physically at the remote computer.

TYPE

If you want to display the contents of a non-compiled fi le on the screen, the “type” command is used.

---------------------------------------------

File name: autoexec.bat

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC

Action: Type

---------------------------------------------

File name: autoexec.bat

Enter the name of the fi le that is to be typed and press <Enter>.

New fi le name:


Direction: WCC


WCC This choice is selected if you want to display the contents of the fi le in the on-site computer while you are physically at the on-site computer.

SCC This choice is selected if you want to display the contents of the fi le in the remote computer while you are physically at the remote computer.

Notes:

EXIT WCC II SYSTEMIf you want to exit from the ECC/WCC II system to DOS, place the cursor over “Exit WCC II System” and press <Enter>. To get the cursor over the “Exit WCC II System,” use the arrow keys to move the cursor to “WCC/SCC File Management” and then press the < → >. You must have Level 3 access to exit to DOS.

Notes:




TUC

GENERAL INFORMATIONA Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) is a remote mounted electronic controller which is generally used to control individual pressure dependent VAV fan powered boxes, VAV cooling only boxes, heat pumps, etc. If your ECC/WCC II system has TUC’s, a Sat II-A is required to allow the TUC’s to interface with the front end ECC/WCC II computer.

To set up a TUC, you must fi ll out a TUC Set-Up Screen along with an Analog Input Screen and EA Driver Screen.

The SAT II-A is seen as 4 satellite controllers with each satellite controller having up to eight TUC’s. For example, if you have a SAT II-A addressed #4, it will be seen as satellite controllers #4, 5, 6 and 7. TUC’s 1-8 will be seen through the screens for satellite #4, TUC’s 9-16 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #5, TUC’s 17-24 will be seen through the screens for satellite #6, and TUC’s 25-32 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #7.

For example, assume that the SAT II-A is named #4, and you would like to set up the screens for TUC #20. TUC #20 would be seen through Analog Input Screen #4, Control Output Screen #4, and TUC Set-Up Screen #4 on satellite #6.

ScreenSAT II-A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Base Number TUC1 TUC2 TUC3 TUC4 TUC5 TUC6 TUC7 TUC8

Base Number +1 TUC9 TUC10 TUC11 TUC12 TUC13 TUC14 TUC15 TUC16 Base Number +2 TUC17 TUC18 TUC19 TUC20 TUC21 TUC22 TUC23 TUC24

Base Number +3 TUC25 TUC26 TUC27 TUC28 TUC29 TUC30 TUC31 TUC 32




When SAT II controllers are used with the ECC/WCC system, the analog inputs for each SAT II controller are referred to as A1-A8, and the binary inputs are called L1-L16. Since one SAT II-A is viewed as 4 SAT II controllers, the analog and binary input values of a SAT II-A are seen as the analog and binary inputs of four SAT II controllers.

For example, if a SAT II-A is named #4, then it will appear as satellite numbers 4, 5, 6, and 7 on the ECC/WCC II System Screens. The table that follows shows how the TUC’s will appear to the ECC/WCC II system. For example, TUC #20 will be seen at the ECC/WCC II Operator Control Console as analog input number 4 (A4) and binary inputs L4 and L12 on satellite controller #6.

Satellite Number Analog

Input

BIN 1 BIN 2

TUC #1 SAT II-A Base Number A1 L1 L9TUC #2 SAT II-A Base Number A2 L2 L10TUC #3 SAT II-A Base Number A3 L3 L11TUC #4 SAT II-A Base Number A4 L4 L12TUC #5 SAT II-A Base Number A5 L5 L13TUC #6 SAT II-A Base Number A6 L6 L14TUC #7 SAT II-A Base Number A7 L7 L15TUC #8 SAT II-A Base Number A8 L8 L16

TUC #9 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A1 L1 L9TUC #10 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A2 L2 L10TUC #11 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A3 L3 L11TUC #12 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A4 L4 L12TUC #13 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A5 L5 L13TUC #14 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A6 L6 L14TUC #15 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A7 L7 L15TUC #16 SAT II-A Base Number +1 A8 L8 L16






The TUC is designed to use the same 2 or 3-wire, fl ush-mounted space temperature sensor that is used with the SAT II controllers. The space temperature sensor is wired directly to the TUC.

The Analog Input Screens are used to scale the values of the temperature sensors connected to the TUC’s. The TUC is limited to reading a temperature from 45 ºF to 96.2 ºF. Therefore, the scaling values on the Analog Input Screen need to be set up as follows:

Units @ 0% scale: 45.0 ºF @ full scale: 96.2 ºF

The other inputs on the Analog Input Screen are set up the same as for a SAT II controller.

TUC - ANALOG INPUT SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 ANALOG INPUT # 1

Description: RM101 Type: AnalogPattern for values associated with this input: xxx.xUnits @ 0% scale: 45.0 Deg F Units of Measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 96.2 Deg F Filter Time Constant: 8 seconds

----------------------ALARMS-----------------------Controlled by: W1 Limits Low HighAlarm Type: 1 On 65.0 80.0 Deg FAlarm Message #’s: Low 2 High 1 Off 50.0 100.0 Deg F

Alternate limits selected by: ........ On (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F Off (alt) 0.0 0.0 Deg F

Limit overlap time aftercontrol change: 20 Minutes Local set 55.0 90.0 Deg F

-----------------------BINARY SETPOINT------------------------- OFF Above 0.0 Deg F On Message #: 0 OFF Below 0.0 Deg F Off Message #: 0

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

General

The ECC/WCC II looks at the SAT II-A as 4 satellite controllers and forces the Control Output Screens to be in the EA driver mode to allow the user to input the following control information from the Operator Control Console:

Schedule controlSpace temperature setpointMorning warm-up period

The EA Driver Screen is accessed from the ECC/WCC II System Main Menu. With the Main Menu showing on the screen, place the cursor above “Control Outputs” and press <Enter>. The Control Output Summary Screen that is shown above should come into view.

The EA Driver Summary Screen is slightly different when TUC’s are used. The status feature is not supported with TUC-R (relay output only) versions of the TUC. An idle, --> Cool or --> Warm message will appear here when TUC’s that have either a pneumatic or stepper motor output are used.

1.2.3.

Idle: This message appears when the actual space temperature is within the deadband range which is input on the TUC Setup Screen #2.

--> H: This message appears when the actual temperature is below the deadband range which is input on the TUC Setup Screen #2.

--> C: This message appears when the actual temperature is above the deadband range which is input on the TUC Setup Screen #2.

TUC - CONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Control Output Summary Screen

Control Out Satellite 4 Time Date ---------Control Outputs--------- 17:07 7/07

SCHED ANALOG CONTROL LIMIT COMMENTS STATUS STATUS MODE CONTROL INPUT LOW HIGHK1 : TUC 4.1 idle +W 72.4 Setpoint = 72K2: TUC 4.2 idle +W 71.8 Setpoint = 72K3:K4:K5:K6:K7:K8:-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Analog Control by:

Specifi es the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output. This input is forced to be the temperature sensor wired to the specifi c TUC represented by this screen. A sensor wired to another TUC or global analog value cannot be used as the analog input for a TUC.

Schedule Control by: ______

The “Occupied or Unoccupied” control setpoints for the TUC are selected using the “Schedule Control By:” input on the EA Driver Screen. When the value of this input is “ON,” the TUC will control according to the “On Schedule” setpoints. When the value of this input is “OFF,” the TUC will control according to the “Off Schedule” setpoints.

--------Setpoints --------On Schedule: _____ Alternate On: ____Off Schedule: _____ Off: ____Local Set: _____

Specifi es a set of analog setpoints (5 total) for the ON and OFF normal mode schedule, ON and OFF alternate mode schedule, and Local Set.

The TUC tries to maintain the temperature setpoint entered here by modulating the SA Actuator or operating the “feed” and “bleed” solenoid air valves.

The 3 relays on the TUC will be energized based on the difference between the actual space temperature and this setpoint. The TUC Set-Up Screen is used to enter the error from setpoint (difference between actual space temperature and setpoint) which will energize the 3 TUC relays.

The Local Set setpoint will be used if the ECC/WCC II front end computer stops communicating with the SAT II-A controller.

TUC - EA DRIVER SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Satellite # 4 CONTROL OUTPUT 2 Mode: EA Driver

Description: TUC 4.2 COM to H makes on Decreasing Ctrl SignalAnalog Control by: A2 COM to C makes on Increasing Ctrl SignalSchedule Control by: W1

------------------Setpoints-----------------On Schedule: 74.0 Deg F Alternate On: 0.0 Deg FOff Schedule: 90.0 Deg F Off: 0.0 Deg FLocal Set: 74.0 Deg F Selected by: ....

Dead Band Width +/-: 0.0 Deg F Reverse Action Selc’d when GB5 is ONPulse Band Width +/-: 0.0 Deg F “ “ Off Time: 0 Seconds “ “ On Time: 0 Seconds


<-------COM to H-------> <---------ALL---------> <-------COM to C-------> ON PULSED OFF PULSED ON

Setpoint+-----Dead Band-----+

+--------------------------Pulse Band---------------------------+

HOME for menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Dead Band Width (+/-): _____ Pulse Band Width: _____ “ “ Off Time: _____ Seconds “ “ On time: _____ Seconds

These inputs are not active when using the SAT II-A controller. The dead band and time constant data for the pneumatic driver or stepper motor actuator is entered on the TUC Set-up Screen/Menu 2.

Reverse Action Selected when _______ is _______

The “Normal or Reverse” control mode for the SA actuator or pneumatic (“feed” and “bleed”) output is chosen using this input. When the value of the binary signal entered in this position is “OFF,” the actuator or pneumatic output driver operate in the normal control mode. When the value of the binary input signal in this position is “ON,” the actuator or pneumatic output driver operates in the reverse action mode if the reverse action mode has been enabled on the TUC Setup Screen for each individual TUC.

For example, if the SA actuator is used to control a damper on a variable air volume box, normally the actuator opens the damper on a call for cooling. When the value of this input is “ON,” the primary air damper is in the reverse action mode and opens on a call for heat.

This input can also be used to force the 3 relay outputs on the TUC OFF if desired.

Notes:




TUC SUMMARY SCREEN

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------------------------TUC Summary Screen-------------------------

TUC Summary Satellite 4 Time Date ----------TUC’s---------- 10:05 4/30/87

Description Mode Current Setpoint StatusU1 TUC 4.1 A&R 72.0 Deg F (day)U2 TUC 4.2 P&R 74.0 Deg F (day)U3U4U5U6U7U8

Binary Status Binary Output Counter BIN1 BIN2 Relay1 Relay2 Relay3 Fill Bleed Run Time TrnsU1 OP OP ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 0U2 OP OP ON ON OFF ON OFF 0 0U3U4U5U6U7U8-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Satellite #:____

You may enter the satellite number of the SAT II-A at this location. The ECC/WCC II system “looks” at each SAT II-A as four SAT II controllers with up to 8 TUC’s connected to each SAT II controller. Therefore, each SAT II-A has 32 TUC’s associated with it

Satellite Number TUC Summary ScreenTUC #1 SAT II-A Base Number U1TUC #2 SAT II-A Base Number U2TUC #3 SAT II-A Base Number U3TUC #4 SAT II-A Base Number U4TUC #5 SAT II-A Base Number U5TUC #6 SAT II-A Base Number U6TUC #7 SAT II-A Base Number U7TUC #8 SAT II-A Base Number U8

TUC #9 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U1TUC #10 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U2TUC #11 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U3TUC #12 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U4TUC #13 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U5TUC #14 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U6TUC #15 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U7TUC #16 SAT II-A Base Number +1 U8



For example, assume that the SAT II-A is named #4 and you would like to set up the screen for TUC #20. TUC #20 would be seen as U4 on satellite #6. From the table, the satellite number for TUC #20 is the base number plus 2. Since the SAT II-A is named 4, the base number is 4.

SAT II-A base number = 4SAT II-A base number +2 = 6TUC #20 = U4

Therefore, TUC 20 is seen as U4 on satellite controller 6.

Description:

The description message which is entered on the TUC Set-Up Screen is displayed here to help you identify the different TUC’s within the system.

Mode:

The mode is automatically displayed by the system showing the version of the TUC. For example, if you have a TUC-AR which has an actuator driver and relay outputs, then the mode would be A&R.

Current Setpoint:

The value that the TUC is currently using as its setpoint, as entered on the EA Driver Screen, is displayed here. A message will also appear indicating if the value is the “Day” (ON schedule) or “Night” (OFF schedule) setpoint.

Status:

A message may appear here to indicate if the TUC is using either the alternate setpoint or if it is operating in the reverse action (morning warm-up) mode.

Binary StatusBIN 1 BIN 2CL OP

The ON or OFF status of the TUC binary inputs are displayed here. OP stands for OPEN or OFF, and CL stands for CLOSED or ON. BIN1 and BIN2 may have remote switches connected to them. A CL message means that the remote switch is CLOSED, and an OP message means that the remote switch is OPEN.

BIN 1 (Tenant Override) OP: The remote switch is OPEN, which means the tenant override mode is NOT active.

CL: The remote switch is CLOSED, which means the tenant override mode is ACTIVE.

BIN 2 (Control Override) OP: The remote switch is OPEN, which means the control override mode is NOT active.

CL: The remote switch is CLOSED, which means the control override mode is ACTIVE.

Binary Output

Relay1 Relay2 Relay3 Fill BleedON OFF OFF OFF OFF

The status of the binary outputs is displayed here. ON means the relay is energized, and OFF means the relay is de-energized. Fill and Bleed are the outputs for the pneumatic driver on the TUC board.

For TUC’s with stepper motor actuators, Bleed is normally On when the damper is driving toward the closed position, and Feed is normally On when the damper is driving toward the open position.

Run Time Counter

You may monitor the run time for one of the binary (ON/OFF) values associated with the TUC. For example, if you choose to monitor the run time of BIN 1 (tenant override), the accumulated amount of time that BIN 1 is ON will appear here in either minutes or hours, depending on how it is initialized on the TUC Setup Screen. (See the TUC Setup Screen description on page 3-134 for information on which values can be monitored.)

Transition Counter

You may monitor the number of times one of the binary input values goes from OFF to ON. The number of OFF to ON transitions of the selected input will appear here.

Individual TUC Set-Up Screens

To set up an individual TUC, with the TUC Summary Screen showing on the screen, use the arrow keys to move the cursor (>) down to the TUC you want to edit, and then press <Enter>. The TUC Setup Screen should appear.

<Ctrl-U> - Upload TUC Information

You can manually force the system to read the data entries on the TUC by performing a <Ctrl-U>. This is used mainly for trouble-shooting or when the TUC’s are set up initially. To use the <Ctrl-U> feature, place the cursor at the “Home” position of the TUC Setup Screen. Then press <Ctrl> and then , holding both keys down for an instant and then releasing both keys. The TUC Summary Screen should appear on the screen; however, the information for the TUC that you performed the <Ctrl> on will probably be missing. Press <Home> to return to the Main Menu, and then press <Enter> to return to the TUC Summary Screen. The information for that particular TUC should now be on the Summary Screen.

Notes:




TUC SETUP SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Satellite #4 TUC SETUP # 1 Type: Relay

Description: Rm 101Hysteresis: Day 2 x 0.2 Deg Night 5 x 0.2 Deg

Binary Offset (Deg F) Deadband Minimum ForcedOutput Day Night Enabld by Sprd ON Time OFF Time ON-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Relay1 0.0(+/-) 10.0(+/-) GB1 1 F 1 min 1 min NoRelay2 2.0(+/-) 12.0(+/-) GB1 1 F 1 min 5 min NoRelay3 0.0(+) 0.0(+) GB0 0 F 0 min 0 min No

------------------------Binary Output Options--------------------------Relay1 = => 1. Forced ON if Relay 2 is ON: Yes2. Forced ON if Relay3 is ON: No 3. Forced OFF during MWU cycle: No4. Forced ON if BIN2 is closed: No 5. Forced ON day, cycle night

Relay2 = => 1. Disabled if BIN2 is closed: No2. Disabled during MWU cycle: No 3. ON if GB2 is ON

Relay 3 = => 1. Disabled if BIN2 is closed: No2. Disabled during MWU cycle: No 3. ON if GB2 is ON

Binary Input Mode: NormalOverride control is Normal, the active time period is 60 minutes.

Run Time Counter: Record total ON Time in minutes for BIN1, reset when GB3 is ON.

Transition Counter: Records total number of transitions from OFF to ON for: None, Reset when GB3 is ON.

Pneumatic Mode: Pneumatic Driver Use low resolution on deadbandDeadband is 1 Deg F and pulse-on-time is 0.0/10 secondsUse proportional mode: No Reverse action during MWU: NoForced bleed: No Force fi ll: NoUse hysteresis on deadband: No-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # _____

You may enter the satellite number associated with the SAT II-A at this location.

TUC SETUP #: _____

The number of the TUC (1-8) that you would like to edit is entered here.

Type:

The type is automatically displayed by the system showing the version of the TUC. For example, if you have a TUC-AR which has an actuator driver and relay outputs, then the mode would be A&R.


Specifi es a short message to be displayed on summary screens to help you remember what area the TUC is serving. You may enter up to 10 characters (control codes, ALT codes, and the double quote character are not allowed).

Local setpoints are Day: 72 Deg F and Night: 72 Deg F

A set of temperature setpoints can be entered for the TUC’s local set mode. That is to say, these are the setpoints the TUC will use if the SAT II-A is not communicating with the TUC. If the TUC is controlling without the SAT-II A, it looks to its Night Setback (NSB) binary input to see if it should be operating according to the “Day” or “Night” setpoint entered here. If the remote switch connected to the NSB and GND is open, the TUC controls according to the “Day” setpoints, and when it’s closed, it will control according to its “Night” setpoints.

Hysteresis: Day 2 x 0.2 DegNight 5 x 0.2 Deg

Hysteresis is a software entry that allows an operator to specify the amount that a measured variable, such as room temperature, has to change before the switch changes state. For example, consider a temperature setpoint of 72 ºF with a +/- 0.4 ºF hysteresis. The switch will change state (open/close) when the temperature rises to 72.4 ºF and will not switch back to its original state until the temperature drops to 71.6 ºF.

The number that is entered is multiplied by 0.2 to give the actual hysteresis value. That is, if 2 is entered, it is multiplied by 0.2 which results in a +/- 0.4 º hysteresis.

This hysteresis value applies to all relay outputs.

-------Binary Output Parameters-----------

Binary Offset ( Deg F) Deadband Minimum ForcedOutput Day Night Enabld by Sprd ON Time OFF Time ON----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Relay1 0.0(+/-) 10.0(+/-) GB1 1 F 1 min 1 min No

Relay2 2.0(+/-) 12.0(+/-) GB1 1 F 1 min 5 min No

Relay3 0.0 (+) 0.0 (+) GB0 0 F 0 min 0 min No

When the offset value is reached, the relay is energized. “Day” simply means that the TUC is in the “Day” model or “ON” schedule (the value in the “Schedule Selected by” input on the EA Driver Screen is ON). “Night” means that the TUC is in the “Night” mode or “OFF” schedule (the value in the “Schedule Selected by” input on the EA Driver Screen is “OFF”). “Offset” means the difference between the actual temperature minus the temperature setpoint.

A (+) offset means that the relay will be energized when the actual temperature is above the setpoint by the specifi ed amount.

A (-) offset means that the relay will be energized when the actual temperature is below the temperature setpoint by the specifi ed amount.

A (+/-) offset means that the relay will be energized when the actual temperature is either above or below the setpoint by the specifi ed amount.

<-----------------RELAY OFF-------------><-RELAY ON->

<--(+)OFFSET-->

<--DECREASE IN SPACE TEMP-->+<---INCREASE IN SPACE TEMP--->

SETPOINT

(+) OFFSET

For example, assume that the space temperature setpoint is 72 ºF, and the actual temperature is 70 ºF. The “Offset” is -2 ºF.

Actual Temperature Temperature Setpoint Offset

74 ºF 72 ºF +2 ºF 72 ºF 72 ºF 0 ºF 70 ºF 72 ºF -2 ºF

To enter an offset value, simply use the arrow keys to position the cursor over the offset number, type in the desired value, and press <Enter>. Then move the cursor over the [(+),(-), or (+/-)] sign and press the <space bar> once, and the next choice will appear. After the desired symbol appears, press <Enter>.

Deadband Enabled by SpreadRelay 1 [GB1-GB15] [0-16] Deg FRelay 2 [GB1-GB15] [0-16] Deg FRelay 3 [GB1-GB15] [0-16] Deg F

Deadband spreading is used to adjust the temperature setpoints if a global binary value goes on. The TUC’s can monitor the status of global binary values GB1-15. If the global binary value which enables the deadband spread goes ON, the spread value is added

to the offset. For example, assume that the offset value for relay 1 is +/- 1 °F, the deadband spread value is 1 °F, and the deadband is enabled by GB1. When GB1 is OFF, relay 1 will be energized when the actual space temperature is more than 1 °F (plus hysteresis) above or below the setpoint. When GB1 is ON, relay 1 will be energized when the actual space temperature is more than 2 °F (plus hysteresis) above or below the setpoint.

Minimum ON Time OFF TimeRelay 1 [0-127] [min] [sec] [0-127] [min] [sec]Relay 2 [0-127] [min] [sec] [0-127] [min] [sec]Relay 3 [0-127] [min] [sec] [0-127] [min] [sec]

This input specifi es the minimum ON and OFF times for the relays. That is to say, once a relay is energized, it will remain energized for its minimum ON time value. Once it is de-energized, it will remain OFF for its minimum OFF time value. The range is from 0-127 minutes or seconds. Since you have a choice between minutes and seconds, place the cursor over the present choice and press the <space bar> once for each choice. When the desired choice appears, press <Enter>.

ForcedRelay 1 [ON] [OFF] [NO]Relay 2 [ON] [OFF] [NO]Relay 3 [ON] [OFF] [NO]

This position allows you to manually force a relay ON or OFF. For example, if you want to force Relay 1 OFF, place the cursor over the ON/OFF choice fi eld and press the <space bar> until the “OFF” message appears, and then press <Enter>. Relay 1 will then be forced “OFF” when you leave the TUC Setup Screen. To release the force, you must re-enter this screen and select “No.”

Note: If the relays have other control options which are also causing them to be forced ON or OFF, this manual override may not have top priority. For example, if you have set the system up so the fan (relay 1) is forced ON if the compressor (relay 2) is ON, then you cannot override the fan OFF if the compressor is ON.

-

<-RELAY ON-> <--------------RELAY OFF------------>

<--(-)OFFSET-->

<--DECREASE IN SPACE TEMP----->+<---INCREASE IN SPACE TEMP--->

SETPOINT

(-) OFFSET

__________________________________________

<-RELAY ON-><-----------RELAY OFF---------><RELAY ON>

<--(-)OFFSET--><--(+)OFFSET-->

<---DECREASE IN SPACE TEMP--->+<--INCREASE IN SPACE TEMP-->

SETPOINT

(+/-) OFFSET

______________________________________________________




-------Binary Output Options---------- Relay 1 Choice

1. Forced ON if Relay 2 is ON: [Yes] [No]2. Forced ON if Relay 3 is ON: [Yes] [No]3. Forced OFF during MWU cycle: [Yes] [No]4. [Normal] [Forced ON if BIN 2 is closed] [Runs only if BIN 2 is closed] [Forced ON if BIN 2 is closed (day)]5. Forced ON day, Cycle night] [cycle day and night)]

Relay 2

1. Disable if BIN 2 is closed: [Yes] [No]2. Disable during MWU cycle: [Yes] [No]3. [ON] [OFF] if [GB__] is ON:

Relay 3

1. Disable if BIN 2 is closed: [Yes] [No]2. Disable during MWU cycle: [Yes] [No]3. [ON] [OFF] if [GB__] is ON:

The relays on the TUC can be automatically forced ON or OFF to obtain the desired control scheme for many applications.

BIN2

The TUC has a binary input labeled “BIN2.” A remote dry contact closure may be wired between the “BIN2” and “GND” terminals on the TUC. When the remote switch is closed, the TUC “sees” BIN2 as being ON.

MWU

“MWU” stands for Morning Warm-Up. The TUC “sees” MWU as being ON when the Reverse Action mode on the EA Driver Screen for this particular TUC is enabled.

GB

The TUC can monitor the ON/OFF status of 15 global binary values. Only GB1-15 are recognized by the TUC’s.

Binary Input Mode: [Normal] [Forced OFF during day] [Forced OFF during night] [Forced ON during day] [Forced ON during night]

Override Control is [Normal] [One shot retriggerable] [One shot with warning blip]

And the active time period is [0-255] [Seconds] [Minutes]

A remote mounted tenant override switch can be wired to binary input 1 (BIN 1) to allow the TUC to control according to its ON schedule (Day) mode setpoints while the switch is closed or for a programmable amount of time after a momentary switch has been closed. When the remote mounted dry contact closure connected between BIN1 and GND is closed, the ECC/WCC II “sees” the appropriate binary input (Ln) for the specifi c satellite as being ON.

When SAT II controllers are used with the ECC/WCC II system, the binary inputs are called L1-L16. Since one SAT II-A is viewed as four SAT II controllers, the binary input values of a SAT II-A are seen as the binary inputs of four SAT II controllers.

For example, if a SAT II-A is named #4, then it will appear as satellite number 4, 5, 6 and 7 on the ECC/WCC II system screens. The following table shows how the TUC’s will appear to the ECC/WCC II system. For example, BIN1 and BIN2 on TUC #20 will be seen at the ECC/WCC II Operator Control Console as binary inputs L4 and L12 on satellite controller #6.

Satellite Number BIN 1 BIN 2TUC #1 SAT II-A Base Number L1 L9TUC #2 SAT II-A Base Number L2 L10TUC #3 SAT II-A Base Number L3 L11TUC #4 SAT II-A Base Number L4 L12TUC #5 SAT II-A Base Number L5 L13TUC #6 SAT II-A Base Number L6 L14TUC #7 SAT II-A Base Number L7 L15TUC #8 SAT II-A Base Number L8 L16

TUC #9 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L1 L9TUC #10 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L2 L10TUC #11 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L3 L11TUC #12 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L4 L12TUC #13 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L5 L13TUC #14 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L6 L14TUC #15 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L7 L15TUC #16 SAT II-A Base Number +1 L8 L16

Satellite Number BIN 1 BIN 2



Mode: Normal] [Forced OFF during day] [Forced OFF during night] [Forced ON during day] [Forced ON during night]

This choice fi eld must be “Normal” if either the One Shot Retriggerable or One Shot with Warning Blip is used. The other choices may be used to force the value of BIN1 to be either ON or OFF during the Day or Night mode. The most common application for this option is to force BIN1 OFF during the Day so that the tenant will be billed for overtime use during the Night mode only.

Mode:One Shot Retriggerable

If this option is selected, the ECC/WCC II can be set up to control according to its occupied (day) mode setpoints for the entered amount of time after a momentary contact switch connected to BIN 1 has been activated. For example, if 60 minutes is entered as the amount of override time, BIN 1 will be ON for 1 hour after the push button (momentary, dry contact closure) connected to BIN 1 has been pressed. If the tenant presses the button again after 45 minutes, he or she will get an additional hour of override from that time. That is to say, the total override time would be 1 hour and 45 minutes.

BIN 1 going ON will not automatically cause the TUC to control according to its day mode. You must determine which ECC/WCC

II binary input (Ln) switch corresponds to the BIN 1 switch and then set up the ECC/WCC II system to control according to its day setpoints when the binary input (Ln) is ON.

One Shot with Warning Blip

This mode is the same as the One Shot Retriggerable except it will warn the tenant that the override time is nearly up by de-energizing the relays for 2 seconds and then re-energizing them for 30 seconds before the TUC starts controlling according to its OFF schedule setpoints again. This mode is useful if the TUC is used to control the lights in the space. It will give the tenant time to press the override button again before the lights go out.

And the Active Time Period is[0-255] [Seconds] [Minutes]

The amount of override time that is desired every time the override button is pressed is entered here. The range is from 0 to 255 minutes or seconds. Since you have a choice between minutes and seconds, place the cursor over the present message and press the <space bar> once for each choice.When the desired message appears, press <Enter>.

Run Time Counter:Record the total ON time in [min] [hours] of [None] [BIN 1] [BIN 2] [MWU] [NSB] [Relay 1] [Relay 2] [Relay 3]

You have the option of recording the total run time of one of the binary (ON/OFF) inputs or outputs on the TUC.

BIN 1: Binary input #1 (Tenant Override)BIN 2: Binary input #2 (Control Override)MWU: Morning warm-up (selected by the “Reverse Action”

input on the EA Driver Screen)NSB: Night setback (selected by the “Schedule Control by”

input on the EA Driver Screen)Relay 1: Generally used to control the fan on a fan terminal unit or

heat pumpRelay 2: Generally used to control the fi rst stage of heat on a fan

terminal unit, or compressor on a heat pumpRelay 3: Generally used to control the second stage of heat on a

fan terminal unit, or the reversing valve on a heat pump




After you have chosen to monitor the run time for one of the binary input or output values, a Run Time Trend Log Screen needs to be set up for each TUC. If this option is selected, the Run Time Trend Log Screen will be dedicated to monitoring the run time for this item; however, you must access the Run Time Trend Log Screen and enter U# as the input to be monitored (see page 3-32). The U# stands for the TUC #, TUC 1 is U1 etc. If you set up the Run Time Screen, leave it, and then return to it, the value that it is monitoring will be forced to this particular TUC (U#).

Reset when [GB1-15] is ON

The accumulated run time will be reset or cleared when this global binary value goes ON.

Transition Counter:Record total number of transitions from OFF to ON for: [None] [BIN 1] [BIN 2] [MWU]

You may count the OFF to ON transitions of the TUC binary inputs shown above. For example, if you have chosen to count the OFF to ON transitions for BIN 1 (tenant override), each time BIN 1 goes from OFF to ON, the count will increase by one. The total count is displayed on the TUC Summary Screen.




- -The TUC-P and TUC-PR models have the capability of driving two 24 VDC solenoid air valves to obtain “feed” and “bleed” type control of pneumatic powered devices. If the TUC has the pneumatic driver circuit, this menu will automatically appear as part of the TUC Setup Screen.

Use [low] [high] resolution on deadband

The deadband range is either +/- (0-15) °F or +/- (0-3) °F depending on which range is selected.

Low resolution = 0-15 °F Deadband RangeHigh resolution = 0-3 °F Deadband Range

Deadband is [0-15] Deg F and pulse on-time is [1-255]/10 seconds [0-3]

The deadband is user entered and can range from 0-15 °F entered as whole numbers or 0-3 entered in 0.2 °F increments depending on which resolution is selected. The deadband is the range above and below setpoint that the pneumatic driver does not energize the “feed” or the “bleed” solenoid air valve. That is to say, when the temperature is within the deadband, the controlled device remains in its present position. The value entered here is a +/- value from setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint is 72 °F, and the deadband is 2 °F, the deadband is from 70 °F to 74 °F.

The “pulse on-time” is active when the proportional mode is used. The “/10” means that the number entered as the pulse on-time is divided by 10. For example, if you want a pulse on-time of 2 seconds, 20 is entered.

Use Proportional Mode [Yes] [No]

If you choose to use the proportional mode, the TUC will pulse the “feed” and “bleed” solenoid air valves to cause the pneumatically controlled device to move faster as the actual temperature moves farther from setpoint. If you do not use the proportional mode, the TUC will continuously open either the “feed” or “bleed” solenoid air valve as the space temperature drifts out of the deadband.

Proportional mode

When the actual temperature is just outside of the deadband, the TUC will pulse either the “feed” or “bleed” solenoid air valve to move the controlled device and bring the temperature back into the desired range. When the actual temperature is just barely out of the deadband, the TUC will send a pulse and then wait for a time period of 15 times longer than the pulse. As the space temperature gets farther away from setpoint, the TUC will cause the pneumatically controlled device to move faster. When the space temperature is 3 °F above or below the deadband, the TUC will continuously hold the “feed” or “bleed” solenoid air valve open to drive the device at full speed.

When the actual space temperature is just outside of the deadband, the TUC will pulse the “feed” or “bleed” air valve for the pulse on-time entered on this screen.

Pulse ON-time in seconds|--------|+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+|//////////|+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 15 times longer than the entered “pulse on-time”|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|

PNEUMATIC OUTPUT SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------Pneumatic Output---------------------------

Pneumatic Mode: [Pneumatic Driver] Use [low] resolution on deadband [high]Deadband is [0-15] Deg F and pulse on-time is [1-255]/10 seconds [0-3]Use proportional mode: [Yes] Reverse action during MWU: [Yes] [No] [No]

Forced Bleed: [ON] [OFF] [No] Forced Fill: [ON] [OFF] [No]

Use hysteresis on deadband: [Yes] [No]-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




As the space temperature drifts farther from setpoint, the TUC will send a longer pulse ON-time to cause the pneumatically controlled device to move faster.

Pulse ON-time in seconds|---------------------------------------- |+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+|///////////////////////////////////////////////// |+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 15 times longer than the entered “pulse on-time”|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|

If the actual temperature is 3 °F or more from the deadband, the TUC will send a continuous pulse signal to the pneumatically controlled device to cause it to move at full speed.

Pulse ON-time in seconds|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ |////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////|+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ 15 times longer than the entered “pulse on-time”|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Reversed action during MWU:

You can cause the TUC to reverse the control action during the morning warm-up period by entering YES here. The morning warm-up period is active whenever the “Reverse Action” input on the EA Driver Screen is enabled.

For example, in the normal mode, the TUC will energize the “feed” terminal if the space temperature is above setpoint and energize the “bleed” terminal if the space temperature is below setpoint. In the reverse action mode, the TUC will energize the “bleed” terminal if the space temperature is above setpoint and energize the “feed” terminal if the space temperature is below setpoint.

Forced bleed: [ON] [OFF] [No]Forced fi ll: [ON] [OFF] [No]

You may manually override the “feed” or “bleed” terminal either ON or OFF. The override will take effect when you leave the TUC Setup Screen.

Use hysteresis on deadband: [YES] [NO]

Hysteresis is also called “switch differential” and is the amount the space temperature has to change before the switch will change state.

For example, assume we have a setpoint of 74 °F, and a hysteresis of +/- 0.4 °F. When the space temperature rises to 74.4 °F, the switch changes state, and when the space temperature falls to 73.6 °F, it switches back to its original position.




If a TUC with a stepper motor driver is used, this screen will be displayed at the bottom of TUC Setup Screen #2:

Mode: [ EA Actuator] [High Limit]EA Actuator

The EA Actuator mode is the “normal” mode for controlling the primary air damper on a variable air volume (VAV) terminal unit. When the actual space temperature is within the deadband range of setpoint, the primary air damper will remain in its present position. When the actual space temperature moves out of the deadband, the primary air damper will start to move. The farther the space temperature is from setpoint, the faster the primary air damper will move. When the actual space temperature is 3 °F or more from the deadband, the actuator will be moving at full speed.

Hi Limit

The Hi Limit mode has an additional feature for applications where the primary air damper must be forced toward the closed position whenever the hi limit pressure switch indicates that the central fan is trying to force too much air through the VAV terminal unit. The remote mounted hi limit pressure switch is connected to the “BIN2” and “GND” terminals on the TUC. While “BIN2” is made to “GND” (hi limit pressure switch closed), the primary air damper will drive toward the closed position. A common application for this is a series fan powered box such as the Tempmaster model HFS or HVFS. The hi limit pressure switch must be purchased separately.

Use [low] [high] resolution on deadband

The deadband range is either +/- {0-15}°F, or +/- {0-3}°F depending on which range is selected.

Low resolution = 0-15 °F Deadband Range High resolution = 0-3 °F Deadband Range

Deadband is [0-15] Deg F and delay time is [1-15] seconds 0-3]

The deadband is user entered and can range from 0-15 °F, entered as whole numbers or 0-3 entered in 0.2 °F increments depending on which resolution is selected. The deadband is the range above and below setpoint that the TUC does not energize the stepper motor actuator. That is to say, when the temperature is within the deadband, the primary air damper remains in its present position. The value entered here is a +/- value from setpoint.

For example, if the setpoint is 72 °F, and the deadband is 2 °F, the actuator will remain in its present position while the temperature is between 70 °F and 74 °F.

Delay Time

The delay time is an input that allows the user to control the speed of the actuator. A larger number here means that the actuator moves slower. The delay time is the amount of time in seconds that the actuator pauses between steps of movement. The number entered here multiplied by 15 is the delay time when the actual temperature is just outside of the deadband range. As the actual temperature

STEPPER MOTOR ACTUATOR SCREEN

-------------------------------------- EA Driver Output-----------------------------------

Mode: [EA Actuator] Use [Low] Resolution on Deadband [Hi Limit] [High]

Deadband is [0-15] Deg F and Delay Time is [0-15] Seconds [0-3]

Forced Action [No] Reversed Action during MWU: [Yes] [No] [No] [ON] [OFF]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




moves farther from setpoint, the delay time automatically gets smaller which causes the actuator to move faster. When the actual temperature is 3 °F or more from the setpoint deadband, the actuator will be moving at full speed.

When the actual space temperature is just outside of the deadband, the TUC will move the stepper motor one step and then wait for the delay time before it moves again.

ON time (Delay time in seconds) x 15|---------|---------------------------------------------------------------------|+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+|///////////| |+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+

As the space temperature drifts farther from setpoint, the TUC will shorten the delay time to cause the stepper motor to move faster.

OnTime Delay time|----|------------------------------------|+---------------------------------------+|/////| |+---------------------------------------+

If the actual temperature is 3 °F or more from the deadband, the TUC will shorten the delay time to the minimum amount to move the stepper motor at full speed.

On DelayTime Time|------ -|--|+------+-+|/////////| |+------+-+

Notes:




TUC-VR

GENERAL INFORMATIONThe TUC-VR is an electronic Terminal Unit Controller designed to control variable air volume boxes. The “ VR” stands for “ Velocity Reset” which means that the TUC-VR is a “pressure independent” controller.

The TUC-VR can operate as a stand-alone controller, or it can interface with the ECC/WCC II system through a SAT II-B. Up to 32 TUC-VR’s can be connected to one SAT II-B using a 2 wire twisted pair, 18 gauge shielded cable.

If you are using the TUC-VR’s with the ECC/WCC II system, you must “program” each TUC-VR by setting up an Analog Input Screen, EA Driver Screen, and a TUC-VR Set-Up Screen.

Analog Input Screen

The Analog Input Screen is used to assign the following parameters to the space temperature sensor:

Sensor scaling characteristics (0% to 100 % scale = 0 to 100 °F).Sensor units of measure (°F/°C).Occupied and Unoccupied mode alarm limits.

EA Driver Screen

The term “EA Driver” stands for “Electric Actuator Driver”. In other words, the ECC/WCC II system is used to drive an electric actuator which in this case is the TUC-VR. The EA Driver Screen is used to enter the following control parameters:

Occupied/Unoccupied schedule.Cooling setpoint.Morning warm-up schedule.

TUC-VR Set-up Screen

The TUC-VR Set-Up Screen is used to enter the following information:

Air fl ow rate of the terminal unit when the velocity pressure is 2 in. wc.Minimum air fl ow rate allowed through theterminal unit.Maximum air fl ow rate allowed through theterminal unit.

1.

2.3.

1.2.3.

1.

2.

3.

Terminal unit fan setpoint.Terminal unit heating setpoint.

The “day” and “night” temperature setpoints for cooling are entered on the EA Driver Screen associated with the TUC-VR. If the front end computer quits communicating, the TUC-VR will use the “local set” setpoint on the EA Driver Screen. If the SAT II-B quits communicating, the TUC-VR will hold the “local set” setpoints for space temperature, minimum and maximum air fl ow, and auxiliary fan setpoints that are input on the TUC-VR Screen.

If power is cycled to the TUC-VR while the SAT II-B is “off-line”, the TUC-VR will lose its setpoints from the SAT II-B and will try and maintain the space temperature setpoint on the room thermostat. The minimum and maximum velocity setpoints along with auxiliary setpoint will be obtained from the potentiometers on the TUC-VR.

Note: If the fl ush mount temperature sensor is used, the setpoint will default to 74 °F if the TUC-VR looks to the room temperature sensor for the setpoint.

The “reheat offset” is entered on the TUC-VR Set-Up Screen. Values from 1-25 are allowed. If 4 is entered as the offset, the heating setpoint is 4 °F lower than the cooling setpoint (the cooling setpoint is entered on the EA Driver Screen).

The terminal unit fan will be energized when the air fl ow through the terminal unit goes below the “% of maximum air fl ow” setpoint entered on the TUC-VR Set-Up Screen.

Monitoring/Control Capability

The following items may be monitored at the ECC/WCC II operator control console:

Current air fl ow rate.Current space temperature.Current duct temperature (if duct sensor is purchased).Current modulating hot water valve position (if modulating HW valve is used).Space temperature - temperature setpoint.Space temperature - duct temperature (if duct sensor is purchased).Percent of maximum air fl ow rate.

4.5.

1.2.3.4.

5.6.

7.




The SAT II-B is seen as 4 satellite controllers through the ECC/WCC II Screens. A SAT II-B can communicate with up to 32 TUC-VR’s; therefore, each “satellite controller” within a SAT II-B can handle up to 8 TUC-VR’s.

For example, if you have a SAT II-B addressed #4, it will be seen as satellite controllers #4, 5, 6, and 7 through the screens of the ECC/WCC II. TUC-VR’s 1-8 will be seen through the screens for satellite #4, TUC-VR’s 9-16 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #5, TUC-VR’s 17-24 will be seen through the screens for satellite #6, and TUV-VR’s 25-32 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #7.

If the SAT II-B is named #4, and you would like to set up the screens for TUC-VR #20, you should access Analog InputScreen #4, Control Output Screen #4, and TUC-VR Set-UpScreen #4 on satellite #6.

Notes:

SAT II-B #4

Screen

SAT II-B # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 (Base Number) TUC1 TUC2 TUC3 TUC4 TUC5 TUC6 TUC7 TUC8

5 (Base Number+1) TUC9 TUC10 TUC11 TUC12 TUC13 TUC14 TUC15 TUC16






ANALOG INPUT SCREENThe term “analog” means a value that is represented by a directly measurable quantity such as room temperature. “Input” means that the analog value is sent to the ECC/WCC II system. Therefore, the room temperature sensor is an analog input for the TUC-VR.

When SAT II controllers are used with the ECC/WCC II system, each satellite can have 8 analog inputs which are referred to as A1-A8. Since the SAT II-B is viewed as 4 SAT II controllers, the TUC-VR room temperature sensors are seen as the analog inputs of 4 SAT II controllers.

For example, if a SAT II-B is named #4, then it will appear as satellite numbers 4, 5, 6, and 7 on the ECC/WCC II System Screens. The following table shows how the TUC-VR’s will appear to the ECC/WCC II system. For example, the room temperature sensor connected to TUC-VR #20 will be seen at the ECC/WCC II Operator Control Console as analog input 4 (A4) on satellite controller #6.

Notes:

Analog Input

SAT II-B # A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

4 (Base Number) TUC1 TUC2 TUC3 TUC4 TUC5 TUC6 TUC7 TUC8







The TUC-VR is designed to use either the 4-wire WRS-1FVR fl ush mount temperature sensor or the 4-wire TRS-VR room thermostat. The space temperature sensor or thermostat is wired directly to the TUC-VR.

The Analog Input Screens are used to scale the values of the temperature sensors. The TUC-VR is limited to reading a temperature from 40 °F to 95 °F. However, the scaling values on the Analog Input Screen must be set up as shown below:

Units @ 0% scale: 0 Deg F @ full scale: 100 Deg F

The other inputs on the Analog Input Screen are set up the same as for a SAT II controller with the exception of the data pattern value always being forced to x,xxx.

TUC-VR ANALOG INPUT SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite # 1 ANALOG INPUT # 1

Description: RM101 Type: AnalogPattern for values associated with this input: x,xxxUnits @ 0% scale: 0 Deg F Units of Measure message #: 1 @ full scale: 100 Deg F Filter Time Constant: 8 seconds

--------------------------ALARMS---------------------------Controlled by: W1 Limits Low HighAlarm Type: 1 On 65 80 Deg FAlarm Message #’s: Low 2 High 1 Off 50 100 Deg F

Alternate limits selected by: .... On (alt) 0 0 Deg F Off (alt) 0 0 Deg F

Limit overlap timeafter control change: 20 Minutes Local set 55 90 Deg F

-----------------------------BINARY SETPOINT------------------------ OFF Above 0 Deg F On Message #: 0 OFF Below 0 Deg F Off Message #: 0

HOME for menu

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




TUC-VRCONTROL OUTPUT SUMMARY SCREEN

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Control Output Summary Screen

Control Out Satellite 4 Time Date ---------Control Outputs-------- 17:07 7/07

SCHED ANALOG CONTROL LIMIT COMMENTS STATUS STATUS MODE CONTROL INPUT LOW HIGHK1: TUC-VR 4.1 idle +W 72.4 Setpoint = 72K2: TUC-VR 4.2 idle +W 71.8 Setpoint = 72K3:K4:K5:K6:K7:K8:-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

EA DRIVER SCREEN

The ECC/WCC II looks at the SAT II-B as 4 satellite controllers and forces the Control Output Screens to be in the EA driver mode to allow the user to input the following control information from the Operator Control Console:

Schedule control.Space temperature setpoint.Morning warm-up period.

The EA Driver Screen is accessed from the ECC/WCC II System Main Menu. With the Main Menu showing on the screen, place the cursor above “Control Outputs” and press <Enter>. The Control Output Summary Screen shown on the next page should come into view.

The EA Driver Summary Screen is slightly different when TUC-VR’s are used. The status feature is not supported with TUC-VR’s. An idle, -->C, or -->H message will appear here at random.

To access the EA Driver Setup Screen, use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to the desired “KnH:” and press <Enter>. The Control Output Screen should appear. If you are accessing this screen for the fi rst time, the screen will be a “Timeclock” mode. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to “Mode:” and press the <space bar> until “EA Driver” appears; then press <Enter>.

1.2.3.

Analog Control by:

Specifi es the analog point address that acts as the input signal source for this control output. This input is forced to be the temperature sensor wired to the specifi c TUC-VR represented by this screen. A sensor wired to another TUC-VR or a global analog value cannot be used as the analog input for a TUC-VR. In other words, the “Analog Control by” value for a TUC-VR is always the room temperature sensor connected to that particular TUC-VR.

Schedule Control by: ______

The “Occupied or Unoccupied” control setpoints for the TUC-VR are selected using the “Schedule Control by:” input on this EA Driver Screen. When the value of this input is ON, the TUC-VR will control according to the “On Schedule” setpoints. When the value of this input is OFF, the TUC-VR will control according to the “Off Schedule” setpoints.

----------- Setpoints ---------------On Schedule: _______ Alternate On: _______Off Schedule: _______ Off: _______ Selected by: _______

Specifi es a set of analog setpoints (4 total) for the ON and OFF normal mode schedule, ON and OFF alternate mode schedule. The alternate setpoints are used when the “Selected by:” binary value is On.

The TUC-VR tries to maintain the temperature setpoint entered here by modulating the primary air damper in the terminal unit controller.

The heating setpoint is an “offset value” entered on the TUC-VR Setup Screen. That is, if 76 °F is entered as the setpoint on this EA Driver Screen, and 4 °F is entered as the “heating offset” on the TUC-VR Screen, the heating setpoint will be 72 °F (76-4 = 72).

TUC-VR EA DRIVER SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-Satellite # 4 CONTROL OUTPUT 2 Mode: EA Driver

Description: TUC-VR 4.2 COM to H on decreasing control signalAnalog Control by: A2 COM to C on increasing control signalSchedule Control by: W1

-------------------Setpoints------------------On Schedule: 74.0 Deg F Alternate On: 0.0 Deg FOff Schedule: 85.0 Deg F Off: 0.0 Deg FLocal Set: 74.0 Deg F Selected by: ....

Dead Band Width +/-: 0.0 Deg F Reverse Action Selc’d when GB5 is ONPulse Band Width +/-: 0.0 Deg F “ “ Off Time: 0 Seconds “ “ On Time: 0 Seconds


<-------COM to H-------> <-----------ALL----------> <-------COM to C------> ON PULSED OFF PULSED ON

Setpoint +-------Dead Band--------+

+----------------------------Pulse Band--------------------------+

HOME for menu

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




Local Set: ______

If the front end computer quits communicating, the TUC-VR will use the “Local Set” value as the cooling setpoint. The “Local Set” values on the TUC-VR Screen will be used for the heating relay setpoints and the terminal unit fan setpoints.

If power is cycled to the TUC-VR while the SAT II-B is off-line, the TUC-VR will lose its setpoints from the SAT II-B and will try and maintain the space temperature setpoint on the room thermostat. The minimum and maximum velocity setpoints along with the auxiliary setpoint will be obtained from the potentiometers on the TUC-VR.

Note: If the fl ush mount temperature sensor is used, the setpoint will default to 74 °F if the TUC-VR looks to the room temperature sensor for the setpoint.

Dead Band Width (+/-): ______Pulse Band Width (+/-): ______ “ “ Off Time: ____ Seconds “ “ On Time: ____ Seconds

The deadband, pulse band, and pulse band ON/OFF inputs are not active when using the SAT II-B controller.

Reverse Action Selected when _______ is _______

The “Normal” or “Reverse” control mode for the TUC-VR actuator is chosen using this input. When this statement is TRUE, the actuator operates in the “Reverse” mode and opens the primary air damper on a call for heating. When this statement is FALSE, the actuator operates in the normal control mode and the primary air damper opens on a call for cooling.

The TUC-VR duct thermostat is not required for the morning warm-up mode when the TUC-VR is used with an ECC/WCC II system.

During morning warm-up, all TUC-VR relays are forced OFF, and the TUC-VR will control the primary air damper to maintain a space temperature equal to the heating setpoint. The minimum air fl ow will be the minimum setting or 45% of the maximum setting, whichever is greater.

Notes:

There is one TUC-VR set-up screen for each TUC-VR. To access this screen, place the cursor above “Velocity Reset” on the Main Menu and press <Enter>.

Satellite # 4

The satellite number you want to communicate with is entered here. The SAT II-B is seen as 4 satellite controllers through the ECC/WCC II Screens.

For example, if you have a SAT II-B addressed #4, it will be seen as satellite controllers # 4, 5, 6, and 7 on the ECC/WCC II System Screens. The following table shows how the TUC-VR’s will appear to the ECC/WCC II. TUC-VR’s 1-8 will be seen through the screens for satellite #4, TUC-VR’s 9-16 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #5, TUC-VR’s 17-24 will be seen through the screens for satellite #6, and TUC-VR’s 25-32 will be seen through the screens for satellite controller #7.

TUC-VR SETUP SCREEN-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Satellite #4 VELOCITY RESET # 1

Mode: [Cooling/electric] Ver.: 01.00

Description: [Rm 100] Temperature Unit: F

Current Status: Local Control when GB 0 is ON1. Space Temperature: 76 F 2. Setpoint: 74 F3. Airfl ow: 0 CFM 4. Duct Temperature: 0 F5. Direct Action 6. Occupied7. EMS Control 8. Hot Water Valve Position: 0%

Air fl ow rate at 2 in. (50.8 mm) w.g.: [1000 CFM)

Occupied Unoccupied Local SetMaximum airfl ow (EMS set) 60% 50% 60%Minimum airfl ow (EMS set) 20% 0% 20%Aux. fan setpoint (Parallel) 30% 30% 30%Aux. reheat setpoint diff. 4 F 24 F 4 F

Damper forced closed is GB 0 is ONDamper forced open if GB 0 is ON Status: Normal

Data reg. A: [Current air fl ow]

Data reg. B: [Space temp - temp setpoint]

Data reg. C (AO): [% of maximum air fl ow rate]

The following options are selected on the panel:

1. [Normal operating reheat]2. [Parallel fan type]3. [Proportional control only]4. Throttling range is [3.0] Deg [F]5. Rotate damper [CCW] on velocity increase-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------




If the SAT II-B is named #4 and you would like to set-up the screens for TUC-VR #20, you should access Analog Input Screen #4, Control Output Screen #4, and TUC-VR Set-Up Screen #4 on satellite #6.

Velocity Reset # 1

This input designates the Velocity Reset Screen (1-8) you would like to edit. (See table above.)

Mode:

[Cooling/Electric] [Cooling/Hot Water] [Fan/Electric] [Fan/Hot Water] [Induct./Electric] [Induct./Hot Water]

The mode is automatically displayed on the TUC-VR Screen. The mode is determined by the “FUNCTION” switch settings on the TUC-VR.

SAT II-B #4 Velocity Reset #SAT II B # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 (Base Number) TUC1 TUC2 TUC3 TUC4 TUC5 TUC6 TUC7 TUC85 (Base Number+1) TUC9 TUC10 TUC11 TUC12 TUC13 TUC14 TUC15 TUC166 (Base Number+2) TUC17 TUC18 TUC19 TUC20 TUC21 TUC22 TUC23 TUC24


FUNCTION Switches

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Cooling Only (Factory Confi guration) F F F F F F F FCooling/Staged Electric Reheat F F F F F F F FCooling/Timed Prop. Electric Reheat F F F F F F F FCooling/Proportional Reheat Valve F F F F F F F FParallel Fan Powered/No Reheat F F F F F F F FPar Fan Pwd/Staged Elec Reheat F F F F F F F FPar Fan Pwd/Time Prop Elec Reheat F F F F F F F FPar Fan Pwd/Prop Reheat Valve F F F F F F F FSeries Fan Powered/No Reheat F F F F F F F FSeries Fan Pwd/Staged Elec Reheat F F F F F F F FSeries Fan Pwd/Time Prop Elec Reheat F F F F F F F FSeries Fan Pwd/Prop Reheat Valve F F F F F F F F

Notes: 1) F = Off, N = On 2) The TUC-VR reads the position of the switches when it is powered up. If a change must be made to the switches, the TUC-VR must be powered down and then back up for the new switch settings to take effect.

Ver.: 01.00

The version of software within the TUC-VR is automatically displayed here.

Description: [Rm 100]

You may enter a message to help you remember what area or what piece of equipment is served by this particular TUC-VR.

Current Status:

1. Space Temperature: 76 °F 2. Setpoint: 74 °F3. Airfl ow: 0 CFM 4. Duct Temperature: 0 °F5. Direct Action 6. Occupied7. EMS Control 8. Hot Water Valve Position: 0%

The ECC/WCC II system automatically displays the current space temperature, temperature setpoint, airfl ow, duct air temperature (if the duct sensor is connected to the TUC-VR), present control mode - either Direct or Reverse as selected from the EA Driver Screen, Occupied/Unoccupied control mode as selected from the EA Driver Screen, EMS or local control, and the percent open position of the modulating hot water valve.

Local Control when GB 0 is ON

When the global binary (GB1-255) entered here takes a value of ON, the TUC-VR will operate according to its local set mode; otherwise it will operate in the EMS mode.

When EMS is the control mode, the TUC-VR will receive all of its setpoints from the ECC/WCC II front end computer. The space temperature setpoint comes from the EA Driver Screen, and the auxiliary setpoint along with the minimum and maximum air fl ow setpoints comes from either the Occupied or Unoccupied inputs on the TUC-VR Setup Screen.

When “Local” is selected, the TUC-VR will use the setpoint on the space temperature sensor (default value = 74 °F for 4-wire fl ush mount sensor) for zone control. The auxiliary setpoint along with the minimum and maximum air fl ow setpoints comes from the “Local Set” inputs on the TUC-VR Setup Screen.

Air fl ow rate at 2 in.(50.8 mm) w.g.: [1000] [CFM]

Input the air fl ow rate consistent with the selected units (usually cubic feet per minute) when the velocity pressure signal at the TUC-VR is at 2 inches of water column. You need to know the characteristics of the particular velocity probe used before you can input the correct information. For example, the Tempmaster velocity probe amplifi es the pressure signal by a factor of

approximately 1.4. Therefore, an actual velocity pressure of 1.43 inches will be seen as 2.0 inches at the TUC-VR.

Normally, the VAV box manufacturer will provide a graph or chart which shows the CFM through the different size VAV boxes at various velocity pressures.

The choices for the air fl ow units are shown below:

[Cubic feet/min, Cubic meters/hour, liter/second]

To select the desired units, place the cursor over this fi eld and press the <space bar> once for each choice until the desired units appear; then press <Enter>.

Occupied Unoccupied Local Set

Maximum airfl ow(EMS set) 60% 50% 60%

Minimum airfl ow (EMS set) 20% 0% 20%

Aux. fan setpoint(Parallel) 30% 30% 30%

Aux. reheatsetpoint diff. 4 F 24 F 4 F

Occupied, Unoccupied, Local Set

The control schedule for the TUC-VR is determined by the “Schedule Selected by” input on the EA Driver Screen for this TUC-VR. When the Occupied mode is selected at the EA Driver Screen, the TUC-VR uses the Occupied mode setpoints, etc.

Maximum airfl ow (EMS set): 60%

The maximum amount of air to be delivered by the terminal unit is entered in terms of “% of air fl ow at 2 inches.” The sample screen shows 1000 CFM at 2 in. w.g. and a maximum air fl ow setpoint of 60%. This means that when the space calls for full cooling, 600 CFM will be delivered by the VAV box.

Minimum Flow Setpoint

The minimum amount of air to be delivered by the terminal unit is entered in terms of “% of air fl ow at 2 inches.” The sample screen shows 1000 CFM at 2 in. w.g. and a minimum air fl ow setpoint of 20%. This means that when the space calls for full heating, 200 CFM will be delivered by the VAV box.

Auxiliary Fan Setpoint (Parallel): 30%

If the TUC-VR is confi gured to control a parallel fan powered terminal unit, relay #4 on the TUC-VR is used to run the fan. When the space requires heating, the primary air damper begins to close to reduce the amount of cold air supplied to the space. When the air fl ow through the terminal unit falls below the setpoint, the TUC-VR will energize relay #4 and run the fan.

Auxiliary Reheat Offset

The heating setpoint is determined by subtracting the reheat offset value from the space temperature setpoint entered on the EA Driver Screen for this TUC-VR. For example, if the space temperature setpoint is 74 °F, and the offset is 4 °F, the heating setpoint is 70 °F.

TUC-VR may use one or all of relays 1-4 for heating depending on how the TUC-VR FUNCTION switches are set.

FUNCTION Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4

VAV Box1. Cooling Only --- --- --- ---2. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg 4th Stg3. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- ---4. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- ---

Parallel Fan Box5. Cooling Only --- --- --- Fan6. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg Fan7. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- Fan8. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- Fan

Series Fan Box 9. Cooling Only --- --- --- Fan10. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg Fan11. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- Fan12. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- Fan

Data reg. A: [Current duct temperature] [Current air fl ow] [Hot water valve position] [Space temp - temp setpoint] [Space temp - duct temp] [% of maximum air fl ow rate]

Data reg. B: [Current duct temperature] [Current air fl ow] [Hot water valve position] [Space temp - temp setpoint] [Space temp - duct temp] [% of maximum air fl ow rate]

Several values associated with the TUC-VR are stored in a “data register” and are available for monitoring and/or they can be used as inputs on other ECC/WCC II Screens. The data registers are in the form of “RnA” and “RnB.”

“R” stands for Data Register.

“n” is the number of the TUC-VR Screen of the data register.

“A”&“B” are the two data registers available for each screen.

Each data register (“RnA” and “RnB”) can take on the value of one of the following items:

[Current duct temperature] [Current air fl ow] [Hot water valve position] [Space temp - temp setpoint] [Space temp - duct temp] [% of maximum air fl ow rate]

To make your selection, move the cursor over this input and press the <space bar> until the desired choice appears; then press <Enter>.

An example of using a data register would be to set up an Analog Trend Screen to record the value of the air fl ow through the TUC-VR terminal unit at fi ve minute intervals. Assume the TUC-VR is “named” #1 and is connected to SAT II-B #4. Select “current air fl ow” as the value for data register A. Now move to the Analog Trend Log Screen for satellite #4 and set up the screen to record the value of “R1A” every fi ve minutes.

Data reg. C (AO): [Current duct temperature] [Current air fl ow] [Hot water valve position] [Space temp - temp setpoint] [Space temp - duct temp] [% of maximum air fl ow rate]

Data register C is accessed in a different manner from data registers A and B. Data register may be thought of as the “Analog Output” signal from the TUC-VR Screen. The “Analog Output” values associated with the TUC-VR are available for monitoring and/or

they can be used for control of other devices. The “Analog Output” is in the form of “Pn”.

“P” stands for “Proportional Output”“n” is the number of the TUC-VR Screen of “Analog Output”

The following are selected on the panel:

1. [Normal operating reheat] [time proportioned reheat]

2. [Parallel fan type] [Series fan type]

3. [Proportional control only] [Proportional w/integral control]

These messages are automatically displayed on the screen to show you what the TUC-VR is set up to control. The different control modes are selected by positioning the “FUNCTION” switches on the TUC-VR.

4. Throttling range is [3.0] [6.0] °[F] [C]

The throttling range is the temperature span around the setpoint that the primary air damper moves from maximum air fl ow to minimum air fl ow. In other words, if the temperature setpoint is 74 °F with a 3 °F throttling range, the terminal unit would supply maximum amount of air when the space temperature rises to 75.5 °F. The VAV terminal unit supplies the minimum amount of air when the actual space temperature drops to 72.5 °F.

You have the choice of selecting either a 3 °F or 6 °F throttling range. You also have the choice of selecting either Degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade.

Make your selection by placing the cursor over this entry and pressing the <space bar> until the desired choice appears; then press <Enter>.

5. Rotate damper [CCW] [CW] on velocity increase

TUC-VR FUNCTION switch #8 specifi es the direction the TUC-VR actuator will rotate to close the damper.

OFF = CW as viewed from the cover. ON = CCW as viewed from the cover.

Section 4: Remote Communications



SECTION 4: REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS____________________________________________________

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSYou can view the screens of an existing ECC/WCC II system and/or make data entries from a computer located at a remote site. Remote read and reset of ECC/WCC II setpoints can be accomplished by using a remote computer to communicate with the ECC/WCC II system over standard telephone lines. The system at the building is called the ECC/WCC II, and the remote system is referred to as the FCC/SCC II ( Facilities Control Center/Service Control Center).

You can communicate with the ECC/WCC II “live.” That is to say, while using the remote computer, you can change setpoints immediately, and you can watch a measured variable such as temperature change. You can think of the remote computer as being an additional monitor (screen) and keyboard which is connected to the ECC/WCC II computer. An operator at the building may be making data entries or changes using the local Operator Control Console at the same time you are making data entries using the remote computer.

The FCC/SCC II software is used in the remote computer. This software will allow the remote computer to perform nearly all of the functions that the ECC/WCC II can.

Notes:

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTSTo accomplish remote communications, the following items are needed in addition to the ECC/WCC II system which is controlling the building mechanical systems.

FOR THE ECC/WCC II SYSTEM(On-Site Computer):

1 modem (allows the ECC/WCC II computer to communicate with a remote computer over standard telephone lines)1 modem cable (connects the modem to the computer)1 modular telephone cable (connects the modem to the telephone line)Dedicated telephone line with a standard modular jack

FOR THE FCC/SCC II(Remote Computer):

FCC/SCC II software package and software key to allow remote communications1 IBM PC or XT compatible computer with 640K memory; 1 fl oppy disk drive is required; a color monitor is acceptable, but not required1 modem (allows the remote computer to communicate with the ECC/WCC II over standard telephone lines)1 modem cable (connects the modem to the computer)1 modular telephone cable (connects the modem to the telephone line)Telephone line with a standard modular jack

Software KeyThe FCC/SCC II software must be installed in the remote computer to allow it to communicate with the ECC/WCC II system over telephone lines. However, a software key is required to allow the computer to read the FCC/SCC II software. The key is installed in a “key-ring,” and the key-ring is connected to the LPT1 (printer) port. If a printer is used, the “key-ring” is connected to the computer, and the printer is then connected to the key-ring.

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

INITIALIZING THE DISKThe FCC/SCC II software is sent from WattMaster without the DOS fi les, so it will not automatically “Boot-Up” until you have copied the fi les onto a new disk that has been formatted with “system.”

WARNING: Make sure the disk you are formatting does not contain any data that you want to keep. The formatting process will erase everything on the disk.

Insert the DOS version 2.1 or higher diskette, with the label side up, into the left disk drive (drive A) and close the door.Insert the “Target Disk” (new, blank disk) into the right disk drive (drive B) and close the door.With the DOS prompt A> showing on the screen, type in the following command to format the blank diskette in drive B.

A> FORMAT B:/S<Enter>

The computer will instruct you to insert the new diskette in drive B and strike any key when ready. Since you have already put the blank diskette in drive B, press <Enter>. The following messages will be displayed on the screen:

Insert new diskette for drive B: and strike any key when ready <RETURN>

Formatting...Formatting... Format completeSystem Transferred362496 bytes total disk space40960 bytes used by system321536 bytes available on disk

If the system states that “Bad Sectors” appear (displayed on the screen):Remove the diskette from the drive.Put the diskette back into the drive.Format the diskette again.


1.

2.

3.

4.

If the “Bad Sectors” message does not reappear, format the diskette once again to verify results. (This is a “best-two-out-of-three formats” technique. Oftentimes, the diskette is not “seated” properly in the disk drive when fi rst inserted, and as such, the format process may fail.)

The diskette in drive B has now been formatted and contains a copy of the DOS operating system. Remove this diskette and lay it to one side in its protective envelope. If you need to format another diskette, insert another new, blank diskette into drive B and close the door. The computer will now ask you if you wish to format another diskette. Press <Y> to format the additional diskette.

Format another (Y/N) ? Y <Enter>


Format another (Y/N) ? N

A>

COPYING DATASince the FCC/SCC II software is sent from WattMaster without the DOS fi les, it will not “Boot Up” automatically until you have copied the data fi les from the new FCC/SCC II disk to the newly formatted disk which has the DOS system fi les.

The information from the FCC/SCC II disk (Source Disk) is copied onto the newly formatted disk (Target Disk) using the following procedure:

Insert the “Source Disk” into drive A (left drive) and close the door. Insert a newly formatted diskette into drive B and close the door. With the A> prompt showing on the screen, type the following command:

A>COPY *.* B:/V <Enter>

The screen will now display the copy process:

A>COPY *.* B:<RETURN>COMMAND.COMAUTOEXEC.BATn File(s) copied

5.

1.

The diskette in drive B now contains the same data as the disk in drive A. Remove this diskette and label it using a SOFT FELT TIP PEN.

The newly made disk must be used as the FCC/SCC II disk if you want the SCC/WCC II software to automatically appear on the screen after you re-boot or start the computer from a cold start. The original disk should be kept in a safe place to be used as back-up in case of an emergency.

Notes:

2.

3.

OPERATION INSTRUCTIONSTo use the remote computer, install the “software key” and then insert the newly made FCC/SCC II disk into drive A (left drive) of the computer. If the computer is off, turn the computer on, and close the disk drive door. If the computer is on, “boot-up” the system by pressing <Ctrl>, <Alt> and <Del>, holding all three keys down for an instant and then releasing the keys. You should see the following messages on the screen.

A> racctask Racctask V#.## successfully loadedA> go2Racctask V#.## successfully enabledA> scc2

After the boot-up process is completed, the Main Menu for the FCC/SCC II system should appear on the screen.

Note: Once “racctask” has been loaded, it will be running in the background as long as the computer remains powered-up. If you try to re-boot the FCC/SCC II software with “racctask” already present in the background, the FCC/SCC II software will not work. If “racctask” is present in the background and you need to reload the FCC/WCC II software, you must turn the computer off to remove “racctask” from the background before reloading the FCC/SCC II software.

If the remote FCC/SCC II Main Menu Screen does not appear on the screen, and the A> reappears, chances are the system did not see the key. The key must be in parallel port #1 (LPT1), and the board which accepts the key must be 100% IBM compatible.

Notes:




You may enter a description and telephone number of the ECC/WCC II systems which you will be in communication with on the FCC/SCC II Main Menu Screen.

The description(s) and telephone number(s) will be entered once; after that the user simply enters one number to call a building.

System Name

Enter a message which will help you identify a system. The description will usually be the name of the building or the job.

Telephone Number

Enter the telephone number assigned to the ECC/WCC II (system in the building being controlled). The telephone number can be up to thirty characters. Remote communications will work using many different telephone systems and companies. If you are using touch-tone dialing, you need to enter a capital T in front of the telephone number to be dialed as shown below:

T555-0000

If the “T” is not placed in front of the number, it will be dialed in rotary manner.

If you need a pause between numbers to wait for a dial tone, place a comma where the pause is to occur. Each comma will cause a 1 second pause. For example, if you want a 2 second pause after dialing 1 for long distance, enter the number in the following form:

T1,,919-555-0000

The dashes between the numbers are not required and do not perform a function other than making the numbers easier to read.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------System Dial

Dial Number #:

System Name Telephone Number 0: Manual Dial 1: Building “A” T1,,919-555-0000 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: Redial

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

FCC/SCC II MAIN MENU

Dial Number #:_____

This position is where you enter a number from the column on the left of the screen (0-18). The system will then automatically dial the corresponding telephone number.

0: Manual Dial This position is reserved for a temporary telephone number. It is not meant to be kept on a permanent fi le but to be used when a number needs to be entered and called quickly.

1-17:

The FCC/SCC II remote communications will accept up to 17 descriptions and telephone numbers which can be kept on a permanent fi le.

18: Redial

When 18 is selected, the system will automatically redial the previous telephone number.

To communicate with an ECC/WCC II system, fi rst turn the modem on. The MR (Modem Ready) and the TR (Terminal Ready) lights on the front of the modem should be on. (See the Installation Section on page 5-2 for modem switch settings.)

Enter the desired “dial number” (0-18) and press <Enter>. The OH (Off Hook) light on the modem should come on, and then you should hear the modem making the telephone call. After the call connects with the ECC/WCC II, you should see the CD (Carrier Detect) light come on to indicate that the ECC/WCC II system has answered the telephone. Then you should see the System Parameter Screen of the ECC/WCC II with the computer awaiting your operator ID.

Note: Remote communication is slower than communication at the building. Wait for the screen to completely fi ll out before entering your access code to avoid being cut off and returned to the Remote Communications Screen.

Input your operator ID and press <Enter>. The cursor will move to the right and await your code ID. Input your assigned code ID and press <Enter>. You are now “signed on” and can do nearly anything you can do at the ECC/WCC II.

When you are fi nished, you may hang up by accessing the Utility Screen and moving the cursor to “WCC II File Management” and then pressing the right arrow key. The cursor should be at “Exit ECC II.” Then press <Enter>.

The following functions cannot be performed at the remote computer:

Rebuild Satellite TablesUse of the Search and Override ScreenColor GraphicsCustom ScreensSet Monitor ColorAccess the Telephone Override ScreenSpecial KeysSystem Parameters II

Description and Logical Address Search Screens

The Point Description Search and Logical Address Search Screens can be used from the remote computer if you copy the necessary fi les from the on-site computer to the remote computer using the “WCC/SCC File Management” feature.

SEARCH ROUTINES

Point Description Search

The Point Description Search Screen has a fi le on the disk in the on-site computer named “ SE_DESC.DAT.” Before the Point Description Screen will operate at the remote computer, this fi le must be transferred to the remote computer by fi lling out the WCC/SCC File Management Screen as follows:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

File name: SE_DESC.DAT

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC->SCC

Action: Copy--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

••••••••





The Logical Address Search Screen has two fi les on the disk in the on-site computer named “ SE_LOGIC.DAT” and “ SE_GLOB.DAT.” Before the “Logical Address Search” will operate at the remote computer, these fi les must be transferred to the remote computer by fi lling out the following WCC/SCC File Management Screens:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

File name: SE_LOGIC.DAT

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC->SCC

Action: Copy--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

File name: SE_GLOB.DAT

New fi le name:

Direction: WCC->SCC

Action: Copy--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Notes:

SATELLITE SAVE/RESTORE PROGRAMThe “Satellite Save-Restore” program is used to save satellite data to the disk in the computer or restore satellite data from the disk to the satellite controllers. When using the “Satellite Save-Restore” feature from a remote computer, the satellite data is saved on the disk at the remote computer, and the satellite data is restored from the disk in the remote computer.

Notes:




AUTOMATIC CALL OUT ON ALARMThe ECC/WCC II system has the capability of automatically calling out over standard telephone lines and printing alarms as they occur on a remote printer.

The ECC/WCC II system has the capability of distinguishing between 8 different alarm levels or alarm types. Alarm type #1 has the highest priority and will be reported before alarm type #2, etc. The ECC/WCC II system has the capability to call out and print alarms on the remote printer for the fi rst 5 alarm types or alarm levels. Each individual alarm point within the ECC/WCC II system such as room temperature is assigned an alarm priority level.

To assign the telephone numbers to be called when an alarm occurs, access the System Parameter Screen to assign a primary and an alternate telephone number to each of the fi rst 5 (1-5) alarm types (entering the alternate telephone number is optional; it does not have to be entered for the system to call the primary number). If the system does not connect with the primary number, it will automatically call the alternate number. If the system does not reach the alternate number, it will try the primary number again. The process will continue until the alarm(s) are reported. For example, if a priority 1 alarm occurs, the system might be programmed to call the building manager as the primary telephone number and an answering service as the alternate number. If a priority 2 alarm occurs, the system may be programmed to call the electrician, etc. (See the System Parameters Screen section on page 3-43 for additional information.)

If you want the ECC/WCC II system to report the alarm to both telephone numbers, select “Yes” at the System Parameters II Screen for each of the individual alarm types.

The following information will be printed at the remote printer as an alarm occurs:

BUILDING: _____________

The System ID which is entered on the System Parameters Screen will automatically be printed here.

ALARM: ____________

The alarm type will be printed here, such as Analog Limits, Run Time, etc.

SATELLITE #: _____

The number of the satellite controller which has a point in alarm is printed here.

A1: ____________

The point which is in alarm, along with the user entered description of the point, will be shown here.

The system will print the high or low peak of the point in alarm along with the time and date that the alarm occurred and the corresponding user entered alarm message. The system will also print the class or priority level (1-5) of the alarm.

In order for the automatic call-out on alarm to function, the ECC/WCC II system must be equipped with a modem (see the Operator Control Console Installation and Remote Communications sections of the Operator’s Manual for additional information about how to install and confi gure the ECC/WCC II modem).

The ECC/WCC II system calls out to a remote modem and printer over standard telephone lines. The remote printer must be an IBM compatible, custom confi gured Okidata 82A or 182 “serial” printer. The 82A printer needs the standard serial card, and the 182 needs the super-speed serial card option. These are the only two printers recommended to be used with the system, and we cannot offer factory support in regards to trouble-shooting problems with printers other than the ones mentioned above.

The remote printer must be a “serial” printer, as opposed to a “parallel” printer. The ECC/WCC II CPU has a “parallel” and a “serial” port for data output. The difference between a “parallel” and “serial” port is the way in which data is transmitted. The printer on-site must be a “parallel” printer. The “serial” port may be used for several purposes, one of which is to send data through telephone lines with the use of a modem. Therefore, since the “serial” port is required for the modem, the remote printer must be a “serial” printer.

The ECC/WCC II system transmits data to the remote printer at a baud rate of 300 (300 bits per second). The modem used with the remote printer may be either a Hayes Smartmodem 300, Hayes Smartmodem 1200, or ADC Phone Modem model 1200. The Hayes Smartmodem 1200 and the ADC Phone Modem model 1200 will automatically send or receive data at a baud rate of 300 or 1200, depending on what is required. (See the Installation Section on page 5-2 for modem switch settings).

Notes:




MODEM SWITCH SETTINGSThe modems must be confi gured to be compatible with the ECC/WCC II system. The modem may be either a Hayes Smartmodem 1200, an ADC Phone Modem 1200, a Capetronics 1200, or an Okidata Okitel 1200.

Hayes Smartmodem 1200If you are using a Hayes Smartmodem, the confi guration switches are located behind the front cover of the modem which is removed with a small tool as shown below:

After you remove the cover, you will see a row of small toggle switches. Newer Hayes modems have 10 switches, and older Hayes modems have 8 switches. A “10-switch” modem must be used with the ECC/WCC II system (computer on-site). The remote computer can use either the 8 switch or the 10 switch modem. The switch settings need to be in the following positions:

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II Remote Printer (On-Site Computer) (Remote Computer) (300 or 1200 Baud) 1. Up 1. Up 1. Up 2. Down 2. Down 2. Down 3. Up 3. Up 3. Up 4. Down 4. Down 4. Down 5. Down 5. Down 5. Up 6. Up 6. Up 6. Down 7. Up 7. Up 7. Up 8. Down 8. Down 8. Up 9. Up 9. Up (If present) 9. Up (If present) 10. Up 10. Up (If present) 10. Up (If present)




ADC Modem Switch SettingsIf you are using an ADC Phone modem, the confi guration switches are located on the bottom of the unit and need to be in the following positions:

Capetronics Modem Switch SettingsThere are two versions of the Capetronics modem. One version has switches 2, 3, and 9 labeled “Don’t care.” If you are using a Capetronics modem, the confi guration switches are located on the bottom of the unit and need to be in the following positions:

Capetronics Modem

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) Remote Computer) Remote Printer 1. Closed 1. Closed 1. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 3. Open 3. Open 3. Open 4. Closed 4. Closed 4. Open 5. Closed 5. Closed 5. Closed 6. Open 6. Open 6. Open 7. Open 7. Open 7. Open 8. Open 8. Open 8. Open 9. Closed 9. Closed 9. Closed 10. Open 10. Open 10. Open

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-Site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer

1. Down (Closed) 1. Down (Closed) 1. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 3. Up (Open) 3. Up (Open) 3. Up (Open) 4. Down (Closed) 4. Down (Closed) 4. Up (Open) 5. Down (Closed) 5. Down (Closed) 5. Down (Closed) 6. Up (Open) 6. Up (Open) 6. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 9. Down (Closed) 9. Down (Closed) 9. Down (Closed) 10. Up (Open) 10. Up (Open) 10. Up (Open)




Capetronics Modem with “Don’t care” Switches

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer 1. Open 1. Open 1. Open 2. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 3. Closed 3. Closed 3. Closed 4. Closed 4. Closed 4. Open 5. Closed 5. Closed 5. Closed 6. Closed 6. Closed 6. Closed 7. Open 7. Open 7. Open 8. Open 8. Open 8. Open 9. Closed 9. Closed 9. Closed 10. Open 10. Open 10. Open




Okidata Modem Switch SettingsIf you are using an Okidata Okitel 1200, the switches are located on the back of the modem and need to be in the following positions:

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer 1. Up 1. Up 1. Up 2. Down 2. Down 2. Down 3. Up 3. Up 3. Up 4. Down 4. Down 4. Down 5. Down 5. Down 5. Up 6. Up 6. Up 6. Down 7. Up 7. Up 7. Up 8. Down 8. Down 8. Up




SOFTWARE KEYA software security key is required when using the remote FCC/SCC II software or the ECC/WCC II Enhanced Color Graphics. The “key” is not a mechanical key which opens a lock but rather a “software key” which has a computer program in it. The software that requires a key will periodically look for the key. If the key is not there, the program will not run.

The “software key” plugs into a “key-ring.” The key-ring is then installed in the printer port (LPT1) of the computer. If a printer is used, the printer then plugs into the other end of the key-ring.

To install the key, follow these directions:

Remove “power” to the personal computer and printer.Remove the printer cable from the personal computer.Insert the “key” in the “key-ring.”Plug the “key-ring” into the printer port on the computer.Connect the printer cable to the “key-ring.”Reconnect power to the printer and computer.

Notes: (1) The printer does not have to be present for the key to operate. (2) The parallel port (printer port) must be 100% IBM compatible. (3) If your computer has more than one parallel port, the key must be connected to parallel port #1 (LPT1).

1.2.3.4.

5.6.

Section 5: Installation Guide



SECTION 5: INSTALLATION GUIDE____________________________________________________

OPERATOR CONTROL CONSOLEThe Operator Control Console (personal computer) must be kept in a clean and dry area in the building. The ambient temperature must be between 50 and 100 °F, and the relative humidity must be kept between 10 and 90% (non-condensing). The interior components of the CPU (personal computer) are cooled by a ventilation fan within the unit, and therefore the unit should not be kept in tightly confi ned areas. The console is designed to sit on a desk or table top which allows the operator to be seated when using the system.

The console requires 115 VAC power and must remain powered for operation and control. The power circuit must be dedicated to the Operator Control Console.

If a modem is included with the system to allow the ECC/WCC II system to communicate over telephone lines, a dedicated telephone line with a standard modular telephone jack is required. A separate dedicated telephone line is required if the “ Telephone Override” feature is used. We also recommend having a telephone near the ECC/WCC II unit which is on a separate line for troubleshooting purposes.

Note: The line for the telephone can be an extension through a switchboard, but the line for the CPU should be a dedicated line.

If troubleshooting is required for a system, a representative from the factory can call up the system with a remote computer and view the same ECC/WCC II Screens as the user in the building. The telephone would allow the user in the building to talk to the factory representative while they are both viewing the same screens.

Uninterruptable Power SupplyThe ECC/WCC II system is designed to automatically restart after a power failure. However, the personal computer which acts as the ECC/WCC II Central Processing Unit will not automatically reboot unless the power is shut off cleanly and restored cleanly. During most power outages, the voltage has great fl uctuations before the power fi nally fails. In a like manner, brownouts will usually cause the personal computer to “lock-up.” That is to say, the screen will continue to show on the monitor, but the cursor will not react to the keyboard commands.

An Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) provides emergency power to keep the ECC/WCC II Central Processing Unit (personal computer) on line for several seconds after a primary power failure. The UPS regulates the incoming power to the computer and shuts the power off cleanly several seconds after the power outage, or brownout. When the primary power is restored, the UPS brings the CPU back on-line automatically.The ECC/WCC II system does not lose any information since all of the programs and user entered data are stored on either a disk in the CPU, on fi rmware, or on battery backed memory in the satellite controllers.




MODEM SWITCH SETTINGSThe modems must be confi gured to be compatible with the ECC/WCC II system. The modem may be either a Hayes Smartmodem 1200, an ADC Phone Modem 1200, a Capetronics 1200, or an Okidata Okitel 1200.

Hayes Smartmodem 1200If you are using a Hayes Smartmodem, the confi guration switches are located behind the front cover of the modem which is removed with a small tool as shown below:

After you remove the cover, you will see a row of small toggle switches. Newer Hayes modems have 10 switches, and older Hayes modems have 8 switches. A “10-switch” modem must be used with the ECC/WCC II system (computer on-site). The remote computer can use either the 8 switch or the 10 switch modem. The switch settings need to be in the following positions:

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II Remote Printer (On-Site Computer) (Remote Computer) (300 or 1200 Baud) 1. Up 1. Up 1. Up 2. Down 2. Down 2. Down 3. Up 3. Up 3. Up 4. Down 4. Down 4. Down 5. Down 5. Down 5. Up 6. Up 6. Up 6. Down 7. Up 7. Up 7. Up 8. Down 8. Down 8. Up 9. Up 9. Up (If present) 9. Up (If present) 10. Up 10. Up (If present) 10. Up (If present)




ADC ModemIf you are using an ADC Phone modem, the confi guration switches are located on the bottom of the unit and need to be in the following positions:

Capetronics ModemThere are two versions of the Capetronics modem. One version has switches 2, 3, and 9 labeled “Don’t care.” If you are using a Capetronics modem, the confi guration switches are located on the bottom of the unit and need to be in the following positions:

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-Site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer

1. Down (Closed) 1. Down (Closed) 1. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 2. Down (Closed) 3. Up (Open) 3. Up (Open) 3. Up (Open) 4. Down (Closed) 4. Down (Closed) 4. Up (Open) 5. Down (Closed) 5. Down (Closed) 5. Down (Closed) 6. Up (Open) 6. Up (Open) 6. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 7. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 8. Up (Open) 9. Down (Closed) 9. Down (Closed) 9. Down (Closed) 10. Up (Open) 10. Up (Open) 10. Up (Open)

Capetronics Modem

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer

1. Closed 1. Closed 1. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 3. Open 3. Open 3. Open 4. Closed 4. Closed 4. Open 5. Closed 5. Closed 5. Closed 6. Open 6. Open 6. Open 7. Open 7. Open 7. Open 8. Open 8. Open 8. Open 9. Closed 9. Closed 9. Closed 10. Open 10. Open 10. Open




Capetronics Modem with “Don’t care” Switches

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer 1. Open 1. Open 1. Open 2. Closed 2. Closed 2. Closed 3. Closed 3. Closed 3. Closed 4. Closed 4. Closed 4. Open 5. Closed 5. Closed 5. Closed 6. Closed 6. Closed 6. Closed 7. Open 7. Open 7. Open 8. Open 8. Open 8. Open 9. Closed 9. Closed 9. Closed 10. Open 10. Open 10. Open




Okidata Okitel 1200If you are using an Okidata Okitel 1200, the switches are located on the back of the modem and need to be in the following positions:

ECC/WCC II FCC/SCC II (On-site Computer) (Remote Computer) Remote Printer 1. Up 1. Up 1. Up 2. Down 2. Down 2. Down 3. Up 3. Up 3. Up 4. Down 4. Down 4. Down 5. Down 5. Down 5. Up 6. Up 6. Up 6. Down 7. Up 7. Up 7. Up 8. Down 8. Down 8. Up




SOFTWARE KEYA software security key is required when using the remote FCC/SCC II software or the ECC/WCC II Enhanced Color Graphics. The “key” is not a mechanical key which opens a lock, but rather a “software key” which has a computer program in it. The software that requires a key will periodically look for the key. If the key is not there, the program will not run.

The “software key” plugs into a “key-ring.” The key-ring is then installed in the printer port (LPT1) of the computer. If a printer is used, the printer then plugs into the other end of the key-ring.

To install the key, follow these directions:

Remove “power” to the personal computer and printer.Remove the printer cable from the personal computer.Insert the “key” in the “key-ring.”Plug the “key-ring” into the printer port on the computer.Connect the printer cable to the “key-ring.”Reconnect power to the printer and computer.

Notes: (1) The printer does not have to be present for the key to operate. (2) The parallel port (printer port) must be 100% IBM compatible. (3) If your computer has more than one parallel port, the key must be connected to parallel port #1 (LPT1).

1.2.3.4.

5.6.




SATELLITE CONTROLLER

Mounting in an EnclosureThe satellite controllers are designed to mount in any standard, six inch deep, ventilated electrical enclosure. Typically, this fi eld-mounted enclosure contains transformers and any accessory items required such as a binary input board, control relay, etc. The best location for these panels is wall mounted in equipment or storage rooms at eye level near the controlled loads.

The satellite controllers may be ordered with or without the enclosure. If you order the satellite controller from the factory without an enclosure, the following SAT II dimensions may be helpful when selecting an enclosure:




The satellite controller must be mounted in an enclosure. If you do not order the satellite controller with an enclosure, you must provide your own ventilated enclosure and provide and install your own fused disconnect switch, transformer, and terminal strip.

The size of the standard enclosure designed to hold one satellite controller, one fused disconnect switch, one transformer, one fi lter, and one terminal strip is 15” x 15” x 6.” The size of the standard enclosure designed to hold two satellite controllers, one fused disconnect switch, two transformers, two fi lters, and two terminal strips is 30” x 18” x 6.” If you install the satellite controller yourself, make sure you leave room for wires to be connected to the following terminals which are located on the side of the satellite controller (minimum recommended clearance is 2 inches):

24 VAC power sourceCommunication loopReference voltage

A typical SAT II panel is shown below:

1.2.3.




If you order the satellite controller in an enclosure, the factory will provide and install the wires from the transformer to the satellite. If you order the satellite controller separately, you must provide and install the wires from the transformer to the satellite controller. A typical satellite controller wiring diagram is shown below:




System WiringThe Central Processing Unit (CPU) can communicate with up to 240 satellite controllers via a two-wire communication loop. The two-wire communication loop should be a twisted pair of 18 gauge wire and shielded. Stranded wire is recommended to insure a good connection with the ¼ inch sta-con connectors which are used to terminate the wires at the CPU and the satellite controllers. The communication wire does not have to be run from each satellite controller back to the CPU but rather can be “daisy-chained” which means only one twisted pair of wires is connected to the CPU. The maximum allowable length of wire from the CPU to the farthest satellite is 1500 feet.

Note: A length greater than 1500 feet is allowed under certain circumstances. Consult the factory for assistance if the communication loop required for your application will exceed 1500 feet.

The ECC/WCC II system architecture is shown below:




The communication loop wires are connected to the “R/T” and “C” terminals on the satellite controllers using ¼ inch sta-con connectors. Make sure the polarity is correct. That is to say, the wire connected to the “ R/T” terminal on the CPU must be connected to the “R/T” terminal on the satellite controllers. If the “R/T” and “ C” wires are crossed, the ECC/WCC II system will not work. The shield should be connected together when the cable is cut to terminate the wires at the satellite controller.

The wire which makes up the communication loop should be shielded. Shielded cable has an aluminum jacket over the wires which acts as an “antenna” to carry away any “stray” electrical signals which can interfere with the communication process. The shield should be grounded at one end only, preferably at the CPU as shown below:




The communication loop wire from the CPU is connected to one of the “R/T” and one of the “C” terminals on the satellite controller which is physically located nearest the CPU. The other “ R/T” and “ C” terminals located on the satellite controller can be used to extend the two-wire loop to the next satellite controller, or the wires can branch off of a two-wire loop running through the center of a building as shown below:




Addressing (Numbering) SAT II ControllersThe ECC/WCC II system can have up to 240 SAT II controllers. In order for the central computer to communicate properly with each individual SAT II controller, each controller must be assigned a separate number, or address. The number is assigned by placing the small toggle switches on the front of the SAT II controller marked “SAT NUMBER” in the proper position.

The toggle switches are additive; that is to say placing switches 1 and 2 in the ON position will cause the SAT II controller to be identifi ed as satellite controller number 3. The SAT II controller looks at the position of these switches only when it is going through its initialization process after being powered up. Simply changing the switch positions on a SAT II controller which is presently “on-line” will not change its number. The switches need to be placed in the proper position before powering up the SAT II controller, or the SAT II must be powered down and then back up for the SAT II to “read” the new position of the switches. When placing the switches in the desired position, make sure the switch has “clicked” into place and is properly seated.

Care must be taken to insure that two SAT II controllers do not have the same address. When this condition is present, the central computer does not know where to send the information, and the information which should be sent to the SAT II controller is usually lost.

You should be aware of the symptoms caused by two satellite controllers having the same number. Let’s consider a new job in which the satellite controllers have not yet been programmed and 2 SAT II controllers are named number #3. When you call up satellite controller #3 to enter data, everything will appear to be fi ne. You will be able to enter data on the screens as if nothing is wrong. However, when you leave a screen and then return to the same screen, all of the data you entered will be missing. Also, if you fi nish programming the analog inputs for example, and then go to the analog input summary screen to review your inputs, all of the data you have entered will be missing.




Another situation which you might encounter is adding a SAT II controller to an existing system and accidentally giving it the same number as a SAT II presently “on-line.” Again, when you begin to program the new SAT II controller, everything will appear fi ne until you leave a screen or if you go to a summary screen. Only now, all of the data is usually not missing. Generally, you get parts of your data back and parts will be missing.

If you suspect you might have two SAT II controllers with the same address, number 3 for example, the best thing to do is go to the SAT II controller that you know is number 3, and remove the 2-wire communication loop from it. Then go back to the computer and call up satellite controller #3. If the computer can still “talk” to satellite controller #3, then there is another satellite controller named #3 somewhere on the loop.

If a satellite controller was accidentally addressed #3, there will be a satellite number missing. For example, if satellite controller #7 was accidentally named #3, satellite controller #7 will not be present. One way of telling which satellite controllers are “on-line” is to go to the Satellite Summary Screen (page 3-38) and see which satellite controllers the computer recognizes as being “on-line.”

Note: When a new satellite controller is connected to an existing ECC/WCC II system, the data tables must be rebuilt before the computer will “see” the new satellite controller on the loop. Refer to the ECC/WCC II Operator’s Manual for more details on performing the “Control-T” function to rebuild data tables.

If satellite controller #7 was accidentally named #3, there would not be a satellite controller named #7, and the computer will give a “Non-Existing” message for satellite controller # 7.




SAT II Chip SwitchesThe standard SAT II controller is capable of providing 16 binary (on/off) outputs. The SAT II controllers are modular in design, and therefore, if binary outputs are not required, the chip switches which allow the SAT II to provide binary outputs do not have to be purchased. Each binary output requires 1 chip switch which must be purchased separately and fi eld installed. Chip switches come in packages of 8.

The terminals for the binary outputs are found at the lower left hand corner of the SAT II controller and are labeled H, COM, and C. The chip switches can be thought of as the electronic equivalent of a relay which can make or break a 24 VAC circuit between the COM to H or COM to C terminals. The COM to H contacts are referred to as K1h-K8h, and the COM to C contacts are referred to as K1c-K8c. K stands for contact, and the numbers 1-8 stand for the channel on the SAT II controller.

The chip switch location for each binary output is shown below. The chip switch serving the COM to H contact on channel 1 is labeled “1H,” etc.

Notice that the distance between the legs on the chip switch are different to insure that the chip switches are not installed backwards. The chip switches must be installed carefully, making sure not to bend the metal legs. To install the chip switches, insert the bottom legs part-way into the IC socket, and then insert the top legs part-way. Check to make sure all of the legs are started properly and then gently push down on the chip until it is fi rmly in place.




SAT II V-Out (DAC) ModulesThe SAT II controller has the capability of providing 8 analog output signals which have a maximum range of 0-15 VDC. The SAT II controllers are modular in design, and therefore, if analog outputs are not required, the V-out modules do not have to be purchased. If the analog outputs are required, 1 V-out module is required for 4 analog outputs, and 2 V-out modules can be installed in one SAT II controller to allow 1 SAT II controller to provide up to 8 analog outputs. The V-out modules must be ordered separately and are usually fi eld installed.

The V-out modules are installed in the sockets labeled “U9” and “U14” as shown below. The V-Out module in the “U9” location serves analog outputs 1-4. The V-out module in the “U14” location serves analog outputs 5-8.

Each V-out module has a notch on one end which needs to be nearest the left end of the SAT II controller as you are facing the SAT II controller as shown below.

WARNING: The V-out module will be destroyed if it is installed backwards, so care should be taken to make sure the module is installed properly before the SAT II controller is powered up.

To install the V-out modules, carefully insert the bottom legs part-way into the IC socket and then insert the top legs part-way. Check to make sure all of the legs are started properly and then gently push down until the module is fi rmly in place.

Note: Later versions of the satellite controllers require two modules for each set of four analog outputs. On these models, sockets U-9 and U-10 activate outputs 1-4, and U-11 and U-14 activate outputs 5-8.




Binary Input BoardThe Binary Input Module is an optional integrated circuit board which can interface with the SAT II controller to allow it to monitor the status of remote mounted binary (on/off) devices such as switch closures, air fl ow switches, etc. One binary input board enables the SAT II controller to monitor up to 8 binary inputs, and 2 binary input boards can be used with 1 SAT II controller for a total of 16 binary inputs per SAT II controller.

The SAT II controller comes standard with 16 small toggle switches on its front panel labeled L1-L16 which are in effect manually controlled binary inputs. The ECC/WCC II monitors the on/off status of these switches and can control and/or alarm based on the position of these switches. The binary input module allows the toggle switches to be replaced with a terminal strip which accepts wiring for remote mounted binary input devices.

The SAT II controller has two sets of eight small toggle switches on its front panel labeled L1-L16. Switches L1-L8 are housed together in one module, and switches L9-L16 are housed together in another module. One module of switches is removed for each binary input board and is replaced with a ribbon cable which connects the binary input board to the SAT II controller. The binary devices to be monitored are then wired to the terminal strip of the binary input board. The binary input board requires a 24 VAC power source.




V-Out Binary Interface BoardA standard SAT II controller is capable of providing 8 analog outputs and 16 binary outputs. The V-Out Binary Interface Board ( V-out board) allows the user to obtain additional binary outputs from the SAT II controller by converting the analog outputs to binary outputs.

Chip switches located on the V-out board open and close based on the 0-15 VDC signal from the analog outputs. The chip switches on the V-out board are identical to those used for the binary outputs on the SAT II controller and are the electronic equivalent of a relay used to complete a 24 VAC circuit to energize on/off devices such as relays.

The changeover setpoint along with the hysteresis is adjustable at the V-out board. The changeover setpoint is the DC voltage required to open the chip switches on the V-out board. The hysteresis is the amount the voltage signal must change before the switch changes state. The changeover setpoint is set at 7.5 VDC at the factory, and the hysteresis is set at 2 VDC.

The board has one changeover setpoint and one hysteresis setpoint which affects all eight binary outputs unless optional potentiometers are ordered separately. One potentiometer is required for each separate changeover setpoint, and one potentiometer is required for each separate hysteresis setpoint. Therefore, a binary output board with a separate changeover and hysteresis setpoint for each binary output would require 16 potentiometers.

Each binary output on the V-out board has a chip located near it which is labeled “LTC 1041.” The DC voltage difference between pin 3 on this chip and ground is the DC voltage required to open the binary output contact. The DC voltage between pin 5 on the “LTC 1041” chip and ground is the value of the hysteresis for the binary output. The voltage between pin 3 and ground and pin 5 and ground can be changed by adjusting the corresponding potentiometer.

If you have a standard V-out board, R19 is the potentiometer which controls the changeover setpoint and is marked “SET 1.” Potentiometer R9 controls the value of hysteresis and is labeled “DELTA 1.” To adjust the changeover setpoint, use a meter to measure the DC voltage between pin 3 and ground as you adjust potentiometer R19, and to adjust the hysteresis, measure the DC voltage between pin 5 and ground as you adjust potentiometer R9.




If you ordered a V-out board which has more than one pair of potentiometers to allow you to have different changeover and hysteresis setpoints for the binary outputs, the potentiometers are labeled as follows:

To understand the V-out board better, consider a changeover setpoint of 7.5 VDC with a hysteresis of 1 VDC. The chip switch on the V-out board will open when the voltage is 8 VDC and will not close until the voltage drops to 7 VDC. Assume the Analog Input Screen on the ECC/WCC II system is set up according to the following parameters:

Changeover Setpoint Hysteresis ----------------------- ---------------------------Binary Output Potentiometer Label Potentiometer Label------------- ------------- -------- -------------- ----------- 1 R19 “SET 1” R9 “DELTA 1” 2 R20 “SET 2” R10 “DELTA 2” 3 R21 “SET 3” R11 “DELTA 3” 4 R22 “SET 4” R12 “DELTA 4” 5 R23 “SET 5” R13 “DELTA 5” 6 R24 “SET 6” R14 “DELTA 6” 7 R25 “SET 7” R15 “DELTA 7” 8 R26 “SET 8” R16 “DELTA 8”

Output = 0.0 volts DC when the Space Temperature = 65 Deg F Output = 15.0 volts DC when the Space Temperature = 80 Deg F

Space Temperature Voltage Supplied to (°F) the V-out Board ----------------------- --------------------- 65 0.0 --------------------------- 66 1.0 67 2.0 68 3.0 Chip Switch Closed 69 4.0 70 5.0 71 6.0 72 7.0 --------------------------- 72.5 Setpoint 7.5 Hysteresis 73 8.0 --------------------------- 74 9.0 75 10.0 76 11.0 Chip Switch Open 77 12.0 78 13.0 79 14.0 80 15.0 ---------------------------




When the space temperature rises to 73 °F, the voltage supplied to the V-out board from the SAT II controller will be 8 VDC which will cause the chip switch to open. As the space temperature drops to 72 °F, the voltage supplied to the V-out board will be 7 VDC which will cause the chip switch to close.

The V-out board can convert from 1 to 8 of the analog outputs to binary outputs. One digital to analog converter (DAC or V-out module) is required for each set of 4 analog outputs to be converted to binary outputs. Therefore, if 1 to 4 analog outputs are to be converted to binary outputs, 1 V-out module is required, and if 5 to 8 analog outputs are to be converted to binary outputs, 2 V-out modules are required. One chip switch is required for each binary output. The DAC module(s) and chip switches must be ordered separately.

Typical Wiring Diagram




Proportional-Integral (PI) Output BoardThe Proportional-Integral (PI) Board is a separate integrated circuit board which works in conjunction with the SAT II controller to convert a pair of SAT II binary outputs to a varying DC voltage signal. When one contact on the SAT II controller closes, the voltage supplied by the PI board will ramp down at a pre-set rate. When the other SAT II contact closes, the voltage ramps up at the preset rate. When both contacts are open, the voltage supplied by the PI board will remain at its present value. The maximum DC voltage range is 0-14.5 volts, and the minimum allowable resistance of the controlled device is 1000 ohms.

The DC voltage range along with the ramp speed is set at the PI board. The ramp speed can be adjusted from 28 seconds to 38 minutes, and the maximum range is 0-14.5 volts DC.




The PI board has terminals labeled as follows:

Terminal Block #1 (TB1) HEAT (TB1-1) COM1 (TB1-2) COOL (TB1-3) COM2 (TB1-4) 24VAC (TB1-5) GND (TB1-6)

Terminal Block #2 (TB2) ANALOG OUT (TB2-1) GND (TB2-3&4)

24 VAC (TB1-5) & GND (TB1-6)

The PI board requires a 24 VAC power supply which is connected to these terminals. The PI board is generally powered by the same 24 VAC transformer that powers the satellite controller.

HEAT (TB1-1) & COM1 (TB1-2)

When 24 volts AC is supplied between the “HEAT” and “COM1” terminals, the DC voltage supplied by the PI board will start increasing at the set ramp speed.

COOL (TB1-1) & COM2 (TB1-4)

When 24 volts AC is supplied between the “COOL” and “COM2” terminals, the voltage supplied by the PI board will start decreasing at the set ramp speed.

ANALOG OUT (TB2-1) & GND (TB2-3&4)

The “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” terminals supply the DC voltage from the PI board.

Adjust Minimum Voltage

The PI board is factory set for a minimum voltage of 0 VDC +/- 0.2 VDC. If you want a minimum voltage other than 0 VDC, you can reset it by adjusting the potentiometer (pot) labeled “R9.” The voltage between test point #3 (labeled “TP #3” on the PI board) and ground is set 300 mV lower than the desired minimum voltage. That is to say, if you want 5 VDC as the minimum voltage to be supplied between the “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” terminals, adjust pot “R9” to get 4.7 VDC between “TP #3” and “GND.”

Note: The minimum voltage setpoint must be lower than the maximum voltage setpoint.

Adjust Maximum Voltage

The PI board is factory set for a maximum voltage of 14.5 VDC +/- 0.2 VDC. If you want a maximum voltage other than 14.5 VDC, you can reset it by adjusting the potentiometer (pot) labeled “R10.” The voltage between test point #2 (labeled “TP #2” on the PI board) and ground is set at 300 mV above the desired maximum voltage. That is to say, if you want a maximum voltage of 10 VDC to be supplied by the “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” terminals, adjust pot “R10” to get 10.3 VDC between “TP #2” and “GND.”

Note: The maximum voltage setpoint must be higher than the minimum voltage setpoint.

Adjust “ Ramp” Speed

The ramp speed is the time it takes for the DC voltage between the “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” terminals to change from the minimum voltage to the maximum voltage and vice versa. The ramp speed is factory set at about 19 minutes. If you want a ramp speed other than 19 minutes, you can reset it by adjusting potentiometer (pot) R2. When R2 is fully counterclockwise, the ramp speed is 38 minutes (+/- 10%), and when R2 is fully clockwise, the ramp speed is 23 seconds (+/- 10%). As the voltage is ramping up, the small light labeled D1 will fl ash and as the voltage is ramping down, the small light labeled D2 will fl ash.

If you want to test the ramp speed, disconnect all wires from the “HEAT,” “COM1,” “COOL,” and “COM2” terminals and use a volt meter to measure the DC voltage between “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” as you jumper test point #4 (TP #4) to ground.

The voltage should increase from the minimum to the maximum voltage during the set time interval. Then remove the jumper from “TP #4” and jumper “TP #5” to “GND.” The voltage between the “ANALOG OUT” and “GND” terminals should decrease from the maximum to the minimum voltage during the set time interval.

If only 1 contact closure is available to drive the PI board, move jumper J01 on the PI board to the B-C position.




Sequence of OperationWhen the SAT II controller makes COM to H, 24 VAC is supplied to the “HEAT” terminal on the PI board which causes the DC voltage supplied by the PI board to increase at the preset rate.

When the SAT II controller makes COM to C, 24 VAC is supplied to the “COOL” terminal on the PI board which causes the DC voltage supplied by the PI board to decrease at the preset rate.

When both the COM to H and COM to C terminals are open on the SAT II controller, the DC voltage supplied by the PI board will remain at its present value.

Typical PI-Board Wiring Diagram




Temperature SensorsTemperature Industries offers the following temperature sensors to be used with the ECC/WCC II system.

SENSOR DESCRIPTION CONTROL

RANGE

(°F)ETS-1/WRS-1 2-Wire, Surface Mounted Rm

Temp Sensor40 - 90

ETC-1F/WRS-1F 2-Wire, Flush Mounted Rm Temp Sensor

40 - 90

ETS-2F/WRS-1F3 3-Wire, Flush Mounted Rm Temp Sensor

40 - 90

ETS-3/WDS-1 2-Wire, Air/Water Temp Sensor 30 - 120or 40 - 240

ETS-4/WOS-1 2-Wire, Outdoor Air Temp Sensor

-20 - 150

2-Wire Sensors

The “+V” terminal on the SAT II controller is a 12 VDC power source. The temperature sensor is a current transducer which transmits a current proportional to the temperature it is sensing. The load resistor on the front of the SAT II controller is in series with the temperature sensor and connects the “ATI” terminal to the “GND” terminal. The ECC/WCC II system monitors the voltage between the “ATI” terminal and “GND” on the SAT II controller to determine the temperature sensed by the sensor. The system is designed for 1 VDC between “ATI” and “GND” to represent the 100% scale value on the Analog Input Screen, and 0 VDC represents the 0% scale value. The maximum allowable voltage across the load resistor is 1.2 volts.

The specifi cations of the temperature sensor determine the value of the SAT II load resistor and the 0% and 100% scale value on the Analog Input Screen. The load resistors must be ordered separately and fi eld installed. 10 resistors come in one package.

The air/water temperature sensor is used to monitor the temperature of the air in duct work or the temperature of fl uid in a pipe. For fl uid pipe applications, the probe may be removed from the transmitter, strapped to the pipe, and thermally insulated from the ambient air, and the transmitter mounted remotely by extending the two wires connecting the probe to the transmitter. The transmitter may be located up to 100 feet from the probe, or the sensor may be mounted in an immersion well with the use of thermal compound to insure good thermal conduction between the water and the sensor. For chilled water sensing, it is highly recommended that the sensing element be removed from the transmitter (control head) to prevent condensation in the head.

The air/water sensor has two temperature ranges available, depending on which load resistor is used. A 100 ohm load resistor gives the sensor a control range of 30-120 °F, and a 50 ohm load resistor gives the sensor a control range of 40-240 °F.

3-Wire Temperature Sensor

The 3-wire temperature sensor accomplishes the same thing as the 2-wire sensor, only you can think of the resistor being in the sensor and not at the satellite controller. The 3-wire sensor is wired to the “+V,” “ATI,” and “GND” terminals on the SAT II controller. The 3-wire sensor transmits a voltage between “ATI” and “GND” which corresponds to temperature, and therefore, a resistor at the SAT II controller is not required.

The following table shows the required load resistor and the values for the Analog Input Screen.

TEMPERATURE

SENSOR

LOAD

RESISTOR

(Ohms)

DATA

PATTERN

0%

SCALE

100%

SCALE2-Wire Surface Mount

100 XXX.X 0.0 100.0

2-Wire Flush Mount

301 XXX.X 0.0 100.0

3-Wire Flush Mount

None XXX.X 0.0 100.0

Air/Water 100 XXX.X 0.0 100.0Air/Water 50 XXX.X 0.0 200.0Outdoor Air 50 XXX.X -50.0 150.0

4-20 MA Sensors

Sensors that provide 4-20 mA signals can be used with the SAT II controllers. The SAT II controllers are designed to have 1 VDC across the load resistors at full scale and 0 VDC across the load resistors at 0% scale. Since the load resistors have 20 mA through them at full scale, and 1 VDC is required across the load resistor, a 4-20 mA sensor requires a 50 ohm load resistor.

V 1 Volt R = --------- = -------------- = 50 Ohms I 0.020 Amps

When programming the Analog Input Screen for a 4-20 mA sensor, the 100% scale value is the value represented when the sensor sends 20 mA to the SAT II controller, and the 0% scale value is the value represented when the sensor sends 0 mA to the SAT II controller. For example, consider a 4-20 mA sensor which measures duct static pressure.The sensor provides 4 mA when the duct static pressure is 0 inches of water column and 20 mA when




the duct pressure is 2 inches of water column. The 100% scale value on the Analog Input Screen is 2.00” W.C., and the 0% scale value is -0.50” W.C.

The full scale value is fairly straightforward and easy to understand. The 0% scale value on the other hand is a bit more complicated. The following table shows the signal out of the sensor versus the duct static pressure.

Signal from Sensor (mA) Duct Static Pressure20 2.00” W.C.16 1.50” W.C.12 1.00” W.C.8 0.50” W.C.4 0.00” W.C.0 -0.50” W.C.

When programming the Analog Input Screen, the 0% scale value is the value when 0 mA are supplied by the sensor. Since 0 mA represent -0.50” W.C., -0.50” W.C. is input for the 0% scale value.

0 - 1, 0 - 5 and 0 - 1- VDC Sensors

The SAT II can accept a 0-1, 0-5, or a 0-10 VDC signal from a sensor. Since the SAT II is designed for 1 VDC across the load resistor to represent the full scale value of the analog input, the voltage from the 0-10 and 0-5 VDC sensors needs to be reduced before it reaches the SAT II controller. This is accomplished by placing a line resistor in the circuit in addition to the load resistor. The following table shows the recommended value of the line and load resistor to be used.

SIGNAL FROM

SENSOR

LINE RESISTOR

(Ohms)

LOAD RESISTOR

(Ohms)0 - 10 VDC 9000 10000-5 VDC 4000 10000-1 VDC None 10000

Note: Check the manufacturer’s specifi cations to determine if a ground wire needs to be connected from the sensor to the “GND” terminal on the SAT II controller.




SAT II-A/TUCThe system architecture for the ECC/WCC II system interfacing with TUC’s through SAT II-A’s is shown below:




The SAT II-A

The STATUS 1 light on the front of the SAT II-A controller should fl icker. If it is off or on solid, the SAT II-A is not operating properly.

The function of STATUS lights 2 and 3 has not been defi ned at this time.

The RECV light fl ickers when the SAT II-A is receiving information from the TUC’s.

The XMIT light fl ickers when the SAT II-A sends information to the TUC’s.

The POWER light should be on continuously when there is power to the SAT II-A.




Addressing the SAT II-AThere can be up to 60 SAT II-A’s connected together on a 2-wire communication loop. In order for the ECC/WCC II system to communicate properly with each SAT II-A, each SAT II-A must be assigned a separate number (address). The number is assigned by positioning the small toggle switches on the front of the SAT II-A in the proper position. The toggle switches are housed together in a block as shown below:

When the switch is in the ON position, it represents the number on the right in the drawing. That is, when switch 4 is ON and all of the other switches are off, the SAT II-A is addressed (named) #4. The switches are additive. That is to say, when switches 4 and 8 are ON, and all of the other switches are OFF, the SAT II-A is addressed #12. The SAT II-A looks at the position of the switch setting during its power-up cycle. If you need to readdress a SAT II-A, you must change the switch settings, turn off the power to the SAT II-A, and then turn the SAT II-A back on again.

When the LOCAL switch is in the ON position, the TUC’s will operate according to their “local set” setpoints. That is, the TUC’s will operate as if the front end computer is off-line, but the SAT II-A is still present.

The test mode is active if the TEST switch is in the ON position. The word “TEST” can be input as the binary value on the EA Driver Screen to select the alternate setpoints. When you want to check the operation of the alternate setpoints, place the TEST switch in the ON position.




Addressing (Numbering) TUC’sThere can be up to 32 TUC’s connected together on a 3-wire communication loop. In order for the SAT II-A to communicate properly with each individual TUC, each TUC must be assigned a separate address (number) from 1 to 32. The number is assigned by positioning the small toggle switches on the TUC board in the proper position. The toggle switches are housed together in a block as shown below:

When the switch is in the “On” position, it represents the number on the right in the above drawing. That is, when switch #3 is “On” and all of the other switches are “Off,” the TUC is named #4. The switches are additive. That is to say, when switches 1 and 2 are “On,” the TUC is named #3.




SAT II-A Wiring Diagram




SAT II-BThe SAT II-B is a version of a satellite controller used to allow the ECC/WCC II to communicate with the remote mounted TUC-VR’s.

System ArchitectureThe system architecture for the ECC/WCC II system interfacing with TUC-VR’s through a SAT II-B is shown below:




SAT II-B - General Information

The STATUS 1 light on the front of the SAT II-B controller should fl icker. If it is off or on solid, the SAT II-B is not operating properly.

The function of STATUS lights 2 and 3 have not been defi ned at this time.

The RECV light fl ickers when the SAT II-A is receiving information from the TUC’s.

The XMIT light fl ickers when the SAT II-B sends information to the TUC’s.

The POWER light should be on continuously when there is power to the SAT II-B.

•

•

•

•

•




Addressing (Numbering) the SAT II-BIn order for the ECC/WCC II system to communicate properly with each SAT II-B, each SAT II-B must be assigned a separate number (address). The number is assigned by positioning the small toggle switches on the front of the SAT II-B in the proper position. The toggle switches are housed together in a block as shown below:

When the switch is in the ON position, it represents the number on the right in the drawing. That is, when switch 4 is ON, and all of the other switches are OFF, the SAT II-B is addressed (named) #4. The switches are additive. That is to say, when switches 4 and 8 are ON, and all of the other switches are OFF, the SAT II-B is addressed #12. The SAT II-B looks at the position of the switch setting during its power-up cycle. If you need to readdress a SAT II-B, you must change the switch settings, turn off the power to the SAT II-B, and then turn the SAT II-B back on again.

When the LOCAL switch is in the ON position, the TUC’s will operate according to their “local set” setpoints. That is, the TUC’s will operate as if the front end computer is off-line, but the SAT II-B is still present.

The test mode is active if the TEST switch is in the ON position. The word “TEST” can be input as the binary value on the EA Driver Screen to select the alternate setpoints. When you want to check the operation of the alternate setpoints, place the TEST switch in the ON position.




SAT II-B Wiring DiagramThe SAT II-B is wired to the front end computer (CPU), and the TUC-VR is wired to the SAT II-B as shown below:




CPU to SAT II-B WiringUse low capacitance, 18 gauge twisted pair, shielded for lengths up to 2000 feet from the CPU to the farthest satellite.

Ground the shield at the CPU (personal computer) chassis only (do not ground the shield at each SAT II-B).

It may be necessary to install a terminating resistor between the “R/T” and “C” terminals on the farthest satellite from the CPU (front end personal computer) if intermittent communication is present. The terminating resistor is more apt to be required on jobs that have a lot of communication wire and/or the communication wire capacitance is relatively high. A resistance value of 5 to 20 ohms is used. Generally, start with a 10 ohm resistor.

1.

2.

3.




TUC-VR




Room Temperature SensorThe WRS-1FVR fl ush mount or the TRS-VR wall thermostat may be use with the TUC-VR. Both units require 4 wires from the sensor to the TUC-VR. Use 18-22 gauge 4 conductor cable (stranded or solid) for runs up to 100 feet. The wire should be twisted with a minimum of 1½ turns per foot.

CAUTION: Do not install the cable in the same conduit as power wiring. If it is necessary to install the cable in areas of high RFI/EMI, the cable must be installed in conduit. Do not use shielded cable of any kind.

Isolation TransformerEach TUC-VR must be powered by its own transformer. A 24V/24V isolation transformer is provided with each TUC-VR.

CAUTION: Do not ground the secondary of the transformer. Transformer frame must be grounded via ground wire or conduit.

Aux, Max and Min PotentiometersThe TUC-VR also has 3 potentiometers labeled “AUX,” “MAX,” AND “MIN.” The AUX potentiometer provides the “LOCAL SET SETPOINT” for different items, depending on the position of the function switches as shown below:

VAV Box Aux Set Point 1. Cooling Only MWU 2. Staged Reheat Reheat 3. Time Prop. Reheat Reheat 4. Prop Reheat Valve Reheat

Parallel Fan Box 5. Cooling Only Fan 6. Staged Reheat Fan 7. Time Prop. Reheat Fan 8. Prop. Reheat Valve Fan

Series Fan Box 9. Cooling Only Reheat 10. Staged Reheat Reheat 11. Time Prop. Reheat Reheat 12. Prop. Reheat Valve Reheat

The MAX potentiometer is adjusted for the maximum air fl ow allowed through the terminal unit. The MIN potentiometer is adjusted for the minimum air fl ow allowed through the terminal unit.




Plug In Communication ModuleIf the TUC-VR is used with the ECC/WCC II system, the TVR-CM communication module is required. If the TUC-VR is to be used in the stand-alone mode, this module is not required.

There can be up to 32 TUC’s connected together on a 2-wire communication loop. In order for the SAT II-B to communicate properly with each individual TUC-VR, each TUC-VR must be assigned a separate address (number) from 1 to 32. The number is assigned by positioning the small toggle switches on the TUC-VR communication module in the proper position. The toggle switches are housed together in a block as shown below:

Switch Position

TUC-VR # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 9 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 11 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 12 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 13 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 15 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 16 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 18 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 19 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 21 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 22 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 23 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 25 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 26 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 27 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 28 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 29 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 30 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 31 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 32 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF




The RX light on the TUC-VR will blink when the TUC-VR is receiving information from the SAT II-B.

The TX light will blink when the TUC-VR is transmitting data to the SAT II-B.

Function SwitchThe TUC-VR can be used to control several types of variable air volume (VAV) terminal units. The TUC-VR has a row of small toggle switches labeled “FUNCTION” which must be set in the proper position to cause the TUC-VR to control a specifi c type of VAV terminal unit. The FUNCTION switch settings for the various terminal units are listed below:

FUNCTION Switch Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Cooling Only (Factory Confi guration)

F F F F F F F

Cooling/Staged Electric Reheat F F F F F F FCooling/Timed Prop. Electric Reheat F F N N F F FCooling/Proportional Reheat Valve F F N F F F FParallel Fan Powered/No Reheat F N F F F F FPar Fan Pwd/Staged Elec Reheat F N F F F F FPar Fan Pwd/Time Prop Elec Reheat F N N N F F FPar Fan Pwd/Prop Reheat Valve F N N F F F F

Series Fan Powered/No Reheat F N F F N F FSeries Fan Pwd/Staged Elec Reheat F N F F N F FSeries Fan Pwd/time Prop Elec Reheat

F N N N N F F

Series Fan Pwd/Prop Reheat Valve F N N F N F F

Notes: 1) F = Off, N = On 2) The TUC-VR reads the position of the switches when it is powered up. If a change must be made to the switches, the TUC-VR must be powered down and then back up for the new switch settings to take effect.

Plug-In RelaysThe TUC-VR can provide up to 4 contact closure outputs capable of switching 24 volt AC or DC. A plug-in relay must be purchased separately for each output required. The function of the relay varies as the position of the FUNCTION switch settings on the TUC-VR varies.

FUNCTION Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay

4

VAV Box1. Cooling Only --- --- --- ---2. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg 4th Stg3. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- ---4. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- ---

Parallel Fan Box5. Cooling Only --- --- --- Fan6. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg Fan7. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- Fan8. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- Fan

Series Fan Box9. Cooling Only --- --- --- Fan10. Staged Reheat 1st Stg 2nd Stg 3rd Stg Fan11. Time Prop Reheat Heat --- --- Fan12. Prop Reheat Valve Mod Vlve Mod Vlve --- Fan

Port P1 and P2 Low/High PressureThe velocity pressure sensor is generally mounted in the inlet of the terminal unit’s primary air duct. The TUC-VR has barbed fi ttings for ¼ inch O.D. FRPE polyethylene tubing or ⅛ inch I.D. tygon tubing. The maximum length of tubing allowed is 5 feet.

The low (static) pressure signal from the velocity pressure probe is connected to port P1 on the TUC-VR, and P2 accepts the high (total) pressure signal.




TUC-VR Communication WiresThe TUC-VR communication wires must be installed in the manner shown. That is, the communication wire must go from the SAT II-B to the fi rst TUC-VR, from the fi rst to the second, the second to the third, etc.




SAT II-B to TUC-VR WiringUse low capacitance, 18 gauge, twisted pair non-shielded wire for lengths up to 4000 feet from the SAT II-B to the farthest TUC-VR.The “GND” terminal on the TUC-VR must be connected to a local chassis ground.

CAUTION: DO NOT RUN A COMMON GROUND FROM TUC-VR TO TUC-VR. THIS WILL DESTROY COMPONENTS WITHIN THE TUC-VR.

1.

2.

Operator Interfaces Index-1

Index

-->C ....................................................................... 3-14-->H ....................................................................... 3-14->C ....................................................................... 3-14->H ....................................................................... 3-14<Alt><A> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><C> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><E> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><F> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><H> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><J> ............................................................ 3-1, 3-4<Alt><L> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><N> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><Q> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><S> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><T> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Ctrl><A> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><G> ................................................................ 3-2<Ctrl><HOME> ........................................................ 3-1<Ctrl><Home> ................................................. 3-3, 3-42<Ctrl><K> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><PgUp> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Ctrl><R> .................................................3-1, 3-2, 3-27<Ctrl><S> .......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Esc> ................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<F1> .................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<F10> ................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<F9> .................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<Shift><PrtSc> ......................................................... 3-42-Wire Sensors ........................................................ 5-243-Wire Temperature Sensor .................................... 5-244-20 MA Sensors ..................................................... 5-24

A<Alt><A> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><C> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><E> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><F> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><H> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><J> ............................................................ 3-1, 3-4<Alt><L> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><N> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><Q> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><S> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><T> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Ctrl><A> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2Access Codes ............................................................ 2-6Accumulation Mode Screen .................................... 3-73Acknowledge Alarms ................................................ 3-2Active Alarms ........................................................... 3-6

ADC Modem ............................................................. 5-3ADC Modem Switch Settings ................................. 4-10Addressing (Numbering) Sat II Controllers ............ 5-13Addressing (Numbering) the SAT II-B ................... 5-33Addressing (Numbering) TUC’s ............................. 5-29Alarm

Call-Out, Automatic .......................................... 4-8Alarm Message Screen ........................................... 3-47Alarm Mode

Binary Global Screen ...................................... 3-86Alarm Summary Screen .......................................... 3-36Alarm Types .............................................................. 4-8Alt-Function Keys ..................................................... 3-1alt2 ....................................................................... 3-14altl ....................................................................... 3-14Analog

Defi ned ............................................................ 3-60Analog Global

Averaged List .................................................. 3-64Integral - Average Mode .................................. 3-69Integral Accumulation Mode ........................... 3-71Integral Mode .................................................. 3-66Look Up Table ................................................. 3-77Sorted List ....................................................... 3-65

Analog Global - Averaged List ............................... 3-64Analog Global - Averaged List Screen ................... 3-64Analog Global - Integral - Average Mode .............. 3-69Analog Global - Integral Mode ............................... 3-66Analog Global - Look Up Table Mode ................... 3-77Analog Global - Math Function Screen ................ 3-75Analog Global - Sorted List .................................... 3-65Analog Global - Sorted List Screen ........................ 3-65Analog Globals

Defi ned ............................................................ 3-60Analog Global Screen ............................................. 3-62Analog Global Summary Screen ............................ 3-61Analog Inputs ............................................................ 3-7Analog Input Screen ...........................3-9, 3-125, 3-146Analog Input Screens ............................................ 3-127Analog Input Summary Screen ................................. 3-7Analog Output Screen ............................................. 3-24Analog Output Summary Screen ............................ 3-22Analog Peak ............................................................ 3-25Analog Peak Trend Log Screen .............................. 3-27Analog Trend .......................................................... 3-25Analog Trend Trend Log Screen ............................. 3-28Arithmetic Functions .............................................. 3-75AUTOEXEC.BAT ..................................................... 2-5Automatic Call-Out on Alarm ................................... 4-8Automatic Restart ..................................................... 5-1AUX Potentiometer ................................................ 5-37

INDEX

Operator InterfacesIndex-2

Index

BBack-Up

Cassette Tape ..................................................... 2-4Floppy Disk ....................................................... 2-4

Backing-up Disks ...................................................... 2-2Backtask .................................................................... 3-6Binary Globals ........................................................ 3-80Binary Global Screen

Alarm-by-Class Mode ..................................... 3-88Alarm Mode .................................................... 3-86Combinatorial Mode ........................................ 3-82Compare Mode ................................................ 3-84External Mode ................................................. 3-87

Binary Global Screen - Combinatorial Mode ........3-118Binary Global Summary Screen ............................. 3-80Binary Input Board ................................................. 5-17Binary Input Module ............................................... 5-17Boards

Binary Input Board .......................................... 5-17Proportional-Integral (PI) Output Board ......... 5-21V-Out Binary Interface Board ......................... 5-18

Brownout ................................................................... 5-1

C<Alt><C> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Ctrl><A> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><G> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><Home> ..........................................3-1, 3-3, 3-42<Ctrl><K> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><PgUp> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Ctrl><R> .................................................3-1, 3-2, 3-27<Ctrl><S> .......................................................... 3-1, 3-2Capetronics Modem

Don’t Care Switches ................................. 4-11, 5-4Capetronics Modem Switch Settings ...................... 4-10Change-Of-State Trend Log .................................... 3-58Change of State ....................................................... 3-25Change of State Trend Log Screen ......................... 3-31Chip Switches

SAT II .............................................................. 5-15Clear Screen .............................................................. 3-3Combinatorial Mode

Binary Global Screen .....................................3-118Communication Errors

Clearing ............................................................. 3-2Communication Module

Plug In ............................................................. 5-38Communication Wires

TUC-VR .......................................................... 5-40

Compare ModeBinary Global Screen ...................................... 3-84

COM to C ....................................................... 5-15, 5-23COM to H ...................................................... 5-15, 5-23Control Output Screen ............................................ 3-12Control Output Screens

Dual Limit Screen ........................................... 3-12EA Driver ........................................................ 3-12Timeclock Screen ............................................ 3-12

Control Output Summary Screen ............................ 3-13Control Output Summary Screen - TUC ............... 3-128Copy ..................................................................... 3-121Copy Data from screen to screen .............................. 3-3Copying Data ..................................................... 2-4, 4-3Copying Disks ........................................................... 2-2CPU to SAT II-B Wiring ......................................... 5-35C Terminal ............................................................... 5-12Ctrl-Function Keys .................................................... 3-1Custom Screen .......................................................3-111C Wires .....................................................................5-11

DDelete .................................................................... 3-122Directory ............................................................... 3-123Disk

Initialization ....................................................... 4-2Disks

Backing-up ........................................................ 2-2Copying ............................................................. 2-2Formatting ......................................................... 2-2

Display Graphs .......................................................... 3-2Dual Disk Drive ........................................................ 2-1Dual Disk Drive Systems .......................................... 2-1Dual Floppy .............................................................. 2-1Dual Limit Screen .......................................... 3-12, 3-17Duct Static Pressure ................................................ 5-25Duty Cycle Screen .................................................. 3-91Duty Cycling Program ............................................ 3-91

E<Alt><E> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Esc> ................................................................. 3-1, 3-4EA Actuator ........................................................... 3-142EA Driver Output .................................................. 3-142EA Driver Screen ................................3-12, 3-15, 3-125

TUC-VR ........................................................ 3-150EA Driver Screen - TUC ....................................... 3-129EA Driver Screens ................................................. 3-149ECC/WCC II System

Requirements ..................................................... 4-2EMS ..................................................................... 3-154

Index

Energy Consumption Screen ................................... 3-53Enhanced Graphics ................................................. 3-98Enhanced Graphics Screen ................................... 3-108Exit WCC II System ............................................. 3-124

F<Alt><F> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3<F1> ................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<F10> ................................................................. 3-1, 3-4<F9> .................................................................. 3-1, 3-44-20 MA Sensors ..................................................... 5-24Facilities Control Center/Service Control Center ..... 4-1FCC/SCC II ............................................................... 4-1FCC/SCC II Main Menu ........................................... 4-5FCC/SCC II System

Requirements ..................................................... 4-2File Management Screen ....................................... 3-121Format ....................................................................... 4-2Formatting Disks ....................................................... 2-2Function Switch ...................................................... 5-39

G<Ctrl><G> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2Global

Defi ned ............................................................ 3-60Global Analog - Look Up Table Screen ................ 3-78Global Analog Accumulation Screens

Reset .................................................................. 3-2Global Analog Integral Mode - Accumulation

Mode Screen ................................................ 3-73Global Analog Screen .................................... 3-67, 3-70

Integral Mode Sliding Window ....................... 3-67Graph

Proportional Reset ........................................... 3-95Graphs

Proportional Reset ........................................... 3-93

H<Alt><H> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Ctrl><Home> ..........................................3-1, 3-3, 3-42Hard Disk Drive Systems .......................................... 2-2Hayes Smartmodem ........................................... 4-9, 5-2Help Keys .................................................................. 3-1Help Screen ............................................................... 3-1Hold Screen ............................................................... 3-2Holiday Schedule Screen ........................................ 3-41Hysteresis ................................................... 3-140, 3-141

IIdle 3-14Initializing the Disk ................................................... 4-2Installation Guide ...................................................... 5-1Instructions

Operating ........................................................... 4-4Integral - Average Mode

Global Analog Screen ...................................... 3-70Integral Accumulation Mode

Analog Global ................................................. 3-71Integral Mode - Accumulation Mode Screen .......... 3-73Integral Mode Sliding Window

Global Analog Screen ...................................... 3-67Isolation Transformer .............................................. 5-37

J<Alt><J> ............................................................ 3-1, 3-4

K<Ctrl><K> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2Keys

<Alt><A> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><C> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><E> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><F> .................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt><H> ................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><J> .................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><L> ................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><N> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Alt> .................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><Q> ................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><S> .................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Alt><T> .......................................................... 3-4<Ctrl><A> .................................................. 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><G> .................................................. 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><Home> ..................................3-1, 3-3, 3-42<Ctrl><K> .................................................. 3-1, 3-2<Ctrl><PgUp> ............................................ 3-1, 3-3<Ctrl><R> .........................................3-1, 3-2, 3-27<Ctrl><S> .................................................. 3-1, 3-2<Esc> .......................................................... 3-1, 3-4<F1> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<F10> ......................................................... 3-1, 3-4<F9> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Shift><PrtSc> ................................................. 3-4

Index

L<Alt><L> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4Line Resistor ........................................................... 5-25Lists

Tenant Utility List ..........................................3-116Load Resistor .......................................................... 5-25loc ....................................................................... 3-14Logical Address Search ............................................. 4-7Logical Address Search Screen ............................. 3-106Logical Functions .................................................... 3-76Logic Switch Screen ............................................... 3-35Logic Switch Summary Screen ............................... 3-34Look Up Table Screen

Global Analog ................................................. 3-78

MMain Menu ................................................................ 3-5Main Menu Screen .................................................... 3-5Maximum Voltage ................................................... 5-22Max Potentiometer .................................................. 5-37Menus

Main .................................................................. 3-5Message Screen .............................................. 3-6, 3-120Message Screens

Alarm ............................................................... 3-47On/Off Units of Measure ................................. 3-46

Minimum Voltage ................................................... 5-22Min Potentiometer .................................................. 5-37Modems

ADC .................................................................. 5-3Capetronics ........................................................ 5-3Hayes Smartmodem .......................................... 5-2Okidata Okitel 1200 .......................................... 5-5

Modem Switch SettingsADC ................................................................ 4-10Capetronics ...................................................... 4-10for Remote Computer ........................................ 4-9Hayes Smartmodem 1200 ................................. 4-9Okidata ............................................................ 4-12

ModulesBinary Input Module ....................................... 5-17

N<Alt><N> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-3Numbering TUC’s ................................................... 5-29

OOkidata Modem Switch Settings ............................ 4-12Okidata Okitel 1200 .................................................. 5-5On/Off Units of Measure Message Screen ............. 3-46

Operation Instructions ............................................... 4-4Operations

Copy .............................................................. 3-121Copy fi le ........................................................ 3-121Delete fi le ...................................................... 3-122Directory ........................................................ 3-123Rename .......................................................... 3-122Rename fi le .................................................... 3-122Type ............................................................... 3-123

Operator Access Codes ............................................. 2-6Assigning ........................................................... 2-6

Operator Codes Screen ........................................... 3-45Operator Control Console ......................................... 5-1Operator ID ............................................................... 2-6Operator Message Screen ..................................... 3-120Optimal Start Program ................................... 3-55, 3-57Optimal Start Screen ............................................... 3-57Override Screen ...................................................... 3-40ovr ....................................................................... 3-14

P<Alt> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Ctrl><PgUp> ................................................... 3-1, 3-3<Shift><PrtSc> ......................................................... 3-4Password Entry ......................................................... 2-7Passwords

Setting .............................................................. 3-45PI-Board Wiring Diagram ....................................... 5-23Plug-In Relays ......................................................... 5-39Plug In Communication Module ............................. 5-38Pneumatic Output Screen ...................................... 3-140Point Description Search ........................................... 4-6Point Description Search Screen ........................... 3-104Port P1 and P2 Low/High Pressure ......................... 5-39Potentiometers ......................................................... 5-37Power Failure ............................................................ 5-1Print Screen ............................................................... 3-4Program

Special Keys .................................................... 3-96Programs

Duty Cycling ................................................... 3-91Optimal Start .......................................... 3-55, 3-57Satellite Save/Restore Program ......................... 4-7Shed/Restore .................................................... 3-89

Proportional-Integral (PI) Output Board ................. 5-21Proportional Reset Graph ............................... 3-93, 3-95Proportional Reset Screen ....................................... 3-93

Q<Alt><Q> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4

Index

R<Ctrl><R> .................................................3-1, 3-2, 3-27R/T Terminal ........................................................... 5-12R/T Wires .................................................................5-11Racctask .................................................................... 4-4Ramp Speed ............................................................ 5-22Rebuild Satellite Table Screen .............................. 3-101Relational Functions ............................................... 3-76Relays

Plug-In ............................................................. 5-39Rename ................................................................. 3-122Reports

Tenant Override Report ...................... 3-115, 3-118Tenant Utility List ..........................................3-116

ResistorLine .................................................................. 5-25Load ................................................................. 5-25

revr ...................................................................... 3-14Room Temperature Sensor ...................................... 5-37Run Time Screen ..................................................... 3-37Run Time Total ........................................................ 3-25Run Time Trend Log Screen ........................ 3-32, 3-139

S<Alt><S> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-4<Ctrl><S> .......................................................... 3-1, 3-2<Shift><PrtSc> ......................................................... 3-4Sat # ........................................................................ 3-5Satellite

Backup Disks ................................................... 3-48Save Data ......................................................... 3-49

Satellite AlarmsClearing ............................................................. 3-3

Satellite Backup Disk .............................................. 3-50Satellite Controller .................................................. 3-50

Wiring Diagram ................................................. 5-9Satellite Controller Enclosure ................................... 5-7Satellite Copy Screen .............................................. 3-51Satellite Data ........................................................... 3-48Satellite Save/Restore ............................................... 3-5Satellite Save/Restore Program ................................. 4-7Satellite Summary Screen ....................................... 3-38SAT II-A ................................................................ 3-125

Diagram of ....................................................... 5-27SAT II-A Wiring Diagram ....................................... 5-30SAT II-B ......................................................... 5-31, 5-32

Addressing ....................................................... 5-33Numbering ....................................................... 5-33System Architecture ........................................ 5-31

SAT II-B to TUC-VR Wiring .................................. 5-41

SAT II-B Wiring Diagram ....................................... 5-34SAT II Chip Switches .............................................. 5-15SAT II Controller .................................................. 3-127SAT II Controllers

Addressing ....................................................... 5-13Numbering ....................................................... 5-13

SAT II Panel .............................................................. 5-8SAT II V-Out (DAC) Modules ................................ 5-16Schedule Screens

Holiday ............................................................ 3-41Week ....................................................... 3-55, 3-56

ScreenClear .................................................................. 3-3Descriptions ....................................................... 3-1Printing .............................................................. 3-4

Screen Descriptions .................................................. 3-1Screens

Alarm Message Screen .................................... 3-47Alarm Summary .............................................. 3-36Analog Global ........................................ 3-61, 3-62Analog Global - Averaged List ........................ 3-64Analog Global - Math Function Screen .......... 3-75Analog Global - Sorted List ............................ 3-65Analog Input .................................................... 3-48Analog Input Screen ....................3-9, 3-125, 3-146Analog Input Screens .................................... 3-127Analog Input Summary Screen ......................... 3-7Analog Output ........................................ 3-24, 3-48Analog Output Summary Screen ..................... 3-22Analog Peak Trend Log Screen ....................... 3-27Analog Trend Trend Log Screen ..................... 3-28Binary Global - Alarm-by-Class Mode ........... 3-88Binary Global - Alarm Mode ........................... 3-86Binary Global - Compare Mode ...................... 3-84Binary Global - External Mode ....................... 3-87Binary Global Screen -

Combinatorial Mode .................... 3-82, 3-118Binary Global Summary Screen ...................... 3-80Change of State Trend Log Screen .................. 3-31Control Output ........................................ 3-12, 3-48Control Output Summary Screen .................... 3-13Control Output Summary Screen - TUC ....... 3-128Custom Screen ................................................3-111Dual Limit Screen .................................. 3-12, 3-17Duty Cycle ....................................................... 3-91EA Driver Screen .........................3-12, 3-15, 3-125EA Driver Screen - TUC ............................... 3-129EA Driver Screens ......................................... 3-149Energy Consumption Screen ........................... 3-53Enhanced Graphics Screen ............................ 3-108File Management Screen ............................... 3-121

Index

Global AnalogIntegral Mode Sliding Window .................. 3-67

Global Analog - Integral Mode - Accumulation Mode Screen .................... 3-73

Global Analog - Look Up Table Screen ........ 3-78Global Analog Screen ...................................... 3-67

Integral - Average Mode ............................. 3-70Help ................................................................... 3-1Holiday Schedule Screen ................................. 3-41Integral - Average Mode

Global Analog ............................................ 3-70Logical Address Search ................................. 3-106Logic Switches ................................................ 3-48Logic Switch Screen ........................................ 3-35Logic Switch Summary Screen ....................... 3-34Main Menu ........................................................ 3-5Message Screen ...................................... 3-6, 3-120On/Off Units of Measure Message Screen ...... 3-46Operator Codes ................................................ 3-45Operator Message Screen .............................. 3-120Optimal Start ................................................... 3-57Override Screen ............................................... 3-40Pneumatic Output Screen .............................. 3-140Point Description Search Screen ................... 3-104Proportional Reset ........................................... 3-93Rebuild Satellite Table .................................. 3-101Run Time Screen ............................................. 3-37Run Time Trend Log Screen ................ 3-32, 3-139Satellite Copy Screen ...................................... 3-51Satellite Summary Screen ............................... 3-38Search and Override ...................................... 3-102Set Monitor Color ...........................................3-114Shed/Restore .................................................... 3-89Stepper Motor Actuator Screen ..................... 3-142System Parameter II ........................................ 3-99System Parameters Screen ............................... 3-43Tenant Override ..............................................3-115Tenant Override Report ..................................3-118Tenant Utility List ..........................................3-116Timeclock ............................................... 3-12, 3-20Trend Log ........................................................ 3-48Trend Logging Summary Screen ..................... 3-26TUC ................................................................. 3-48TUC - Analog Input ....................................... 3-127TUC - Control Output Summary Screen ....... 3-128TUC - EA Driver Screen ............................... 3-129TUC-VR Analog Input Screen ...................... 3-147TUC-VR Control Output Summary Screen .. 3-148TUC-VR EA Driver Screen ........................... 3-150TUC-VR Setup Screen .................................. 3-152TUC Set-Up Screen ....................................... 3-125TUC Setup ..................................................... 3-134

TUC Summary Screen ................................... 3-131Utility-System Parameter II Screen ................. 3-54Utility Screen ................................................... 3-98WCC/SCC File Management Screen ............ 3-121Week Schedules ............................................... 3-42Week Schedule Screen .................................... 3-56Week Schedule Summary Screen .................... 3-55

SE_DESC.DAT ......................................................... 4-6SE_GLOB.DAT ........................................................ 4-7SE_LOGIC.DAT ....................................................... 4-7Search and Override Screen .................................. 3-102Search Routines ........................................................ 4-6Set Monitor Color Screen ......................................3-114Shed/Restore Program ............................................ 3-89Shed/Restore Programs ........................................... 3-39Shed/Restore Screen ............................................... 3-89Software Key ............................................4-2, 4-13, 5-6Special Keys .............................................................. 3-3Special Keys Program ............................................. 3-96Special Purpose Keys ................................................ 3-1Sta-Con Connectors ................................................ 5-10Stepper Motor Actuator Screen ............................. 3-142Summary Screens

Alarm ............................................................... 3-36Analog Global ................................................. 3-61Analog Input ...................................................... 3-7Analog Output Summary Screen ..................... 3-22Binary Global .................................................. 3-80Control Output Summary Screen .................... 3-13Logic Switch Summary ................................... 3-34Satellite ............................................................ 3-38Trend Logging ................................................. 3-26TUC ............................................................... 3-131TUC - Control Output Summary Screen ....... 3-128TUC-VR Control Output Summary Screen .. 3-148Week Schedule ................................................ 3-55

System Architecturefor SAT II-B ..................................................... 5-31

System Parameter II Screen .................................... 3-99System Parameters Screen ...................................... 3-43System Requirements ................................................ 4-2System Wiring ......................................................... 5-10

T<Alt><T> ........................................................... 3-1, 3-42-Wire Sensors ........................................................ 5-243-Wire Temperature Sensor .................................... 5-24Tables

Rebuild Satellite ............................................ 3-101Telephone Override ................................................... 5-1



Index

Temperature Sensor2-Wire .............................................................. 5-243-Wire .............................................................. 5-244-20 MA .......................................................... 5-24General Information ........................................ 5-24Room ............................................................... 5-37VDC ................................................................ 5-25

Tenant Override ...................................................... 3-98Tenant Override Report .............................. 3-115, 3-118Tenant Override Report Screen ..............................3-118Tenant Override Screen ..........................................3-115Tenant Utility List ..................................................3-116Terminal

C ................................................................... 5-12R/T .................................................................. 5-12

Terminal Unit Controller ............................ 3-125, 3-144Defi ned .......................................................... 3-125

Timeclock Screen ........................................... 3-12, 3-20Toggle Switches ...................................................... 5-28Transformer ............................................................. 5-37

Isolation ........................................................... 5-37Trend Logging Summary Screen ............................ 3-26Trend Log Graph ..................................................... 3-29Trend Logs

Change-Of-State Trend Log ............................ 3-58Reset .................................................................. 3-2

Trend ModesAnalog Peak .................................................... 3-25Analog Trend ................................................... 3-25Change of State ............................................... 3-25Run Time Total ................................................ 3-25

Trigonometric Functions ......................................... 3-75TUC

Setting Up ...................................................... 3-125TUC’s

Addressing ....................................................... 5-29Numbering ....................................................... 5-29

TUC - Analog Input Screen .................................. 3-127TUC - Control Output Summary Screen .............. 3-128TUC - EA Driver Screen ....................................... 3-129TUC-VR .................................................................. 5-36

General Information ...................................... 3-144TUC-VR Analog Input Screen .............................. 3-147TUC-VR Communication Wires ............................. 5-40TUC-VR Control Output Summary Screen .......... 3-148TUC-VR EA Driver Screen .................................. 3-150TUC-VR Setup Screen .......................................... 3-152TUC General Information ..................................... 3-125TUC Set-Up Screen .............................................. 3-125TUC Setup Screen ................................................. 3-134TUC Summary Screen .......................................... 3-131Two Wire Communication Loop ............................. 5-10

Type ..................................................................... 3-123Typical Wiring Diagram .......................................... 5-20

UUtility-System Parameter II Screen ........................ 3-54Utility Screen .......................................................... 3-98

VV-Out (DAC) Modules ............................................ 5-16V-Out Binary Interface Board ................................. 5-18V-Out Board ............................................................ 5-18VDC Sensors ........................................................... 5-25Velocity Reset ....................................................... 3-144VR ..................................................................... 3-144

WWCC/SCC File Management Screen .................... 3-121Week Schedules ...................................................... 3-42Week Schedule Screen ............................................ 3-56Week Schedule Summary Screen ........................... 3-55Wires

C ....................................................................5-11R/T ...................................................................5-11

WiringSAT II-B to TUC-VR ...................................... 5-41

Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 5-20PI Board ........................................................... 5-23for Satellite Controller ....................................... 5-9SAT II-A .......................................................... 5-30SAT II-B .......................................................... 5-34

Form: WM-WCCII-OGD-01A Printed in the USA December 2006 All rights reserved. Copyright 2006 WattMaster Controls, Inc. • 8500 NW River Park Drive • Parkville, MO • 64152 Phone (816) 505-1100 www.wcc-controls.com Fax (816) 505-1101

WCC II · 2015-07-14 · The Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) is a microprocessor based device which...

Documents

Transcript of WCC II · 2015-07-14 · The Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) is a microprocessor based device which...